You are on page 1of 488

Part No.

320985-A
November 2005

4655 Great America Parkway


Santa Clara, CA 95054

System Configuration Guide


Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425
Software Release 3.6

*320985-A*
2

Copyright 2005 Nortel Networks. All rights reserved.


The information in this document is subject to change without notice. The statements, configurations, technical data, and
recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable, but are presented without express or implied
warranty. Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document. The
information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance
with the terms of that license. The software license agreement is included in this document.

Trademarks
*Nortel, Nortel Networks, the Nortel logo, the Globemark, Unified Networks, and BayStack are trademarks of Nortel
Networks.
Adobe and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
The asterisk after a name denotes a trademarked item.

Restricted rights legend


Use, duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph
(c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013.
Notwithstanding any other license agreement that may pertain to, or accompany the delivery of, this computer software,
the rights of the United States Government regarding its use, reproduction, and disclosure are as set forth in the
Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19.

Statement of conditions
In the interest of improving internal design, operational function, and/or reliability, Nortel Networks reserves the right to
make changes to the products described in this document without notice.
Nortel Networks does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product(s) or circuit
layout(s) described herein.
Portions of the code in this software product may be Copyright 1988, Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of such portions are permitted, provided that the above
copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials,
and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that such portions of the software were developed
by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from such portions of the software without specific prior written permission.
SUCH PORTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
In addition, the program and information contained herein are licensed only pursuant to a license agreement that contains
restrictions on use and disclosure (that may incorporate by reference certain limitations and notices imposed by third
parties).

320985-A
3

Nortel Networks software license agreement


This Software License Agreement (License Agreement) is between you, the end-user (Customer) and Nortel
Networks Corporation and its subsidiaries and affiliates (Nortel Networks). PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING
CAREFULLY. YOU MUST ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS IN ORDER TO DOWNLOAD AND/OR USE THE
SOFTWARE. USE OF THE SOFTWARE CONSTITUTES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT. If you do not accept these terms and conditions, return the Software, unused and in the original shipping
container, within 30 days of purchase to obtain a credit for the full purchase price.
Software is owned or licensed by Nortel Networks, its parent or one of its subsidiaries or affiliates, and is copyrighted
and licensed, not sold. Software consists of machine-readable instructions, its components, data, audio-visual content
(such as images, text, recordings or pictures) and related licensed materials including all whole or partial copies. Nortel
Networks grants you a license to use the Software only in the country where you acquired the Software. You obtain no
rights other than those granted to you under this License Agreement. You are responsible for the selection of the
Software and for the installation of, use of, and results obtained from the Software.
1. Licensed Use of Software. Nortel Networks grants Customer a nonexclusive license to use a copy of the Software
on only one machine at any one time or to the extent of the activation or authorized usage level, whichever is applicable.
To the extent Software is furnished for use with designated hardware or Customer furnished equipment (CFE),
Customer is granted a nonexclusive license to use Software only on such hardware or CFE, as applicable. Software
contains trade secrets and Customer agrees to treat Software as confidential information using the same care and
discretion Customer uses with its own similar information that it does not wish to disclose, publish or disseminate.
Customer will ensure that anyone who uses the Software does so only in compliance with the terms of this Agreement.
Customer shall not a) use, copy, modify, transfer or distribute the Software except as expressly authorized; b) reverse
assemble, reverse compile, reverse engineer or otherwise translate the Software; c) create derivative works or
modifications unless expressly authorized; or d) sublicense, rent or lease the Software. Licensors of intellectual property
to Nortel Networks are beneficiaries of this provision. Upon termination or breach of the license by Customer or in the
event designated hardware or CFE is no longer in use, Customer will promptly return the Software to Nortel Networks or
certify its destruction. Nortel Networks may audit by remote polling or other reasonable means to determine Customers
Software activation or usage levels. If suppliers of third party software included in Software require Nortel Networks to
include additional or different terms, Customer agrees to abide by such terms provided by Nortel Networks with respect
to such third party software.
2. Warranty. Except as may be otherwise expressly agreed to in writing between Nortel Networks and Customer,
Software is provided AS IS without any warranties (conditions) of any kind. NORTEL NETWORKS DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES (CONDITIONS) FOR THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ANY WARRANTY OF NON-INFRINGEMENT. Nortel Networks is not obligated to
provide support of any kind for the Software. Some jurisdictions do not allow exclusion of implied warranties, and, in
such event, the above exclusions may not apply.
3. Limitation of Remedies. IN NO EVENT SHALL NORTEL NETWORKS OR ITS AGENTS OR SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING: a) DAMAGES BASED ON ANY THIRD PARTY CLAIM; b) LOSS OF,
OR DAMAGE TO, CUSTOMERS RECORDS, FILES OR DATA; OR c) DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS),
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) ARISING OUT OF YOUR
USE OF THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF NORTEL NETWORKS, ITS AGENTS OR SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN
ADVISED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY. The foregoing limitations of remedies also apply to any developer and/or supplier
of the Software. Such developer and/or supplier is an intended beneficiary of this Section. Some jurisdictions do not
allow these limitations or exclusions and, in such event, they may not apply.
4. General
a. If Customer is the United States Government, the following paragraph shall apply: All Nortel Networks
Software available under this License Agreement is commercial computer software and commercial computer
software documentation and, in the event Software is licensed for or on behalf of the United States

System Configuration Guide


4

Government, the respective rights to the software and software documentation are governed by Nortel
Networks standard commercial license in accordance with U.S. Federal Regulations at 48 C.F.R. Sections
12.212 (for non-DoD entities) and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202 (for DoD entities).
b. Customer may terminate the license at any time. Nortel Networks may terminate the license if Customer fails
to comply with the terms and conditions of this license. In either event, upon termination, Customer must
either return the Software to Nortel Networks or certify its destruction.
c. Customer is responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal property taxes, resulting from
Customers use of the Software. Customer agrees to comply with all applicable laws including all applicable
export and import laws and regulations.
d. Neither party may bring an action, regardless of form, more than two years after the cause of the action arose.
e. The terms and conditions of this License Agreement form the complete and exclusive agreement between
Customer and Nortel Networks.
f. This License Agreement is governed by the laws of the country in which Customer acquires the Software. If
the Software is acquired in the United States, then this License Agreement is governed by the laws of the state
of New York.

320985-A
5

Contents

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34


Text conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Related publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
How to get help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Getting help from the Nortel web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Getting help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Chapter 1
About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

New features in software release 3.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39


Link Layer Discovery Protocol (IEEE 802.1ab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
LLDP operational modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Connectivity and management information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Transmitting LLDPDUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
TLV system MIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
LLDPDU and TLV error handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Configuring LLDP using the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Ethernet Switch 425-48T stacking support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Username and password enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Radius password fallback enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
SNMP trap port enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
EAPoL with Guest VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
shutdown command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
reload command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
show mac-address-table enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

System Configuration Guide


6 Contents

restore factory-default command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48


Ping enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
show interfaces config command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Autosave enable/disable enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Download without reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
write memory and save config commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Daylight savings time enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
BootP when needed as default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
VLAN tagging enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
VLAN Configuration Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Port mirroring configuration rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Other features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
SFP GBIC Support on the Ethernet Switch 425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Flash memory storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Switch software image storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Autosensing, and autonegotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
RFCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
BootP automatic IP configuration/MAC address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Configuration and switch management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Hardware components of the Ethernet Switch 325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Console port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Port connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
LED display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Cooling fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
AC power receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Hardware components of the Ethernet Switch 425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
User Interface button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Setting the unit as the Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Setting the unit as the non-base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Setting the unit as a standalone unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Resetting the stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

320985-A
Contents 7

Resetting the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70


Aborting a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Setting the default IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
LED display during change in IP address and subnet mask . . . . . . . . . . 73
Console port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Gigabit Interface Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Port connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
LED display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Cascade Up and Down connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Cooling fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
AC power receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Network configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Desktop switch application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Segment switch application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
High-density switched workgroup application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Stack operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Initial installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Stack MAC address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Removing a unit from the stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Stack configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Stack up configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Stack down configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Chapter 2
Using the console interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Accessing the CI menus and screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93


Using the CI menus and screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Navigating the CI menus and screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Screen fields and descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
System Characteristics screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Switch Configuration Menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Port list syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

System Configuration Guide


8 Contents

Accelerator keys for repetitive tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107


Adding a new port to an existing port number list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Removing a port from an existing port number list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Port Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Choosing a high speed flow control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Symmetric mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Asymmetric mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Rate Limiting Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Chapter 3
CLI Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

CLI command modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120


Port numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Port numbering in standalone mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Port numbering in stacked mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Accessing CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Setting the system username and password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Getting help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Basic navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
General navigation commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Keystroke navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
help command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
no command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
default command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
logout command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
enable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
configure command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
interface command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
disable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
end command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
exit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
shutdown command for the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
reload command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Managing basic system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

320985-A
Contents 9

show sys-info command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138


show tech command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
show stack-info command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
show stacking-mode command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
renumber unit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Managing MAC address forwarding database table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
show mac-address-table command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
mac-address-table aging-time command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
default mac-address-table aging-time command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Chapter 4
Getting Started with Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Installing Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147


JDM installation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Installing the Device Manager software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Installing JDM on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Windows minimum requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Removing previous versions of JDM on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Installing JDM on Windows from the CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Installing JDM on Windows from the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Executing the JDM installation software on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Minimum requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Installing JDM on Solaris from the CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Installing JDM on HP-UX from the CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Installing JDM on Linux from the CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux from the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Executing the JDM installation software on UNIX or Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Removing JDM in Unix or Linux environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Device Manager basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Starting Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Setting the Device Manager properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Opening a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Device Manager window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

System Configuration Guide


10 Contents

Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Device view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Selecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Selecting a single object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Selecting multiple objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Viewing information about a GBIC port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
LEDs and ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Shortcut menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Using the buttons in Device Manager dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Editing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Working with statistics and graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Types of statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Types of graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Statistics for single and multiple objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Viewing statistics as graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Telnet session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Opening an SSH connection to the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Opening the Web-based management home page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Trap log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Chapter 5
Using the Web-based management interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Logging in to the Web-based management interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Viewing summary information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Viewing summary switch information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Viewing stack information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Changing stack numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Identifying unit numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

320985-A
Contents 11

Chapter 6
System configuration using the Console Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

IP Configuration/Setup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214


Choosing a BootP request mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
BootP When Needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
BootP Always . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
BootP Disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
BootP or Last Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
SNMP Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
System Characteristics screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Console/Comm Port Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Logging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Renumber Stack Units screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Hardware Unit Information screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Software Download screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
LED Indications during the download process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Configuration File Download/Upload screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Binary configuration download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
ASCII Configuration file Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Enabling and disabling autosave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Using SNTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Configuring with CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Setting local time zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Using DNS to ping and Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Configuring with CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Chapter 7
System configuration using the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Configuring the switch IP address, subnet mask and default gateway . . . . . . . . . . . 252
IP notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Assigning and clearing IP addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
ip address command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
no ip address command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

System Configuration Guide


12 Contents

ip default-gateway command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254


no ip default-gateway command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
show ip command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
show ip address command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Assigning and clearing IP addresses for specific units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
ip address unit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
no ip address unit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
default ip address unit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Pinging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
ping command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Resetting the switch to default configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Using DNS to ping and telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
show ip dns command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
ping command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
ip name-server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
no ip name-server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
ip domain-name command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
no ip domain-name command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
default ip domain-name command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Configuration Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Automatically loading Configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
configure network command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
show config-network command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
ASCII Configuration Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
show running-config command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
copy running-config tftp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Customizing your system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Setting the terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
show terminal command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
terminal command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
show cli command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Displaying system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Setting boot parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
boot command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
ip bootp server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

320985-A
Contents 13

no ip bootp server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276


default ip bootp server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Setting TFTP parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
show tftp-server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
tftp-server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
no tftp-server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
copy config tftp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
copy tftp config command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Setting the default management interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
cmd-interface command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Customizing the opening banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
banner command for displaying banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
show banner command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
no banner command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Displaying the ARP table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Displaying interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
show interfaces command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
show interfaces config command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Saving the configuration to NVRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
copy config nvram command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
write memory command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
save config command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Enabling and disabling autosave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
show autosave command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
autosave enable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
no autosave enable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
default autosave enable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Setting time on network elements using Simple Network Time Protocol . . . . . . . . . . 289
show sntp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
sntp enable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
no sntp enable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
sntp server primary address command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
sntp server secondary address command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
no sntp server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
sntp sync-now command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

System Configuration Guide


14 Contents

sntp sync-interval command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293


Setting local time zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
clock time-zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
no clock time-zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
clock summer-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
no clock summer-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
show clock time-zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
show clock summer-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Enabling Autopology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
autotopology command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
no autotopology command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
default autotopology command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
show autotopology settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
show autotopology nmm-table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Configuring LLDP using the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
lldp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
default lldp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
lldp port config notification command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
no lldp port config notification command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
default lldp port config notification command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
lldp tx-tlv command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
no lldp tx-tlv command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
default lldp tx-tlv command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
lldp port status command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
no lldp port status command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
default lldp port status command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
show lldp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
show lldp port command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Configuring LEDs on the display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Configuring UI button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
ui-button enable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
ui-button unit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
show ui-button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
default ui-button command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
no ui-button command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

320985-A
Contents 15

Upgrading software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315


download command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Chapter 8
Ethernet port management using the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Enabling or disabling a port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319


shutdown command for the port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
no shutdown command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Naming ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
name command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
no name command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
default name command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Setting port speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
speed command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
default speed command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
duplex command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
default duplex command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Enabling flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
flowcontrol command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
no flowcontrol command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
default flowcontrol command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Enabling rate-limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
show rate-limit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
rate-limit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
no rate-limit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
default rate-limit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Enabling Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements (CANA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
show auto-negotiation-advertisements command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
show auto-negotiation-capabilities command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
auto-negotiation-advertisements command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
no auto-negotiation-advertisements command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
default auto-negotiation-advertisements command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

System Configuration Guide


16 Contents

Chapter 9
Configuring the switch using Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Viewing Unit information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337


Unit tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Rate Limit tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Viewing switch IP information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Globals tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Addresses tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
ARP tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Editing the chassis configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
System tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Base Unit Info tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Stack Info tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Agent tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
PowerSupply tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Fan tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Banner tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Custom Banner tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Working with configuration files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
FileSystem dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
ASCII config file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Working with SNTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Configuring SNTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Displaying topology information using Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Topology tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Topology Table tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Chapter 10
Configuring ports using Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Viewing and editing a single port configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367


Interface tab for a single port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Viewing and editing multiple port configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Interface tab for multiple ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

320985-A
Contents 17

Chapter 11
Administering the switch using Web-based management. . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Viewing system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375


Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Configuring system security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Rebooting the Ethernet Switch 325/425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Changing the Ethernet Switch 325/425 to system defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Logging out of the management interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Chapter 12
Configuring the switch using Web-based management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Configuring BootP, IP, and gateway settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385


Modifying system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Configuring switch port autonegotiation speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Configuring high speed flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Downloading switch images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Downloading ASCII configuration files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Storing and retrieving a switch configuration file from a TFTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Requirements for storing and retrieving configuration
parameters on a TFTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Enabling and disabling autosave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Configuring port communication speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Configuring Rate Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Configuring Rate Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Chapter 13
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Interpreting the LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405


Diagnosing and correcting problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Normal power-up sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Port connection problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Autonegotiation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Port interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Appendix A

System Configuration Guide


18 Contents

Installing an SFP Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Locking/extractor mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
SFP labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
SFP models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
CWDM SFP models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Installing SFPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Removing an SFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
SFP specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
SFP physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
1000BASE-SX (LC Type) specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
1000BASE-LX (LC Type) specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
1000BASE-SX (MT-RJ Type) specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
CWDM SFP specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
How to get help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Hard-copy technical manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Appendix B
Connectors and pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

RJ-45 (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) port connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425


MDI and MDI-X devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
MDI-X to MDI cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
MDI-X to MDI-X cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
DB-9 (RS-232-D) Console/Comm Port connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
1000Base-T pinouts for the Ethernet Switch 425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Appendix C
Default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Appendix D
Sample BootP configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Appendix E

320985-A
Contents 19

Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Appendix F
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469


Electrical parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Physical dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Data rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Network protocol and standards compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Safety agency certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Electromagnetic emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Electromagnetic immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

System Configuration Guide


20 Contents

320985-A
21

Figures

Figure 1 LLDP how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41


Figure 2 Ethernet Switch 325-24G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 3 Ethernet Switch 325-24G front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 4 Ethernet Switch 325-24G LED display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Figure 5 Ethernet Switch 325-24T back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Figure 6 Ethernet Switch 425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 7 Ethernet Switch 425-24T front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 8 Ethernet Switch 425 LED display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Figure 9 Ethernet Switch 425 back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Figure 10 Ethernet Switch 325 used as a desktop switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Figure 11 Ethernet Switch 425 used as a desktop switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Figure 12 Ethernet Switch 325 used as a segment switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Figure 13 Ethernet Switch 425 used as a segment switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Figure 14 Configuring power workgroups and a shared media hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Figure 15 Stack up configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Figure 16 Stack down configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 17 Map of console interface screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Figure 18 Console interface main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Figure 19 System Characteristics screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Figure 20 Switch Configuration Menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 21 MAC Address Security Port Lists screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Figure 22 Port Configuration screen (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Figure 23 Port Configuration screen (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Figure 24 High Speed Flow Control Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 25 Rate Limiting Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Figure 26 CLI command mode hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Figure 27 Ethernet Switch 425-48T banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Figure 28 Main Menu for Ethernet Switch 425-48T console interface . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figure 29 help command output in privExec mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

System Configuration Guide


22 Figures

Figure 30 show sys-info command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138


Figure 31 show tech command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Figure 32 show tech command output (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 33 show tech command output (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Figure 34 show stack-info command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Figure 35 show stacking-mode command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Figure 36 show mac-address-table command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Figure 37 mac-address-table aging-time output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Figure 38 InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Figure 39 License Agreement dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Figure 40 Choose Install Set dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Figure 41 Feature Sets dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Figure 42 Choose Install Folder dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Figure 43 Choose Shortcut Folder dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Figure 44 Pre-Installation Summary dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Figure 45 Install Complete dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Figure 46 InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Figure 47 License Agreement dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Figure 48 Choose Install Set dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Figure 49 Feature Sets dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Figure 50 Choose Install Folder dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Figure 51 Pre-Installation Summary dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 52 Installing Java Device Manager dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Figure 53 Install Complete dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Figure 54 Device Manager window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Figure 55 Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Figure 56 Open Device dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Figure 57 Device view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 58 Parts of the Device Manager window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 59 Objects in the device view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Figure 60 Interface tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Figure 61 Color port legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Figure 62 Switch unit shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Figure 63 Port shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Figure 64 Line graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

320985-A
Figures 23

Figure 65 Area graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188


Figure 66 Bar graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Figure 67 Pie graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Figure 68 Interface statistics for a single port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Figure 69 Interface statistics for multiple ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Figure 70 Statistics dialog box for a port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Figure 71 Web-based management home page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure 72 Web-based management interface home page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Figure 73 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Figure 74 Console page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Figure 75 Switch Information page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Figure 76 Stack Information page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Figure 77 Stack Numbering Setting page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Figure 78 Identify Unit Numbers page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Figure 79 IP Configuration/Setup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Figure 80 SNMP Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Figure 81 System Characteristics screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Figure 82 Console/Comm Port Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Figure 83 Login screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Figure 84 Renumber Stack Units screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Figure 85 Hardware Unit Information screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Figure 86 TELNET Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Figure 87 Software Download screen for an Ethernet Switch 325/425 stack . . . . . 239
Figure 88 Configuration File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Figure 89 Configuration File Download/Upload screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Figure 90 ASCII Configuration File Download screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Figure 91 Autosave Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Figure 92 show ip command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Figure 93 show ip address command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Figure 94 ping command responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Figure 95 show ip dns command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Figure 96 ping command responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Figure 97 show config-network command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Figure 98 Output of the show running-config command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Figure 99 show terminal command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

System Configuration Guide


24 Figures

Figure 100 show cli command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273


Figure 101 show sys-info command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Figure 102 show tftp-server command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Figure 103 show arp-table command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Figure 104 show interfaces names command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Figure 105 show interfaces command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Figure 106 show interfaces config command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Figure 107 show autosave command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Figure 108 show sntp command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Figure 109 show clock time-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Figure 110 show clock summer-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Figure 111 show autotopology settings command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Figure 112 show autotopology nmm-table command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Figure 113 show lldp local-sys-data command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Figure 114 show lldp mgmt-sys-data command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Figure 115 show lldp stats command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Figure 116 show lldp port neighbor command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Figure 117 show lldp port neighbor-mgmt-addr command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Figure 118 show lldp port rx-stats command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Figure 119 show lldp port tx-stats command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Figure 120 show lldp port tx-tlv command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Figure 121 ui-button enable command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Figure 122 show ui-button command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Figure 123 download message for Ethernet Switch 425-48T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Figure 124 shutdown [port <portlist>] command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Figure 125 show rate-limit command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Figure 126 show auto-negotiation-advertisements command output . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Figure 127 show auto-negotiation-capabilities command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Figure 128 Unit dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Figure 129 Rate Limit tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Figure 130 Globals tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Figure 131 Edit IP dialog box IP Address tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Figure 132 Edit IP dialog box ARP tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Figure 133 Edit Chassis dialog box System tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Figure 134 Edit Chassis dialog box Base Unit Info tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

320985-A
Figures 25

Figure 135 Edit Chassis dialog box Stack Info tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Figure 136 Edit Chassis dialog box Agent tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Figure 137 Edit Chassis dialog box Power Supply tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Figure 138 Edit Chassis dialog box Fan tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Figure 139 Edit Chassis dialog box Banner tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Figure 140 Telnet window with default banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Figure 141 Telnet window without banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Figure 142 Edit Chassis dialog box Custom Banner tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Figure 143 Telnet window with custom banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Figure 144 FileSystem - Config/Image/Diag File tab dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Figure 145 File system - ASCII Config File dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Figure 146 SNTP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Figure 147 Diagnostics dialog box Topology tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Figure 148 Diagnostics dialog box Topology Table tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Figure 149 Port dialog box Interface tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Figure 150 Interface tab fields for multiple ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Figure 151 System Information page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Figure 152 Quick Start page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Figure 153 Reset page message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Figure 154 Reset page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Figure 155 Reset to Default page message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Figure 156 Reset to Default page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Figure 157 Logout message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Figure 158 IP page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Figure 159 System page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Figure 160 Port Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Figure 161 High Speed Flow Control page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Figure 162 Software Download page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Figure 163 Ascii Configuration file download page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Figure 164 Configuration File Download/Upload page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Figure 165 Console/Communication Port page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Figure 166 Rate Limiting page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Figure 167 Locking/extractor mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Figure 168 Nortel SFP label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Figure 169 Inserting an SFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

System Configuration Guide


26 Figures

Figure 170 Removing an SFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416


Figure 171 RJ-45 (8-pin modular) port connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Figure 172 MDI-X to MDI cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Figure 173 MDI-X to MDI-X cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Figure 174 DB-9 Console port connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

320985-A
27

Tables

Table 1 VLAN Tagging mode definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51


Table 2 Components on the Ethernet Switch 325 switch front panel . . . . . . . . . . 58
Table 3 Ethernet Switch 325-24G LED descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Table 4 Components on the Ethernet Switch 325 back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Table 5 International power cord specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Table 6 Components of the Ethernet Switch 425-24T front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Table 7 UI button LEDs on the Ethernet Switch 425-24T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Table 8 UI button LED display during change in IP address and subnet mask . . . 74
Table 9 Ethernet Switch 425 LED descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Table 10 Components on the Ethernet Switch 425 back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Table 11 International power cord specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Table 12 Stack up configuration description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Table 13 Stack down configuration description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Table 14 Console interface main menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Table 15 System Characteristics screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Table 16 Switch Configuration Menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Table 17 Port Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Table 18 High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Table 19 Rate Limiting Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Table 20 Command mode prompts and entrance/exit commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Table 21 Keystroke navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Table 22 configure command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Table 23 interface command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Table 24 shutdown command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Table 25 reload command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Table 26 show mac-address-table command parameters and variables . . . . . . . 144
Table 27 mac-address-table aging-time command parameters and variables . . . 145
Table 28 Properties dialog box fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Table 29 SNMP community string default values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

System Configuration Guide


28 Tables

Table 30 Open Device dialog box fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176


Table 31 Menu bar commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Table 32 Toolbar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Table 33 Selecting multiple objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Table 34 Port color codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Table 35 Switch unit shortcut menu command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Table 36 Port shortcut menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Table 37 Device Manager buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Table 38 Types of statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Table 39 Graph dialog box buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Table 40 Help file locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Table 41 Main headings and options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Table 42 Menu icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Table 43 Page icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Table 44 Switch Information page fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Table 45 Stack Information page fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Table 46 Stack Numbering Setting page fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Table 47 IP Configuration/Setup screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Table 48 SNMP Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Table 49 System Characteristics screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Table 50 Console/Comm Port Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Table 51 Renumber Stack Units screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Table 52 TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Table 53 Software Download screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Table 54 Configuration File Download/Upload screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Table 55 Parameters not saved to the configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Table 56 ASCII Configuration File Download/Upload screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Table 57 Autosave Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Table 58 ip address command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Table 59 no ip address command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Table 60 ip default-gateway command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Table 61 show ip command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Table 62 show ip address command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Table 63 ip address unit command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Table 64 no ip address unit command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

320985-A
Tables 29

Table 65 default ip address unit command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . 259


Table 66 ping command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Table 67 ping command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Table 68 ip name-server command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Table 69 no ip name-server command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Table 70 ip domain-name command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Table 71 configure network command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Table 72 copy running-config tftp command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . 270
Table 73 terminal command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Table 74 show cli command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Table 75 boot command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Table 76 ip bootp server command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Table 77 tftp-server command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Table 78 copy config tftp command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Table 79 copy tftp config command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Table 80 cmd-interface command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Table 81 banner command parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Table 82 show banner command parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Table 83 show interfaces command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Table 84 show interfaces config command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . 285
Table 85 sntp server primary address command parameters and variables . . . . . 291
Table 86 sntp server secondary address command parameters and variables . . 292
Table 87 no sntp server command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Table 88 sntp sync-interval command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Table 89 clock time-zone command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Table 90 clock summer-time command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Table 91 lldp command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Table 92 default lldp command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Table 93 lldp port config notification command parameters and variables . . . . . . 302
Table 94 no lldp port config notification command parameters and variables . . . . 303
Table 95 no lldp port config notification command parameters and variables . . . . 303
Table 96 lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Table 97 no lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Table 98 default lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Table 99 lldp port status command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

System Configuration Guide


30 Tables

Table 100 no lldp port status command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Table 101 default lldp port status command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . 307
Table 102 show lldp command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Table 103 show lldp port command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Table 104 blink-leds command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Table 105 download command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Table 106 shutdown [port <portlist>] command parameters and variables . . . . . . 320
Table 107 no shutdown command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Table 108 name command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Table 109 no name command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Table 110 default name command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Table 111 speed command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Table 112 default speed command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Table 113 duplex command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Table 114 default duplex command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Table 115 flowcontrol command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Table 116 no flowcontrol command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Table 117 default flowcontrol command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Table 118 rate-limit command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Table 119 show auto-negotiation-advertisements command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Table 120 show auto-negotiation-capabilities command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Table 121 auto-negotiation-advertisements command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Table 122 no auto-negotiation-advertisements command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Table 123 default auto-negotiation-advertisements command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Table 124 Unit tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Table 125 Rate Limit tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Table 126 Globals tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Table 127 Addresses tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Table 128 ARP tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Table 129 System tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Table 130 Base Unit Info tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Table 131 Stack Info tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Table 132 Agent tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Table 133 Power Supply tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Table 134 Fan tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

320985-A
Tables 31

Table 135 FileSystem Config/Image/Diag file dialog box fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359


Table 136 ASCII Config File tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Table 137 SNTP dialog box fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Table 138 Topology tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Table 139 Topology Table tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Table 140 Interface tab fields for a single port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Table 141 Interface tab fields for multiple ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Table 142 System Information page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Table 143 Items on the Quick Start page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Table 144 IP page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Table 145 System page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Table 146 Port Management page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Table 147 High Speed Flow Control page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Table 148 Software Download page fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Table 149 LED Indications during the software download process . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Table 150 Ascii Configuration file download page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Table 151 Configuration File Setting items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Table 152 Parameters not saved to the configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Table 153 Console/Communication Port page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Table 154 Rate Limiting page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Table 155 Corrective actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Table 156 1000BASE-SFP models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Table 157 Nortel CWDM SFP transceiver list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Table 158 Technical specifications for 1000BASE-SX, and 1000BASE-LX SFPs . 417
Table 159 1000BASE-SX SFP specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Table 160 1000BASE-LX SFP specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Table 161 1000BASE-SX SFP specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Table 162 CWDM SFP (70 km) specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Table 163 CWDM SFP (40 km) specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Table 164 RJ-45 port connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Table 165 DB-9 Console port connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Table 166 Pin descriptions for 1000Base-T pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Table 167 Factory default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Table 168 CLI command list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Table 169 Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

System Configuration Guide


32 Tables

Table 170 Electrical parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469


Table 171 Physical dimensions of the Ethernet Switch 325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Table 172 Physical dimensions of the Ethernet Switch 425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Table 173 Performance specifications of the Ethernet Switch 325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Table 174 Performance specifications of the Ethernet Switch 425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

320985-A
33

Preface

This guide provides information about configuring and managing basic switching
features on the Nortel Ethernet Switch 325 and Nortel Ethernet Switch 425.

This guide describes the features of the following Nortel switches.

Nortel Ethernet Switch 325-24T


Nortel Ethernet Switch 325-24G
Nortel Ethernet Switch 425-24T
Nortel Ethernet Switch 425-48T

The term Ethernet Switch 325/425 is used in this document to describe the
features common to the switches mentioned above.

The term Ethernet Switch 325 is used to describe features of the Ethernet
Switch 325-24G and Ethernet Switch 325-24T collectively.

Similarly the term Ethernet Switch 425 is used to describe the features of the
Ethernet Switch 425-24T and the Ethernet Switch 425-48T collectively.

A switch is referred to by its specific name while describing a feature exclusive to


the switch.

You can use the Ethernet Switch 425-24T and the Ethernet Switch 425-48T in the
standalone and stack configuration mode. The Ethernet Switch 325 operates only
in the standalone mode.

System Configuration Guide


34 Preface

Before you begin


This guide is intended for network administrators who have the following
background:

basic knowledge of networks, Ethernet bridging, and IP routing


familiarity with networking concepts and terminology
basic knowledge of network topologies

Text conventions
This guide uses the following text conventions:

angle brackets (< >) Indicate that you choose the text to enter based on the
description inside the brackets. Do not type the
brackets when entering the command.
Example: If the command syntax is
ping <ip_address>, you enter
ping 192.32.10.12
bold body text Indicates objects such as window names, dialog box
names, and icons, as well as user interface objects such
as buttons, tabs, and menu items.
braces ({}) Indicate required elements in syntax descriptions where
there is more than one option. You must choose only
one of the options. Do not type the braces when
entering the command.
Example: If the command syntax is
show ip {alerts|routes}, you must enter either
show ip alerts or show ip routes, but not both.
brackets ([ ]) Indicate optional elements in syntax descriptions. Do
not type the brackets when entering the command.
Example: If the command syntax is
show ip interfaces [-alerts], you can enter
either show ip interfaces or
show ip interfaces -alerts.

320985-A
Preface 35

italic text Indicates variables in command syntax descriptions.


Also indicates new terms and book titles. Where a
variable is two or more words, the words are connected
by an underscore.
Example: If the command syntax is
show at <valid_route>,
valid_route is one variable and you substitute one
value for it.
plain Courier Indicates command syntax and system output, for
text example, prompts and system messages.
Example: Set Trap Monitor Filters
separator ( > ) Shows menu paths.
Example: Protocols > IP identifies the IP command on
the Protocols menu.
vertical line ( | ) Separates choices for command keywords and
arguments. Enter only one of the choices. Do not type
the vertical line when entering the command.
Example: If the command syntax is
show ip {alerts|routes}, you enter either
show ip alerts or show ip routes, but not
both.

Related publications
For more information about using the Ethernet Switch 325/425, refer to the
following publications:

Release Notes for the Nortel Ethernet Switch 325/425, Software Release 3.6
(217155-C)
Documents important changes about the software and hardware that are not
covered in other related publications.
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
Describes how to configure Virtual Local Area Networks (VLAN), Spanning
Tree Protocol (STP), and MultiLink Trunk (MLT) features for the Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425.

System Configuration Guide


36 Preface

Configuring QoS for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320987-A)
Describes how to configure and manage Quality of Service and IP Filtering
features for the Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425.
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
Describes how to configure and manage security for the Nortel Ethernet
Switches 325 and 425.
System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
Describes how to configure system logging and network monitoring, and how
to display system statistics for the Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425.
Configuring IP Multicast for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320990-A)
Describes how to configure IP Multicast Routing Protocol features for the
Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425.

You can print selected technical manuals and release notes free, directly from
Internet. Go to www.nortel.com/support. Find the product for which you need
documentation. Then locate the specific category and model or version for your
hardware or software product. Use Adobe* Reader* to open the manuals and
release notes, search for the sections you need, and print them on most standard
printers. Go to www.adobe.com to download a free copy of Adobe Reader.

How to get help


This section explains how to get help for Nortel products and services.

Getting help from the Nortel web site

The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel
Technical Support web site:

www.nortel.com/support

320985-A
Preface 37

This site provides quick access to software, documentation, bulletins, and tools to
address issues with Nortel products. More specifically, the site enables you to:

download software, documentation, and product bulletins


search the Technical Support web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base for
answers to technical issues
sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation for
Nortel equipment
open and manage technical support cases

Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller

If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or
authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor or
reseller.

Getting help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center

If you do not find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support
web site, and have a Nortel support contract, you can also get help over the phone
from a Nortel Solutions Center.

In North America, call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835).

Outside North America, go to the following web site to obtain the phone number
for your region:

www.nortel.com/callus

Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing


Code
An Express Routing Code (ERC) is available for many Nortel products and
services. When you use an ERC, your call is routed to a technical support person
who specializes in supporting that product or service. To locate the ERC for your
product or service, go to:

www.nortel.com/erc

System Configuration Guide


38 Preface

320985-A
39

Chapter 1
About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

This chapter provides an introduction to the Ethernet switch software release 3.6.
This version of the Ethernet switch software supports the following devices:

Ethernet Switch 325


Ethernet Switch 425

This chapter describes the hardware components and features of the Ethernet
Switch 325/425, and covers the following topics:

New features in software release 3.6


Hardware components of the Ethernet Switch 325 on page 57
Hardware components of the Ethernet Switch 425 on page 67
Network configuration examples on page 83
Stack operation on page 87

New features in software release 3.6


The Ethernet Switch 325/425 provides wire-speed switching for
high-performance, low-cost connections to full-duplex and half-duplex
10/100/1000 Mb/s Ethernet Local Area Networks (LANs).

The following is the list of new features introduced in the Ethernet Switch 325/
425 software release 3.6.

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (IEEE 802.1ab) on page 40


Ethernet Switch 425-48T stacking support on page 44
Username and password enhancement on page 44

System Configuration Guide


40 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

Radius password fallback enhancement on page 45


SNMP trap port enhancement on page 46
EAPoL with Guest VLAN on page 46
shutdown command on page 46
reload command on page 47
show mac-address-table enhancement on page 48
restore factory-default command on page 48
Ping enhancement on page 49
show interfaces config command on page 49
Autosave enable/disable enhancement on page 49
Download without reset on page 50
write memory and save config commands on page 50
Daylight savings time enhancement on page 50
BootP when needed as default on page 51
VLAN tagging enhancement on page 51
VLAN Configuration Control on page 52
Port mirroring configuration rules on page 53

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (IEEE 802.1ab)


Release 3.6 software supports the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
(IEEE 802.1ab), which allows stations connected to a LAN to advertise their
capabilities to each other, enabling the discovery of physical topology information
for network management. LLDP-compatible stations can consist of any
interconnection device including PCs, IP Phones, switches, and routers. Each
LLDP station stores LLDP information in a standard Management Information
Base (MIB), making it possible for the information to be accessed by a network
management system (NMS) or application.

Each LLDP station:

advertises connectivity and management information about the local station to


adjacent stations on the same 802 LAN (802.3 Ethernet with Ethernet
Switches 325 and 425).

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 41

receives network management information from adjacent stations on the same


LAN.

LLDP also makes it possible to discover certain configuration inconsistencies or


malfunctions that can result in impaired communications at higher layers. For
example, it can be used to discover duplex mismatches between an IP Phone and
the connected switch.

LLDP is compatible with IETF PROTO MIB (IETF RFC 2922).

Figure 1 shows an example of how LLDP works in a network.

Figure 1 LLDP how it works

Router Ethernet Switch 425


1

TM

2 2

3 3

Management IP Phone
Workstation

1 The Ethernet Switch and router advertise chassis/port IDs and system
descriptions to each other.
2 The devices store the information about each other in local MIB databases,
accessible using SNMP.
3 A network management system retrieves the data stored by each device and
builds a network topology map.

System Configuration Guide


42 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

LLDP operational modes

LLDP is a one-way protocol. An LLDP agent can transmit information about the
capabilities and current status of the system associated with its MAC service
access point (MSAP) identifier. The LLDP agent can also receive information
about the capabilities and current status of the system associated with a remote
MSAP identifier. However, LLDP agents cannot solicit information from each
other.

You can set the local LLDP agent to transmit only, receive only, or to both
transmit and receive LLDP information. You can configure the state for LLDP
reception and transmission using SNMP or CLI commands.

Connectivity and management information

The information fields in each LLDP frame are contained in a Link Layer
Discovery Protocol Data Unit (LLDPDU) as a sequence of short, variable length,
information elements known as TLVs (type, length, value).

Each LLDPDU includes the following four mandatory TLVs:

Chassis ID TLV
Port ID TLV
Time To Live TLV
End Of LLDPDU TLV

The chassis ID and the port ID values are concatenated to form a logical MSAP
identifier that is used by the recipient to identify the sending LLDP agent and port.

A non-zero value in the Time to Live (TTL) field of the TTL TLV indicates to the
receiving LLDP agent how long the LLDPDU information from the MSAP
identifier remains valid. All LLDPDU information is automatically discarded by
the receiving LLDP agent if the sender fails to update it in a timely manner. A
zero value in TTL field of Time To Live TLV tells the receiving LLDP agent to
discard the information associated with the LLDPDU MSAP identifier.

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 43

In addition to the four mandatory TLVs, Release 3.6 software supports the basic
management TLV set. You can specify which of these optional TLVs to include
in the transmitted LLDPDUs for each port.

The optional management TLVs are as follows:

Port Description TLV


System Name TLV
System Description TLV
System Capabilities TLV (indicates both the system supported capabilities
and enabled capabilities, such as end station, bridge, or router)
Management Address TLV

Transmitting LLDPDUs

When a transmit cycle is initiated, the LLDP manager extracts the managed
objects from the LLDP local system MIB and formats this information into TLVs.
The TLVs are then inserted into the LLDPDU.

LLDPDU are regularly transmitted at a user-configurable transmit interval


(tx-delay), or when any of the variables contained in the LLPDU is modified on
the local system (such as system name or management address). Tx-delay is the
minimum delay between successive LLDP frame transmissions.

TLV system MIBs

The LLDP local system MIB stores the information for constructing the various
TLVs to be sent. The LLDP remote systems MIB stores the information received
from remote LLDP agents.

LLDPDU and TLV error handling

LLDPDUs and TLVs that contain detectable errors are discarded. TLVs that are
not recognized, but that also contain no basic format errors, are assumed to be
validated and are stored for possible later retrieval by network management.

System Configuration Guide


44 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

Configuring LLDP using the CLI

For information about configuring LLDP using the CLI, refer to Configuring
LLDP using the CLI on page 300.

Ethernet Switch 425-48T stacking support


With Release 3.6 software, the Ethernet Switch 425-48T can be stacked together
with the Ethernet Switch 425-24T up to eight units high. You can stack the units
using the Ethernet Switch 425 stack cables, which are available in 30 cm (1 foot)
and 1 m (3 foot) lengths. These cables can be ordered separately (order number
AL2018005 and AL2018006, respectively).

Note: With Release 3.6 software, the Ethernet Switches 425-24T and
425-48T have stacking enabled by default, which means that ports 26
and 50, respectively, are disabled by default. This is because the cascade
port shares resources with port 26 on the Ethernet Switch 425-24T and
port 50 on the Ethernet Switch 425-48T. Either the cascade port can be
active, or port 26 or 50 can be active.
If you want to use port 26 or port 50 in standalone mode, disable
stacking and reboot the switch.

For more information about stacking the Ethernet Switch 425-48T and Ethernet
Switch 425-24T devices, see Stack operation on page 87.

Username and password enhancement


With Release 3.6 software, you can use the CLI to set usernames as well as
passwords for system access through the Console Interface, CLI, Telnet, and
Web-based management. The syntax for the new username command is:

username <username> <password> [ro|rw]

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 45

If you set a password using the cli password command, the Console/Comm
Port Configuration screen, or the Password Setting Web-based management
page, the next time you log in to the switch, you are prompted to enter a valid
username. Therefore, ensure you are aware of the valid usernames (default RW
and RO) before you change passwords.

For more information, refer to Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).

Radius password fallback enhancement


With Release 3.6 software, you can configure RADIUS password fallback as an
option when you use RADIUS authentication for login and password.

When RADIUS password fallback is enabled and the RADIUS server is


unavailable or unreachable, you can use the local switch or stack password to log
in to the switch or stack.

When RADIUS password fallback is disabled, you must specify the RADIUS
username and password from the NetLogin screen. You cannot log in to the
switch or stack unless the RADIUS server is configured and reachable in order to
authenticate the login and password.

The Radius password fallback feature is disabled by default.

You can use the Console Interface or the radius-server password


fallback CLI command to enable this feature.

For more information, refer to Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).

System Configuration Guide


46 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

SNMP trap port enhancement


The SNMP trap port enhancement allows you to configure the SNMP trap port.
The default SNMP trap port used for communicating with the trap receiver is port
162. You can now configure a different SNMP trap port using the following CLI
command:

snmp-server host <host-ip> [port <1-65535>]


{<community-string>|v2c <community-string>|
v3 {auth|no-auth|auth-priv} <username>}

For more information, see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).

EAPoL with Guest VLAN


Prior to Release 3.6, EAP (802.1x) Authentication supported Port Based User
Access. At any time, only one user (MAC) could be authenticated on a port, and
the port could be assigned to only one Port-based VLAN. Only the MAC address
of the device/user that completed the EAP negotiations on the port had access to
that port for traffic. Any tagging of ingress packets would be to the PVID of that
port. This remains the default configuration.

With Software Release 3.6, EAP also allows Guest VLANs to be configured for
access to that port. Any active VLAN can be made a Guest VLAN.

For more information, see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).

shutdown command
The shutdown CLI command allows you to safely shut down and power off the
switch. Once the shutdown command is initiated, the switch saves the current
configuration, allowing you to power off the switch within the specified time
period (1 to 60 minutes). If the switch is not powered off within the allotted time,
the switch performs a reset.

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 47

For more information, see shutdown command for the unit on page 134.

reload command
The reload CLI command provides you with a configuration rollback
mechanism to prevent loss of connectivity to a switch, typically for remote
configurations. The reload command allows you to temporarily disable the
autosave feature for a specified time period (1 to 60 minutes), allowing you to
make a number of configuration changes on remote switches without affecting the
current saved configuration.

During the interval in which the autosave feature is disabled by the reload
command, you must use the copy config nvram, write mem, or
save config command to force a manual save of your configurations.

Once the reload timer expires, the switch reloads the last saved configuration. To
abort the switch reload before the timer expires, you must enter the
reload cancel command.

The reload command provides you with a safeguard against any


misconfigurations when you perform dynamic configuration changes on a remote
switch.

The following example describes how you can use the reload command to
prevent connectivity loss to a remote switch.

1 Enter the CLI command reload force 30. This instructs the switch to
reboot in 30 minutes, loading the configuration from NVRAM.
During this 30-minute period, autosave of the configuration to NVRAM is
disabled.

2 Execute dynamic switch configuration commands, which take effect


immediately. These configurations are not saved to NVRAM.

System Configuration Guide


48 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

3 If the configurations cause no problems and switch connectivity is


maintained, you can perform the following:
a Save the current running configuration using the copy config nvram,
write mem, or save config command.
b Since the new configuration is working properly, cancel the reload using
the reload cancel command.

If you make an error when performing configurations in Step 2 that results in the
loss of switch connectivity (for example, an error in the IP address mask, MLT
configuration, or VLAN trunking), the reload command provides you with a
safeguard: when the reload timer expires, the switch reboots to the last saved
configuration, and connectivity is re-established. Therefore, you do not have to
travel to the remote site to reconfigure the switch.

For more information, see reload command on page 136.

show mac-address-table enhancement


The show mac-address-table CLI command provides the following new
parameters: include/exclude <pattern>. These new parameters allow you
to filter the results of the command by displaying only those entries in the address
table that include or exclude the specified pattern. The value for <pattern> must
be a sequence of 1 to 6 bytes in hex, separated by dashes, for example:

show mac-address-table port 1/1-5 address


include 00-0E-45-23

For more information, see show mac-address-table command on page 144.

restore factory-default command


The restore factory-default CLI command resets the switch or stack back
to its default configuration.

The syntax for the restore factory-default command is:

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 49

restore factory-default [-y]

where the [-y] parameter instructs the switch not to prompt for confirmation.

For more information, refer to Resetting the switch to default configuration on


page 261.

Ping enhancement
Release 3.6 software extends the ping capabilities of the device. Using the CLI,
you can now specify additional ping parameters, including the number of ICMP
packets to be sent, the packet size, the interval between packets, and the timeout.
You can also set ping to continuous, or you can set a debug flag to obtain extra
debug information.

For more information, see Pinging on page 259.

show interfaces config command


The show interfaces config CLI command displays the current operational
status of interfaces and provides supplementary information about the current port
settings for Spanning Tree Protocol.

For more information, see show interfaces config command on page 284.

Autosave enable/disable enhancement


Release 3.6 software extends the ability to set autosave enable/disable using the
Console Interface (Configuration File > Autosave Configuration) and Web-based
management (Configuration > Configuration File).

System Configuration Guide


50 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

Download without reset


The download without reset enhancement allows you to download diagnostic and
image software to the switch without the switch performing an automatic reset.
Once the software is downloaded, you must initiate a manual reset to load the new
diagnostic and software images.

For more information, see Software Download screen on page 237 and
download command on page 316.

write memory and save config commands


Release 3.6 software provides two additional CLI commands to save the switch
configuration to NVRAM. The write memory and save config commands
function identically to the copy config nvram command.

For more information, see the following:

write memory command on page 286


save config command on page 286

Daylight savings time enhancement


SNTP uses Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) for all time synchronizations so it
is not affected by different time zones. With Release 3.6 software, you can use the
following commands to set the switch to report the correct time for your local time
zone and for daylight savings time:

clock time-zone on page 294


no clock time-zone on page 295
clock summer-time on page 295
no clock summer-time on page 296
show clock time-zone on page 296
show clock summer-time on page 296

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 51

BootP when needed as default


With Release 3.6 software, the default operational mode for BootP on the switch
or stack is now BootP when needed. By default, the switch or stack attempts to
use BootP if no management address is configured.

VLAN tagging enhancement


Release 3.6 software provides additional options for VLAN port tagging. Rather
than setting a port to untagged or tagged mode, you can now also choose to enable
or disable PVID tagging.

Table 1 summarize the new tagging options.

Table 1 VLAN Tagging mode definitions

Tagging mode Definition

PVID Tagging Non-PVID Tagging

Untag All (Untagged Access) Disabled Disabled


Tag All (Tagged Trunk) Enabled Enabled
Tag PVID Only Enabled Disabled
Untag PVID Only Disabled Enabled

The additional options are available using only the Console Interface VLAN Port
Configuration screen or the vlan ports CLI command. For more information,
refer to Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A).

System Configuration Guide


52 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

VLAN Configuration Control


VLAN Configuration Control (VCC) is a new feature in Software Release 3.6 that
allows a switch administrator to control how VLANs are modified. VLAN
Configuration Control is a superset of the existing AutoPVID functionality and
incorporates this functionality for backwards compatibility. VLAN Configuration
Control is globally applied to all VLANs on the switch.

VLAN Configuration Control offers four options for controlling VLAN


modification:

1 Strict This option restricts the addition of an untagged port to a VLAN if it


is already a member of another VLAN. To add an untagged port to a new
VLAN, the switch administrator must remove the port from all other VLANs
of which it is a member of before adding it to the new VLAN. The PVID of
the port will be changed to the new VID to which it was added.

Note: Strict is the factory default setting.

2 Automatic This option automatically adds an untagged port to a new


VLAN and automatically removes it from any previous VLAN membership.
The PVID of the port is automatically changed to the VID of the VLAN it
joins. Since the port is first added to the new VLAN and then removed from
any previous membership, the Spanning Tree Group participation of the port
will not be disabled as long as the VLANs involved are in the same Spanning
Tree Group.
3 AutoPVID This option functions in the same manner as previous
AutoPVID functionality. When an untagged port is added to a new VLAN,
the port is added to the new VLAN and the PVID assigned to the new VID
without removing it from any previous VLAN memberships. Using this
option an untagged port can have membership in multiple VLANs.
4 Flexible This option functions in a similar manner to disabling AutoPVID
functionality. When this option is used, there are no restrictions on the
number of VLANs to which an untagged port can belong. Any new additions
of an untagged port to a new VLAN does not change the PVID of that port.

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 53

VLAN Configuration Control is only applied to ports with the tagging modes of
Untag All and Tag PVID Only. Ports with the tagging modes of Tag All and
Untag PVID Only are not governed by VLAN Configuration Control. Ports with
the tagging modes of Tag All and Untag PVID Only can belong to multiple
VLANs regardless of VLAN Configuration Control settings and must have their
PVID manually changed.

For more information, refer to Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and


MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320986-A).

Port mirroring configuration rules


Additional port mirroring configuration rules are available in System Monitoring
Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A).

Other features
SFP GBIC Support on the Ethernet Switch 425

Small Form Factor Pluggable transceivers (SFPs) are hot-swappable input/output


enhancement components designed for use with Nortel products to allow Gigabit
Ethernet ports to link with other Gigabit Ethernet ports over various media types.

The Ethernet Switch 425 supports the following SFPs:

1000Base-SX SFP GBIC (mini-GBIC, connector type: LC)


1000Base-SX SFP GBIC (mini-GBIC, connector type: MT-RJ)
1000Base-LX SFP GBIC (mini-GBIC, connector type: LC)
CWDM SFPs

For more information about the SFP GBICs see Appendix A, Installing an SFP
Transceiver, on page 409.

System Configuration Guide


54 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

Flash memory storage

Switch software image storage

The Ethernet Switch 325/425 uses flash memory to store the switch software
image. The flash memory allows you to update the software image with a newer
version without changing the switch hardware (see Software Download screen
on page 237). An in-band connection between the switch and the TFTP load host
is required to download the software image.

Autosensing, and autonegotiation

The Ethernet Switch 325/425 is an autosensing and autonegotiating device:

The term autosense refers to the ability of a port to sense the speed of an
attached device.
The term autonegotiation refers to a standardized protocol (IEEE 802.3u) that
exists between two IEEE 802.3u-capable devices. Autonegotiation allows the
switch to select the best of speed and duplex modes.

Autosensing is used when the attached device is not capable of autonegotiation or


is using a form of autonegotiation that is not compatible with the IEEE 802.3u
standard. In this case, since it is not possible to sense the duplex mode of the
attached device, the Ethernet Switch 325/425 reverts to half-duplex mode.

When autonegotiation-capable devices are attached to the Ethernet Switch 325/


425, the ports negotiate down from 100 Mb/s speed and full-duplex mode until the
attached device acknowledges a supported speed and duplex mode.

For more information about autosensing and autonegotiation modes, see


Chapter 13, Troubleshooting, on page 405.

RFCs

For more information about networking concepts, protocols, and topologies,


consult the following RFCs:

RFC 1213 (MIB-II)


RFC 1493 (Bridge MIB)

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 55

RFC 1573 (Interface MIB)


RFC 1643 (Ethernet MIB)
RFC 1757 (RMON)
RFC 1271 (RMON)
RFC 1157 (SNMP)

Standards

The following IEEE Standards also contain information germane to the Ethernet
Switch 325/425:

IEEE 802.1D (Standard for Spanning Tree Protocol)


IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet)
IEEE 802.1Q (VLAN Tagging)

BootP automatic IP configuration/MAC address

The Ethernet Switch 325/425 has a unique 48-bit hardware address, or MAC
address, that is printed on a label on the back panel. You use this MAC address
when you configure the network BootP server to recognize the Ethernet Switch
425-24T BootP requests. A properly configured BootP server enables the switch
to automatically learn its assigned IP address, subnet mask, IP address of the
default router (default gateway), and software image file name.

For information about a stack MAC address, see Stack MAC address on
page 89.

For more information and an example of a BootP configuration file, see


Appendix D, Sample BootP configuration file, on page 443.

Configuration and switch management

The Ethernet Switch 325/425 that is shipped directly from the factory is ready to
operate in any 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX standard network.

You must assign an IP address to the switch or stack, depending on the mode of
operation. You can set both addresses by using the console port or BootP, which
resides on the switch. You can manage the switch using:

System Configuration Guide


56 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

Console interface
The console interface allows you to configure and manage the switch locally
or remotely. Access the CI menus and screens locally through a console
terminal attached to the Ethernet Switch 325/425, remotely through a dial-up
modem connection, or in-band through a Telnet session.
For information about the console interface, see Chapter 2, Using the
console interface, on page 93.
Command Line Interface (CLI)
The CLI is used to automate general management and configuration of the
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425. Use the CLI through a Telnet connection or
through the serial port on the console. See Chapter 3, CLI Basics, on page
119 for more information.
Java-based Device Manager
Device Manager is a Java-based set of graphical network management
applications used to configure and manage an Ethernet Switch 325/425. See
Chapter 4, Getting Started with Device Manager, on page 171 for more
information.
Web-based management
You can manage the network from the World Wide Web. Access the
Web-based Graphical User Interface (GUI) through the Embedded Web
Server (EWS), the HTML-based browser located on your network. The GUI
allows you to configure, monitor, and maintain your network through Web
browsers. You can also download software using the Web.
For information about Web-based management, refer to Chapter 5, Using the
Web-based management interface, on page 199.
Any generic SNMP-based network management software.
You can use any generic SNMP-based network management software to
configure and manage an Ethernet Switch 325/425.
Nortel Enterprise Policy Manager
The Nortel Enterprise Policy Manager (formerly Optivity Policy Services)
allows you to configure the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 with a single
system.

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 57

Hardware components of the Ethernet Switch 325

Front panel

Figure 2 shows the front and side views of the Ethernet Switch 325.

Figure 2 Ethernet Switch 325-24G

Figure 3 shows the configuration of the front panel on the Ethernet Switch 325.
Table 2 describes the components on the front panel.

Figure 3 Ethernet Switch 325-24G front panel

1 2 3 4

LED Status - Amber:10Mps Green:100 Mps Blink:Activity LED Status - Off:Half Duplex Green:Full Duplex Ethernet Switch 325-24G
26 25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Console

UI

UI Cmd Spd Act Spd Act

Pwr Spd: 10/100/1000T Act: Activity

UI Set

Ethernet Switch 325-24G


11108ER

System Configuration Guide


58 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

Table 2 Components on the Ethernet Switch 325 switch front panel

Item Description

1 UI button
2 1000T Connectors (not available with Ethernet Switch
325-24T)
3 Port connectors
4 Console port

Note: 1000T connectors are not available for the Ethernet Switch
325-24T.

Console port

The Console port allows you to access the Console Interface (CI) screens and
customize your network using the console menu and screens. For more
information on using the Console Interface see Chapter 2, Using the console
interface, on page 93.

The Console port is a DB-9, RS-232-D male serial port connector. You can use
this connector to connect a management station, console, or terminal to the
Ethernet Switch 325 by using a straight-through DB-9 to DB-9 standard serial
port cable. You must use a VT100/ANSI-compatible terminal (for cursor control
and to enable cursor and functions keys) to use the console port.

Note: The console port is configured as a Data Communications Equip-


ment (DCE) connector. Ensure that your RS-232 cable pinouts are con-
figured for DCE connections. For more information see Appendix B,
Connectors and pin assignments, on page 425.

The default settings of the Console port are:

9600 baud with eight data bits


One stop bit
No parity as the communications format
Flow control set to disabled

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 59

Port connectors

The Ethernet Switch 325 uses 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX RJ-45 (8-pin modular)


port connectors.

The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port connectors are configured as MDI-X (Media


Dependent Interface-crossover). These ports are connected by straight cables
to the Network Interface Card (NIC) in a node or a server, similar to a
conventional Ethernet repeater hub. If you are connecting to an Ethernet hub or
Ethernet switch, use a crossover cable unless an MDI connection exists on the
associated port of the attached device (For more information see Appendix B,
Connectors and pin assignments, on page 425).

The Ethernet Switch 325 uses autosensing ports designed to operate at 10 Mb/s
(megabits per second) or at 100 Mb/s, depending on the connecting device. These
ports support the IEEE 802.3u autonegotiation standard, which means that when a
port is connected to another device which also supports the IEEE 802.3u standard,
the two devices negotiate the best speed and duplex mode.

The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX switch ports also support half- and full-duplex


mode operation.

The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX RJ-45 switch ports can connect to 10 Mb/s or 100


Mb/s Ethernet segments or nodes.

Note: Use only Category 5 copper Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP)


cable connections when connecting 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports.

For more information on RJ-45 port connectors see Appendix B, Connectors and
pin assignments, on page 425 for more information.

LED display panel

Figure 4 shows the LED display panel of the Ethernet Switch 325-24G. See
Table 3 for a description of the LEDs.

System Configuration Guide


60 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

Figure 4 Ethernet Switch 325-24G LED display panel

LED Status
-Amber:10MpsGreen:100Mps Blink:Activity
LED Status
-Off:Hal
D
26 25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

UI

UICmd T A T A

Pwr T: 1000T A: Activity

UISet

Table 3 Ethernet Switch 325-24G LED descriptions

Label Color/Status Meaning

Link/Activity Green Station connected at 100 Mbps.


Amber Station connected at 10 Mbps.
Green/Flashing Traffic activity at 100 Mbps.
Amber/Flashing Traffic activity at 10 Mbps.
Off No link/No traffic.
Half/Full Green Full duplex
Duplex
Off Half duplex connection.
UI Set Button The UI Set button is used to reset the switch
without a console connection.
UI Green/Flashing Indicates the switch is in cmd mode.
Green ON for about 3 seconds when executing a cmd,
then goes OFF.
Off The UI LED should be off, unless active.
UI Cmd Off Normally off.
Green/blinking The UI Cmd LED blinks once each time the UI
Set button is pressed, and while the UI LED is
blinking.
Pwr Green Power on.
Off Unit not connected to a power source.

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 61

Table 3 Ethernet Switch 325-24G LED descriptions (continued)

Label Color/Status Meaning

T Green/steady This port is set to operate at 1000 Mb/s, and


the link is good.
Amber/steady Station connected at 10/100 Mb/s.
Off No link on Copper uplink port.
A Green/blinking Indicates activity on link.
Off No activity on the link.

Back panel

The back panel of the Ethernet Switch 325-24T is shown in Figure 5. Table 4
describes the components on the back panel.

Figure 5 Ethernet Switch 325-24T back panel


1

100-240 V-
50-60Hz 2A

11110EA

Table 4 Components on the Ethernet Switch 325 back panel

Item Description

1 AC power receptacle

Cooling fans

Two cooling fans are located on one side of the Ethernet Switch 325 to provide
cooling for the internal components. (See Figure 2 on page 57). When you install
the switch, be sure to allow enough space on both sides of the switch for adequate
ventilation. For more information on installing the Ethernet Switch 325, see
Installing the Nortel Ethernet Switch 325 (217149-B).

System Configuration Guide


62 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

AC power receptacle

The AC power receptacle accepts the AC power cord which is supplied with the
switch. For installation outside North America, make sure that you have the
proper power cord for your region. Any cord used must have a CEE-22 standard
V female connector on one end and must meet the IEC 320-030 specifications.
Table 5 lists specifications for international power cords.

Table 5 International power cord specifications

Country/Plug description Specifications Typical plug

Continental Europe: 220 or 230 VAC 50 Hz


CEE7 standard VII male Single phase
plug
Harmonized cord (HAR
marking on the outside
228FA
of the cord jacket
to comply with the
CENELEC Harmonized
Document HD-21)
U.S./Canada/Japan: 100 or 120 VAC 5060 Hz
NEMA5-15P male plug Single phase
UL recognized (UL
stamped on cord jacket)
CSA certified (CSA label
227FA
secured to the cord)

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 63

Table 5 International power cord specifications (continued)

Country/Plug description Specifications Typical plug

United Kingdom: 240 VAC


BS1363 male plug with 50 Hz
fuse Single phase
Harmonized cord

229FA

Australia: 240 VAC


AS3112-1981 Male plug 50 Hz
Single phase

230FA

Caution: Please read immediately.


Inspect the power cord and determine if it provides the proper plug and is
appropriately certified for use with your electrical system. Immediately
discard this power cord if it is inappropriate for your country's electrical
system and obtain the proper cord as required by your national electrical
codes or ordinances.
Refer to this product's technical documentation for detailed installation
procedures to be followed by qualified service personnel.

System Configuration Guide


64 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

Vorsicht: Bitte sofort lesen.


Sehen Sie nach, ob dieses Netzkabel ber den richtigen Stecker verfgt und fr
die Verwendung in Ihrem Stromversogungsnetz zertifiziert ist. Falls dieses Kabel
nicht fr das Stromversorgungsnetz in Ihrem Land geeignet ist, darf es nicht
verwendet werden. Besorgen Sie sich ein Kabel, das die Vorschriften der
Zulassungsbehrden in Ihrem Land erfllt.
Die technische Dokumentation dieses Produkts enthlt ausfhrliche
Installationsanweisungen, die nur von qualifiziertem Kundendienstpersonal
ausgefhrt werden drfen.

Attention: Lisez ceci immdiatement.


Examinez ce cordon d'alimentation pour dterminer s'il dispose de la fiche
approprie et s'il est bien agr pour utilisation sur votre installation
lectrique. Dbarrassez-vous en immdiatement s'il ne convient pas
l'utilisation sur le secteur lectrique en usage dans votre pays et
procurez-vous un cordon conforme la rglementation nationale en vigueur.
Reportez-vous la documentation technique de ce produit pour obtenir des
instructions dtailles d'installation, destines un technicien qualifi.

Attenzione: Leggere attentamente.


Controllare questo cavo di alimentazione, verificarne il collegamento con la
presa appropriata nonch la certificazione per l'uso nell'impianto elettrico
posseduto. Non utilizzare assolutamente in caso tale cavo non sia adatto al
sistema elettrico del paese in cui viene utilizzato e richiederne un altro
certificato dall'ente nazionale di fornitura elettrica.
Per le procedure di installazione che devono essere seguite dal personale di
servizio, consultare questa documentazione tecnica del prodotto.

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 65

Advertencia: Srvase leer inmediatamente.


Inspeccione este cable de alimentacin elctrica y determine si viene con el
enchufe apropiado y est debidamente certificado para el uso con su sistema
elctrico. Si no cumple con los reglamentos del sistema elctrico de su pas,
despjese de este cable de alimentacin inmediatamente y obtenga el cable
requerido, segn las ordenanzas y cdigos elctricos nacionales.
Refirase a la documentacin tcnica de este producto para recibir informacin
detallada sobre los procedimientos que el personal calificado de reparaciones
deber seguir.

Caution:

Warning: Removal of the power cord is the only way to turn off power to this
device. The power cord must always be connected in a location that can be
accessed quickly and safely in case of an emergency.
Vorsicht: Die Stromzufuhr zu diesem Gert kann nur durch Ziehen des
Netzstromkabels unterbrochen werden. Die Netzsteckdose, an die das
Netzstromkabel angeschlossen ist, mu sich stets an einem Ort befinden, der bei
einem Notfall schnell und einfach zugnglich ist.

System Configuration Guide


66 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

Avertissement: Le dbranchement du cordon d'alimentation constitue le seul


moyen de mettre cet appareil hors tension. Le cordon d'alimentation doit donc
toujours tre branch dans une prise accessible pour faciliter la mise hors tension
en cas d'urgence.
Advertencia: La nica forma de desconectar la alimentacin de este dispositivo
es desenchufar el cable de alimentacin. El cable de alimentacin siempre debe
estar conectado en una ubicacin que permita acceder al cable de forma rpida y
segura en caso de emergencia.
Avvertenza: Estrarre il cavo di alimentazione l'unico sistema per spegnere il
dispositivo. Il cavo di alimentazione deve essere sempre collegato in una posiz-
ione che permetta l'accesso facile e sicuro in caso di emergenza.

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 67

Hardware components of the Ethernet Switch 425


Figure 6 shows the front and side views of the Ethernet Switch 425.

Figure 6 Ethernet Switch 425

TM

11107FA

Front panel
Figure 7 shows the configuration of the front panel on the Ethernet Switch
425-24T.

Figure 7 Ethernet Switch 425-24T front panel

1 2 4 5

LED Status - Amber:10Mps Green:100 Mps Blink:Activity LED Status - Off:Half Duplex Green:Full Duplex
26 25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Console

TM
UI Base

GBK/Stack Up M T A M T A

Pwr Down

UI Set
M:MGBIC T:1000T A:Activity

3 11108EA

Table 6 describes the components on the front panel.

System Configuration Guide


68 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

Table 6 Components of the Ethernet Switch 425-24T front panel

Item Description

1 UI button
2 10/100/1000BaseT (copper) port 25 and 26
3 Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) ports 25 and 26
4 10/100BaseT ports 1 to 24
5 Console port

Note: With Release 3.6 software, the Ethernet Switches 425-24T and
425-48T have stacking enabled by default, which means that ports 26
and 50, respectively, are disabled by default. This is because the cascade
port shares resources with port 26 on the Ethernet Switch 425-24T and
port 50 on the Ethernet Switch 425-48T. Either the cascade port can be
active, or port 26 or 50 can be active.
If you want to use port 26 or port 50 in standalone mode, disable
stacking and reboot the switch.

User Interface button

The User Interface (UI) button on the Ethernet Switch 425 provides easy-to-use
features for stacking configuration.

You can perform the following tasks using the User Interface button on the
Ethernet Switch 425-24T:

Setting the unit as the Base Unit on page 69


Setting the unit as the non-base unit on page 69
Setting the unit as a standalone unit on page 70
Resetting the stack on page 70
Resetting the unit on page 70
Setting the default IP address on page 72

Note: On the Ethernet Switch 425-24T and 425-48T, the User Interface
button allows you to reset the unit.

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 69

Setting the unit as the Base Unit

To set the unit as the Base Unit with the UI button:

1 Press the UI button and hold in for three seconds.


The unit is now in the Configuration mode, and the color and status of the UI
LED turns green blinking.

2 Press the UI button once.


The Base LED turns on, and the Up and Down LEDs are steady green to
indicate that the button press was recognized.

3 Press the UI button and hold it for three seconds to confirm the command.
The color and status of the UI LED returns to green once the command has
been accepted.

If the command is rejected, the UI LED turns amber blinking.

Note: Changing the Base Unit does not take effect until you restart the
system.

Setting the unit as the non-base unit

To set the unit as a non-base unit using the UI button:

1 Press the UI button and hold it for three seconds.


The unit will now be in the Configuration mode, and the color and status of
the UI LED turns green blinking.

2 Press the UI button twice.


The Base LED will be off, and the Up and Down LEDs are steady green.

3 Press the UI button and hold it for three seconds to confirm the command.

System Configuration Guide


70 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

The color and status of the UI LED returns to steady green once the command
has been accepted. If the command is rejected, the UI LED turns amber
blinking.

Note: Changing the Base Unit does not take effect until you restart the
system.

Setting the unit as a standalone unit

To set the unit as a standalone unit using the UI button:

1 Press and hold the UI button until the UI LED displays the Green/blinking
status.
2 Press the UI button 6 times.
3 Press the UI button and hold it for 3 seconds to confirm the command.

Resetting the stack

To reset the stack using the UI button:

1 Press the UI button and hold in for three seconds.


The unit is now in configuration mode, and the color and status of the UI LED
turns green blinking.

2 Press the UI button three times.


The color and status of the Base, Down, and Up LEDs turn amber blinking.

3 Press the UI button and hold it for three seconds to confirm the command.

Resetting the unit

To reset the unit at any time, with the UI button, do the following:

1 Press the UI button for 3 seconds. The switch operates in the Configuration
mode. The UI LED turns green and will blink.
2 Press UI button 3 times.

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 71

3 To confirm, keep the UI button pressed for 3 seconds more. The UI LED turns
either to solid-green (command accepted) or to solid-amber (error). After
another period (5 seconds) the UI LED turns Off.
Once the command is accepted, the new configuration is stored in NVRAM.

Note: When resetting the unit using the UI button, wait 60 seconds after
your last configuration change. The system takes up to 60 seconds to
save configuration changes to NVRAM. You can reset the stack
immediately after changing the configuration using the UI button
without losing any of the changed configuration.

Table 7 describes the LED indications associated with the UI button.

Table 7 UI button LEDs on the Ethernet Switch 425-24T

Label Color/Status Description

UI Green/blinking The user pushed the UI button and activated


the front-panel configuration mode; the
system is awaiting input.
Green/steady The system accepts the UI button input.
Amber/blinking The system rejected the UI button input.
Pwr Green Power on.
Amber/slow blinking The system will reset in < 3 seconds. To stop
reset, release UI button.
Amber/fast blinking The system will reset in < 1 second. To stop
reset, release UI button.
Base Green/steady The unit is the base unit for the stack.
Green/blinking The unit is in configuration mode using the UI
button. The UI LED is also blinking green.
Amber The stack is reset using the UI button.
Off The switch is not the stack base unit, or it is
operating in standalone mode.
Up Green/steady The unit is being set as base or non-base unit
using the UI buttonbase unit has Base LED
on as well.
Amber/blinking The stack is reset using the UI button.

System Configuration Guide


72 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

Label Color/Status Description

Down Green/steady The unit is being set as base or non-base unit


using the UI button base unit has Base
LED on as well.
Amber/blinking The stack is reset using the UI button.

Aborting a command

To abort a command entered using the UI button, do one of the following actions:

Wait for about 20 seconds after entering either the one-press (set to base unit)
or the two-press (reset to base) and the input is ignored.
Press the UI button 7 or more times, which exits the Configuration mode and
does not change any settings on the switch.

Setting the default IP address

You can set a default IP address and subnet mask for the switch or stack by using
the UI button on the front panel of the Ethernet Switch 425. You can also manage
the switch or stack remotely by using a Default IP address. The default IP address
is 192.168.192.168.

Depending on the mode of operation of the switch (standalone or stack) the


default IP address is applied to the local unit or to the entire stack. When the
Ethernet Switch 425-24T is operating in the stack mode, the UI button on the front
panel on any unit of the stack can be used to set the default IP address. Ensure that
you do not create duplicate IP addresses on the network.

Note: The UI button may be used at any time to change the In-Use IP
address and subnet mask of the switch. It overrides the current In-use IP
address and subnet mask, if any, regardless of the BootP mode settings
for the switch or stack.

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 73

If the default IP configuration is set, any change to the configured IP address or


subnet mask through the other user interfaces, will cause the In-use IP
configuration of the switch or stack to change. Therefore, the newly configured IP
address must be used to manage the switch or stack.

Note: If there is a change in the switch state, that is, if it joins or exits a
stack after the default IP configuration is set, the In-Use IP configuration
will change, and must be set again using the UI button.

To set the default IP address and subnet mask, do the following:

1 Press the UI button and hold in for 3 seconds.


The unit is now in the Configuration mode. The color and status of the UI
LED will turn green blinking.

2 Press the UI button five times.


The Base LED and the Up and Down LEDs will now be steady amber to
indicate that the button press was recognized.

3 Press the UI button and hold in for 3 seconds to confirm the command.
The In-Use IP address will now be changed to 192.168.192.168. The color
and status of the UI LED will turn to steady green once the command has
been accepted. If the command is rejected, the UI LED turns amber blinking.

LED display during change in IP address and subnet mask

The LEDs on the front panel change color or display blinking signals to indicate
that the In-Use configuration has changed.

If the unit is in a stack, only the LEDs of that unit will change color or blink.
There will be no change in the LEDs of other units in the stack.

System Configuration Guide


74 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

Table 8 describes the LED behavior at the time of setting the default IP address
and subnet mask.

Table 8 UI button LED display during change in IP address and subnet mask

Label Color/Status Status Description

UI Green Blinking The UI button has been pushed. The front panel
configuration mode has been activated. The
system is awaiting input.
Steady The input has been accepted
Amber Blinking The input has been rejected
Base Amber Steady The default IP address and subnet mask for this
unit or stack has been set to 192.168.192.168.

You cannot set the default IP address through the CLI, SNMP, Console, or WEB
interface.

Console port

The Console port allows you to access the Console Interface (CI) screens and
customize your network using the Console menu options and screens (see
Chapter 2, Using the console interface, on page 93).

The Console port is a DB-9, RS-232-D male serial port connector. You can use
this connector to connect a management station or console/terminal to the
Ethernet Switch 425 by using a straight-through DB-9 to DB-9 standard serial
port cable. You must use a VT100/ANSI-compatible terminal (for cursor control
and to enable cursor and functions keys) to use the Console port.

Note: The Console port is configured as a Data Communications


Equipment (DCE) connector. Ensure that your RS-232 cable pinouts are
configured for DCE connections (see Appendix B, Connectors and pin
assignments, on page 425).

The Console port default settings are:


9600 baud with eight data bits
One stop bit
No parity as the communications format

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 75

Flow control set to disabled.

Gigabit Interface Converter

SFP GBICs (Small Form Factor Pluggable Gigabit Interface Converters) are
hot-swappable input/output enhancement components designed for use with
Nortel products to allow Gigabit Ethernet ports to link with fiber optic networks.

Port connectors

The Ethernet Switch 425 uses 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX RJ-45 (8-pin modular)


port connectors.

The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port connectors are configured as MDI-X


(media-dependent interface-crossover). These ports are connected using straight
cables to the NIC in a node or server, similar to a conventional Ethernet repeater
hub. If you are connecting to an Ethernet hub or an Ethernet switch, use a
crossover cable unless an MDI connection exists on the associated port of the
attached device (see Appendix B, Connectors and pin assignments, on page
425).

The Ethernet Switch 425 uses autosensing ports designed to operate at 10 Mb/s
(megabits per second) or at 100 Mb/s, depending on the connecting device. These
ports support the IEEE 802.3u autonegotiation standard, which means that when a
port is connected to another device which also supports the IEEE 802.3u standard,
the two devices negotiate at the best speed and duplex mode.

The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX switch ports also support half- and full-duplex


mode operation.

The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX RJ-45 ports can connect to 10 Mb/s or 100 Mb/s


Ethernet segments or nodes.

Note: Use only Category 5 copper Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP)


cable connections when connecting 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports.

See Appendix B, Connectors and pin assignments, on page 425 for more
information about the RJ-45 port connectors.

System Configuration Guide


76 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

LED display panel

Figure 8 shows the Ethernet Switch 425 LED display panel.

Figure 8 Ethernet Switch 425 LED display panel

LED Status LED Status


-Amber:10MpsGreen:100Mps Blink:Activity -Off:Half
DuplexGreen:Full
Du
26 25
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

UI Base

GBK/Stack Up M T A M T A

Pwr Down

UISet
M:MGBIC T:1000TA:Activity

Table 9 describe the LEDs found in the Ethernet Switch 425.

Table 9 Ethernet Switch 425 LED descriptions

Command
Label Status Color State Meaning

UI Power status Green Blinking Indicates the switch is in cmd mode.


On ON for about 3 seconds when executing a cmd, then
goes OFF.
Off The UI LED should be off, unless active.
GBIC/ Stack Mode Green On The switch is in standalone mode.
Stack
Off The switch is in stack mode.
Pwr Power status Green on DC power is available to the switchs internal circuitry.
Off No AC power to switch or power supply failed.
Base Base mode Green on The switch is configured as the stack base unit.
Off The switch is not configured as the stack base unit (or is
in standalone mode).
Amber Due to a stack error, the unit is unable to maintain the
stack connection.
Up Stack mode Green Off The switch is in standalone mode.
On The switch is connected to the upstream unit.
Down Stack mode Green Off The switch is in standalone mode.
On The switch is connected to the downstream unit.

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 77

Table 9 Ethernet Switch 425 LED descriptions (continued)

Command
Label Status Color State Meaning

M Duplex Mode Green On This port has a good connection (fiber), and is configured
(MGBIC) to full duplex.
Off This port does not have a good connection (fiber), and
port is configured to half duplex.
T 10/100/1000 Green On This port has a good connection (copper - at 1000 Mbps).
(Copper) Mb/s port speed
10/100/ indicator Amber On This port has a good connection (copper - at 100 Mbps).
1000 Link Amber/ On This port has a good connection (copper - at 10 Mbps).
Green
Off Off This port does not have a good connection.
A Port activity Green Blinking Indicates network activity for the corresponding port. A
(Activity) high level of network activity can cause the LEDs to
appear to be on continuously.

System Configuration Guide


78 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

Back panel

Figure 9 shows the back panel of the Ethernet Switch 425.

Figure 9 Ethernet Switch 425 back panel

1 2

Cascade
Down Up
100-240 V-
50-60Hz 2A

11110EA

Table 10 describes the components on the back panel.

Table 10 Components on the Ethernet Switch 425 back panel

Item Description

1 AC power receptacle
2 Cascade Up and Down Connectors

Cascade Up and Down connectors

The Cascade Up and Down connectors allow the Ethernet Switch 425 to be
connected to the upstream units Cascade Up connector, or to the downstream
units Cascade Down connector (see Stack configurations on page 89.)

Cooling fans

Two cooling fans are located on the side of the Ethernet Switch 425 to provide
cooling for internal components. (See Figure 6 on page 67.) When you install the
switch, ensure that there is adequate space on both sides of the switch for
ventilation. For more information on installing the Ethernet Switch 425, see
Installing the Ethernet Switch 425 (217150-B).

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 79

AC power receptacle

The AC power receptacle accepts the AC power cord which is supplied with the
switch. For installation outside North America, make sure that you have the
proper power cord for your region. Any cord used must have a CEE-22 standard
V female connector on one end and must meet the IEC 320-030 specifications.
Table 11 lists specifications for international power cords.

Table 11 International power cord specifications

Country/Plug description Specifications Typical plug

Continental Europe: 220 or 230 VAC


CEE7 standard VII male plug 50 Hz
Single phase
Harmonized cord (HAR marking
on the outside of the cord jacket
to comply with the CENELEC
Harmonized Document HD-21) 228FA

U.S./Canada/Japan: 100 or 120 VAC


NEMA5-15P male plug 5060 Hz
Single phase
UL recognized (UL stamped
on cord jacket)
CSA certified (CSA label
227FA
secured to the cord)

System Configuration Guide


80 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

Table 11 International power cord specifications (continued)

Country/Plug description Specifications Typical plug

United Kingdom: 240 VAC


BS1363 male plug with fuse 50 Hz
Single phase
Harmonized cord

229FA

Australia: 240 VAC


AS3112-1981 Male plug 50 Hz
Single phase

230FA

Caution: Please read immediately.


Inspect this power cord and determine if it provides the proper plug and is
appropriately certified for use with your electrical system. Immediately discard this
cord if it is inappropriate for your country's electrical system and obtain the proper
cord as required by your national electrical codes or ordinances.
Refer to this product's technical documentation for detailed installation procedures to
be followed by qualified service personnel.

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 81

Vorsicht: Bitte sofort lesen.


Sehen Sie nach, ob dieses Netzkabel ber den richtigen Stecker verfgt und fr die
Verwendung in Ihrem Stromversogungsnetz zertifiziert ist. Falls dieses Kabel nicht fr
das Stromversorgungsnetz in Ihrem Land geeignet ist, darf es nicht verwendet werden.
Besorgen Sie sich ein Kabel, das die Vorschriften der Zulassungsbehrden in Ihrem
Land erfllt.
Die technische Dokumentation dieses Produkts enthlt ausfhrliche
Installationsanweisungen, die nur von qualifiziertem Kundendienstpersonal
ausgefhrt werden drfen.

Attention: Lisez ceci immdiatement.


Examinez ce cordon d'alimentation pour dterminer s'il dispose de la fiche approprie
et s'il est bien agr pour utilisation sur votre installation lectrique.
Dbarrassez-vous en immdiatement s'il ne convient pas l'utilisation sur le secteur
lectrique en usage dans votre pays et procurez-vous un cordon conforme la
rglementation nationale en vigueur.
Reportez-vous la documentation technique de ce produit pour obtenir des
instructions dtailles d'installation, destines un technicien qualifi.

Attenzione: Leggere attentamente.


Controllare questo cavo di alimentazione, verificarne il collegamento con la presa
appropriata nonch la certificazione per l'uso nell'impianto elettrico posseduto. Non
utilizzare assolutamente in caso tale cavo non sia adatto al sistema elettrico del paese
in cui viene utilizzato e richiederne un altro certificato dall'ente nazionale di fornitura
elettrica.
Per le procedure di installazione che devono essere seguite dal personale di servizio,
consultare questa documentazione tecnica del prodotto.

Advertencia: Srvase leer inmediatamente.


Inspeccione este cable de alimentacin elctrica y determine si viene con el enchufe
apropiado y est debidamente certificado para el uso con su sistema elctrico. Si no
cumple con los reglamentos del sistema elctrico de su pas, despjese de este cable de
alimentacin inmediatamente y obtenga el cable requerido, segn las ordenanzas y
cdigos elctricos nacionales.
Refirase a la documentacin tcnica de este producto para recibir informacin
detallada sobre los procedimientos que el personal calificado de reparaciones deber
seguir.

System Configuration Guide


82 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

Caution:

Warning: Removal of the power cord is the only way to turn off power to this
device. The power cord must always be connected in a location that can be
accessed quickly and safely in case of an emergency.
Vorsicht: Die Stromzufuhr zu diesem Gert kann nur durch Ziehen des
Netzstromkabels unterbrochen werden. Die Netzsteckdose, an die das
Netzstromkabel angeschlossen ist, mu sich stets an einem Ort befinden, der
bei einem Notfall schnell und einfach zugnglich ist.
Avertissement: Le dbranchement du cordon d'alimentation constitue le
seul moyen de mettre cet appareil hors tension. Le cordon d'alimentation doit
donc toujours tre branch dans une prise accessible pour faciliter la mise hors
tension en cas d'urgence.
Advertencia: La nica forma de desconectar la alimentacin de este
dispositivo es desenchufar el cable de alimentacin. El cable de alimentacin
siempre debe estar conectado en una ubicacin que permita acceder al cable de
forma rpida y segura en caso de emergencia.
Avvertenza: Estrarre il cavo di alimentazione l'unico sistema per spegnere
il dispositivo. Il cavo di alimentazione deve essere sempre collegato in una
posizione che permetta l'accesso facile e sicuro in caso di emergenza.

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 83

Network configuration examples


This section provides network configuration examples using the Ethernet Switch
325/425. In these examples, the packet classification feature can be used to
prioritize the traffic of the network to ensure uninterrupted traffic of critical
applications. The examples are:

Desktop switch application


Segment switch application on page 85
High-density switched workgroup application on page 86

Desktop switch application

Figure 10 and Figure 11 show the Ethernet Switch 325/425 used as a desktop
switch. The desktop workstations are connected directly to switch ports.

Figure 10 Ethernet Switch 325 used as a desktop switch


After
Before
Ethernet 325-24G
26 25
LED Status - Amber:10Mps Green:100 Mps Blink:Activity LED Status - Off:Half Duplex Green:Full Duplex Ethernet Switch 325-24G
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Console

UI
Spd Act Spd Act

10BASE-T hub
UI Cmd

Pwr Spd: 10/100/1000T Act: Activity

UI Set

To Up to 24 users To Up to 24 users
Network Network
Center Center
Key

10 Mb/s
100 Mb/s
1000 Mb/s

- 23 users share 10 Mb/s (10/24 Mb/s per user) - 24 users; each with dedicated 100 Mb/s bandwidth
- Network center bottleneck (10 Mb/s bandwidth) - Network center with dedicated 1 Gb/s full-duplex
bandwith
11112EA

System Configuration Guide


84 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

Figure 11 Ethernet Switch 425 used as a desktop switch

Before After

10BASE-T hub Ethernet Switch 425-24T

To Up to 24 users To Up to 24 users
Network Network
Center Center
Key

10 Mb/s
100 Mb/s
1000 Mb/s

- 23 users share 10 Mb/s (10/24 Mb/s per user) - 24 users; each with dedicated 100 Mb/s bandwidth
- Network center bottleneck (10 Mb/s bandwidth) - Network center with dedicated 1 Gb/s full-duplex
bandwith
11112EA

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 85

Segment switch application

Figure 12 and Figure 13 show the Ethernet Switch 325/425 used as a segment
switch to alleviate user contention for bandwidth and eliminate server and
network bottlenecks. Before segmentation, 88 users had a total bandwidth of only
10 Mb/s available. After segmentation, 92 users have 40 Mb/s, four times the
previous bandwidth, while adding 22 dedicated 100 Mb/s connections. This
configuration can be extended to add more segments without degrading
performance.

Figure 12 Ethernet Switch 325 used as a segment switch


Before After Server

Ethernet Switch
325-24G
26 25
LED Status - Amber:10Mps Green:100 Mps Blink:Activity LED Status - Off:Half Duplex Green:Full Duplex Ethernet Switch 325-24G
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Console

10BASE-T hubs UI Set


UI

UI Cmd

Pwr
Spd Act

Spd: 10/100/1000T
Spd Act

Act: Activity Up to 20
users
Server

Up to 23
users

Up to 23
users

Up to 23
To users
Network To
Center Up to Network
88 users Center
Key

10 Mb/s
100 Mb/s
1000 Mb/s

- 88 users share 10 Mb/s (10/88 Mb/s per user) - Three sets of 23 users; each set shares 10 Mb/s
- Server bottleneck (10 Mb/s bandwidth) (10/23 Mb/s per user)
- Network center bottleneck (10 Mb/s bandwidth) - Addition of 21 users; each with dedicated
-Total of 88 users 100 Mb/s bandwidth
- Server with dedicated 100 Mb/s bandwidth
- Network center with dedicated 1 Gb/s full-duplex bandwidth
- Total of 89 users
11113EA

System Configuration Guide


86 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

Figure 13 Ethernet Switch 425 used as a segment switch


Before After Server

Ethernet Switch
10BASE-T hubs 425-24T Up to 20
users
Server

Up to 23
users

Up to 23
users

Up to 23
To users
Network To
Center Up to Network
88 users Center
Key

10 Mb/s
100 Mb/s
1000 Mb/s

- 88 users share 10 Mb/s (10/88 Mb/s per user) - Three sets of 23 users; each set shares 10 Mb/s
- Server bottleneck (10 Mb/s bandwidth) (10/23 Mb/s per user)
- Network center bottleneck (10 Mb/s bandwidth) - Addition of 21 users; each with dedicated
-Total of 88 users 100 Mb/s bandwidth
- Server with dedicated 100 Mb/s bandwidth
- Network center with dedicated 1 Gb/s full-duplex bandwidth
- Total of 89 users
11113EA

High-density switched workgroup application

Figure 14 shows an example of using an Ethernet Switch 425 with a high-speed


(gigabit) connection to a Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600. Ethernet Switch
425 and Ethernet Switch 325 are also shown in this example of a high-density
switched workgroup.

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 87

As shown in Figure 14, the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 switch is used as a
backbone switch, connecting to the Ethernet Switch 425 with an optional
(1000BASE-SX) GBIC for maximum bandwidth. The Ethernet Switch 425-24T
and the Ethernet Switch 325-24T have 100 Mb/s connections to the Ethernet
Switch 425-24T, a 100BASE-TX hub, and a 100 Mb/s server as well as 10 Mb/s
connections to DTE (data terminal equipment).

Figure 14 Configuring power workgroups and a shared media hub

Ethernet
Switch
425-24T

F Ethernt Switch 325-24G 26 25


LED Status-Amber:10MpsGreen:100Mps Blink:ActivityLED Status-Off:Half

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
DuplexGreen:Full

10 11
Duplex

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
EthernetSwitch325-24G
Console

UI

UICmd Spd Act Spd Act

Pwr Spd:10/100/1000T Act:Activity

UISet

CPU PS1 PS2 FAN

Ethernet Routing SwitchServer


8600
26 25
LED Status-Amber:10MpsGreen:100Mps Blink:ActivityLED Status-Off:Half
DuplexGreen:Full
Duplex EthernetSwitch325-24G
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Console

Key UI

UICmd

Pwr
Spd Act Spd Act

Spd:10/100/1000T Act:Activity

UISet

10 Mb/s
100 Mb/s
1000 Mb/s
(Gigabit)

Stack operation
You can connect up to eight units of the Ethernet Switch 425-24T and Ethernet
Switch 425-48T to provide uninterrupted connectivity for up to 392 ports. The
entire stack can be managed as a single unit with a single IP and MAC address

You can select the base unit of the stack by using the momentary switch
mechanism. It is recommended that you use only one base unit in the stack and the
selection of the same should be done before powering the stack.

System Configuration Guide


88 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

The Ethernet Switch 425 does not support stack redundancy. In case of cable or
unit failure, all units of the stack begin to work as standalone switches. However,
the stack is automatically formed again once the missing cable is re-inserted or the
faulty unit is replaced.

Ethernet units in a stack are interconnected through FireWire cables. Ensure that
the downlink connection on a unit is always connected to the Up link of the next
unit in the ring.

Base unit

The base unit is the unique unit in the stack that you can configure with the User
Interface button on the front panel. A single Ethernet Switch 425-24T or Ethernet
Switch 425-48T in the stack must be configured as the base unit. You can assign
any unit in the stack as the base unit.

The physical order of all other units in the stack is determined by the position of
the base unit within the stack. This is important for network management
applications that view the physical ordering of the units within the stack.

Some characteristics of the base unit are described in the following sections.

Note: Only Ethernet Switch 425-24T and Ethernet Switch 425-48T can
operate together in the stack mode in release 3.6 software.

Initial installation

During the initial installation of the stack, the software automatically determines
the physical order of all units in the stack according to the position of the base unit
within the stack. Thereafter, the individual units maintain their original unit
numbering, even if you change the position of one or more units in the stack.

For example, when you initially power up the stack, the base unit becomes unit 1
and the unit that the base unit connects to becomes unit 2 (and the next unit is unit
3 and so on), until the maximum stack configuration (up to 8 units) is reached. If
you change the base unit to another unit in the stack, the new base unit keeps its
original unit number in the stack.

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 89

Stack MAC address

When the switch is participating in a stack configuration, a stack MAC address is


automatically assigned during the stack initialization. The base units MAC
address, with a software offset, is used for the stack MAC address.

For example, if the base units MAC address is 00-00-82-99-44-00, and the stack
software offset is 1F, then the stack MAC address becomes:

00-00-82-99-44-1F

If another unit in the stack is assigned as the base unit, the MAC address of the
new base unit (with offset) now applies to the stack configuration. The original
stack IP address still applies to the new base unit.

Removing a unit from the stack

If a unit is removed from the stack (therefore operating in standalone mode), the
following switch configuration settings revert back to the settings configured
before the unit became a member of the stack:

IP address
Console password
Telnet password
SNMP community strings

Stack configurations

As shown in Figure 16, the cable connectors provide the ability to stack up to
eight switches. Because stack parameters are associated with the base unit (see
Base unit on page 88), the physical stack order depends on the base units
position and whether the stack is configured stack up or stack down.

Stack up configurations

In Figure 15, data flows from the base unit (unit 1) to the next switch, which is
assigned as unit 2, and continues until the last switch in the stack is assigned as
unit 8. The physical order of the switches is from top to bottom (unit 1 to unit 8).

System Configuration Guide


90 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

Figure 15 Stack up configuration example

Down Cascade
Down Up

1 Unit 1

Cascade
Down Up

Unit 2

Cascade
Down Up

Unit 3

Cascade
Down Up

Unit 4

Cascade
Down Up

Unit 5

Cascade
Down Up

Unit 6

Cascade
Down Up

Unit 7

Cascade
Down Up

2 Unit 8

3 4
Up

Table 12 describes the stack up configuration illustration references.

Table 12 Stack up configuration description

Item Description

1 Base unit
2 Last unit
3 Stacking cable 30 cm (order number AL 2018005)
4 Stacking cable 1 m (order number AL 2018006)

320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 91

Stack down configurations

In Figure 16, data flows from the base unit (unit 1) to the next switch, which is
assigned as unit 2, and continues until the last switch in the stack is assigned as
unit 8. The physical order of the switches is from bottom to top (unit 1 to unit 8).

Figure 16 Stack down configuration example

Up

1 100-240V-
50-60Hz2A Cascade
Down Up
Unit 8

100-240V-
50-60Hz2A Cascade
Down Up
Unit 7

100-240V-
50-60Hz2A Cascade
Down Up
Unit 6

100-240V-
50-60Hz2A Cascade
Down Up
Unit 5

100-240V-
50-60Hz2A Cascade
Down Up
Unit 4

100-240V-
50-60Hz2A Cascade
Down Up
Unit 3

100-240V-
50-60Hz2A Cascade
Down Up
Unit 2

2 100-240V-
50-60Hz2A Cascade
Down Up
Unit 1

3 Down

Table 13 describes the stack down configuration illustration references.

Table 13 Stack down configuration description

Item Description

1 Last unit
2 Base unit

System Configuration Guide


92 Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425

Table 13 Stack down configuration description (continued)

3 Stacking cable 30 cm (order number AL 2018005)


4 Stacking max-return cable 1 m (part number AL 2018006)

Certain Network Management Station (NMS) applications assume a stack up


configuration for the GUI which represents the stack (see Figure 15). For this
reason, Nortel recommends that you always configure the top unit in the stack as
the base unit.

In any stack configuration, the following applies:

When you apply power to the stack, the base unit initializes and the entire
stack powers up as a single logical unit.
You can attach an RS-232 communications cable to the console port of any
switch in the stack.
You can downline upgrade the entire stack from any switch in the stack from
the console interface, a Telnet session, the Web-based management interface,
or any generic SNMP-based network management software.
You can access and manage the stack using a Telnet connection, the
Web-based management interface, or any generic SNMP management tool
through any switch port that is part of the stack configuration.
When you stack three or more switches, use the longer (1-meter) stacking
max-return cable to complete the link from the last unit in the stack to the base
unit.

320985-A
93

Chapter 2
Using the console interface

This chapter describes how to configure and manage the Ethernet Switch 325/425
using the menu-driven Console Interface (CI).

This chapter covers the following topics:

Accessing the CI menus and screens


Using the CI menus and screens on page 94
Main menu on page 96

Accessing the CI menus and screens


You can access the CI menus and screens locally through a console terminal
attached to your Ethernet Switch 325/425, remotely through a dial-up modem
connection, or in-band through a Telnet session. You can connect your console
cable into any unit in the Ethernet Switch 325/425-only stack for a unified stack
interface.

Note: If you have a properly configured BootP server in your network,


it detects the IP address; you will not need to configure the IP address.

For information about SNMP, see your network management documentation.

System Configuration Guide


94 Chapter 2 Using the console interface

Using the CI menus and screens


The CI menus and screens provide options that allow you to configure and
manage the Ethernet Switch 325/425. Help prompts at the bottom of each menu
and screen explain how to enter data in the highlighted field and how to navigate
the menus and screens.

The default settings for the Console port are:


9600 baud with eight data bits
One stop bit
No parity as the communications format
Flow control set to disabled

Some options allow you to toggle among several possible values; other options
allow you to set or modify a parameter.

Navigating the CI menus and screens

Use the following methods to navigate the CI menus and screens.

To select a menu option:

1 Use the arrow keys to highlight the option name.


2 Press Enter.
Alternatively, you can press the key corresponding to the letter that is
underlined in the menu option. For example, to select the Switch
Configuration option in the main menu, press the w key. The text characters
are not case-sensitive.

3 To toggle between values in a form:


a Use the spacebar to highlight the value.
b Press Enter.
4 To clear a string field:
a Position the cursor in the string field.
b Press Ctrl+K.

320985-A
Chapter 2 Using the console interface 95

5 To return to the previous menu, press Ctrl+R.


6 To go to the next screen in a series, press Ctrl+N.
7 To return to the main menu at any time, press Ctrl+C.
8 Press Backspace to delete entered text.

You can set the options that appear in brackets. For example [Enabled].

Screen fields and descriptions

This section describes the CI screens and their fields, beginning with the main
menu. Figure 17 shows a map of the CI screens.

Figure 17 Map of console interface screens


MAC Address Security Configuration
Main Menu MAC Address Table
MAC Address Security Port Configuration
IP Configuration/Setup MAC Address Security Configuration
MAC Address Security Port Lists
SNMP Configuration EAPoL Security Configuration
MAC Address Security Table
System Characteristics VLAN Configuration
Switch Configuration Port Configuration VLAN Configuration
Console/Comm Port Configuration High Speed Flow Control Configuration2 VLAN Port Configuration
MultiLink Trunk Configuration VLAN Display by Port
Identify Unit Numbers1
Port Mirroring Configuration Traffic Class Configuration
Renumber Units1
Rate Limiting Configuration MultiLink Trunk Configuration
Display Hardware Units
IGMP Configuration MultiLink Trunk Utilization
Spanning Tree Configuration
Display Port Statistics
TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration Clear All Port Statistics IGMP Configuration
Software Download Display Multicast Group Membership
Spanning Tree
Configuration File
Spanning Tree Port Configuration
Display System Log Display Spanning Tree Switch Settings
Reset Display Spanning Tree VLAN Membership
Reset to Default Settings
Shutdown Command
Configuration File Download/Upload
Logout
Ascii Configuration File Download

1 Only appears when the switch is participating in a stack configuration.


2 Only appears when a gigabit is installed in one or more units in a stack configuration. BS45041F

System Configuration Guide


96 Chapter 2 Using the console interface

The CI screens for your specific switch model display the model name in the main
menu screen title and the correct number of ports and port types in the Port
Configuration screen.

Note: The field values shown in the CI screens in this section are
provided as examples only.

Main menu
This section describes the options available from the CI main menu (Figure 18).
The CI screens and submenus for these options are described in the following
sections.

Note: Some menu options shown in this main menu example and in
other screen examples in this chapter may not appear on your screen,
depending on the switch options installed. However, the full menu
options are shown in the screen examples and described in the following
sections.

320985-A
Chapter 2 Using the console interface 97

Figure 18 Console interface main menu

Ethernet Switch 425-48T Main Menu

IP Configuration/Setup...
SNMP Configuration...
System Characteristics...
Switch Configuration...
Console/Comm Port Configuration...
Display Hardware Units...
Spanning Tree Configuration...
TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration...
Software Download...
Configuration File...
Display System Log...
Reset...
Reset to Default Settings...
Shutdown Command...
Command Line Interface...
Logout...

Use arrow keys to highlight option, press <Return> or <Enter> to select

Table 14 describes the CI main menu options.

Table 14 Console interface main menu options

Option Description

IP Configuration/ Displays the IP Configuration/Setup screen (see IP Configuration/Setup


Setup... screen on page 214). This screen allows you to set or modify IP configuration
parameters.
SNMP Configuration... Displays the SNMP Configuration screen (see SNMP Configuration screen
on page 219). This screen allows you to set or modify the SNMP read-only
community and read-write community strings, enable or disable the
authentication trap and the link Up/down trap, set the IP address of trap
receivers, and set the trap community strings.

System Configuration Guide


98 Chapter 2 Using the console interface

Table 14 Console interface main menu options (continued)

Option Description

System Displays the System Characteristics screen (see System Characteristics


Characteristics... screen on page 100). This screen allows you to view switch characteristics,
including number of resets, power status, hardware and firmware version, and
MAC address. This screen also contains three user-configurable fields:
sysContact, sysName, and sysLocation. When the switch is part of a stack
configuration, this screen also displays the base unit identification, the number of
units configured in the stack, and the local unit stack number.
Switch Configuration... Displays the Switch Configuration Menu screen (see Switch Configuration
Menu screen on page 103). This menu provides the following configuration
options: MAC Address Table, MAC Address-Based Security, EAPOL Security
Configuration, VLAN Configuration, Port Configuration, High Speed Flow
Control, MultiLink Trunk Configuration, Port Mirroring Configuration, Rate
Limiting Configuration, IGMP Configuration, Display Port Statistics, Clear All
Port Statistics, and Stack Operational Mode.
Console/Comm Port Displays the Console/Comm Port Configuration screen (see Console/Comm
Configuration... Port Configuration screen on page 223). This screen allows you to configure
and modify the Console/Comm port parameters, including the console port
speed and password settings for the switch and stack operation.
Display Hardware Units Displays the Display Hardware Unit Information screen (see Hardware Unit
Information screen on page 233). This screen displays the switch model and
the software version running. The screen also displays the SPF GBIC.
Spanning Tree Displays the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (see Configuring VLANs,
Configuration... Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)). This menu provides the
following options: Spanning Tree Group Configuration, Spanning Tree Port
Configuration, Display Spanning Tree Switch Settings, Display Spanning Tree
VLAN Membership
TELNET/SNMP/Web Displays the TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen (see
Access Configuration... TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen on page 234). This screen
Configuration... allows you to set your switch to enable a user at a remote console terminal to
communicate with the Ethernet Switch 325/425 as if the console terminal were
directly connected to it. You can have up to four active Telnet sessions running
at one time in either a standalone switch or a stack configuration.
Software Download... Displays the Software Download screen (see Software Download screen on
page 237). This screen allows you to revise the Ethernet Switch 325/425
software image and diagnostics images that are located in nonvolatile flash
memory.
Configuration File Displays the Configuration File Download/Upload screen (see Configuration
File Download/Upload screen on page 240). This screen allows you to store
your switch/stack configuration parameters on a TFTP server. You can retrieve
the configuration parameters for automatically configuring a replacement switch
or stack with the same configuration when required. This screen also allows you
to download the ASCII configuration file from a TFTP server to the switch or
stack.

320985-A
Chapter 2 Using the console interface 99

Table 14 Console interface main menu options (continued)

Option Description

Display System Log Displays the System Log screen (see System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)).
Reset Resets the switch with the current configuration settings. This option is followed
by a screen prompt that precedes the action. Enter Yes to reset the switch; enter
No to abort the option:
If the switch is participating in a stack configuration, you can reset the entire
stack.
When you select this option, the switch resets, runs a self-test, then displays
the Nortel logo screen. Press Ctrl+Y to access the Ethernet Switch 325/425
main menu.
Reset to Default Resets the switch to the factory default configuration settings. This option is
Settings followed by a screen prompt that precedes the action. Enter Yes to reset the
switch to the factory default configuration settings; enter No to abort the option:
If the switch is participating in a stack configuration, you can reset the entire
stack.
When you select this option, the switch resets, runs a self-test, then displays
the Nortel logo screen. Press Ctrl+Y to access the Ethernet Switch 325/425
main menu.
Caution: If you choose the Reset to Default Settings option, all configured
settings are replaced with factory default settings when you press [Enter]

Achtung: Bei Auswahl des Befehls zur Rcksetzung auf die


Standardeinstellungen werden alle von Ihnen konfigurierten Einstellungen
durch die werkseitigen Standardeinstellungen ersetzt, wenn Sie die
Eingabetaste drcken.

Attention: Si vous restaurez la configuration usine, votre configuration


courante sera remplace par la configuration usine ds que vous appuierez sur
[Entre].

Precaucin: Si selecciona el comando Restaurar valores predeterminados,


todos los valores de configuracin se sustituirn por las valores
predeterminados en fbrica al pulsar [Intro].

Attenzione: Nel caso in cui si selezioni la reimpostazione dei valori di


default, tutte le impostazioni configurate verranno sostituite dai default di
fabbrica premendo il tasto [Invio].

System Configuration Guide


100 Chapter 2 Using the console interface

Table 14 Console interface main menu options (continued)

Option Description

Shutdown Allows the switch to be safely shut down and powered off.
This option is followed by two screen prompts that precede the action. At the first
prompt, enter the time in minutes to wait before the switch is shut down. At the
second prompt, enter Yes to confirm the action; or, enter No to abort the option:
Once the shutdown command is initiated, the switch saves the current
configuration and can then be safely powered off. If the switch is not powered off
within the user-specified time period, it is reset.
Once the shutdown command is initiated, all existing and subsequent Console
Interface sessions display the following message:
Switch will reset (shutdown) in <xxxx> seconds.
While existing CLI sessions do not receive a warning message, all subsequent
CLI sessions display the following message:
The shutdown process is in progress. It is safe to
poweroff the stack. Configuration changes will not be
saved. Shutdown has blocked the flash. Autoreset in
<xxxx> seconds.
Neither Web-based management nor Device Manager receive any shutdown
warning messages.
Command Line Displays the prompt to execute the CLI commands.
Interface
Logout Allows a user in a Telnet session or a user working at a password-protected
console terminal to terminate the session.

System Characteristics screen


The System Characteristics screen (Figure 19) allows you to view system
characteristics and contains three user-configurable fields: sysContact, sysName,
and sysLocation.

To open the System Characteristics screen:

Choose System Characteristics (or press s) from the main menu.

320985-A
Chapter 2 Using the console interface 101

Figure 19 System Characteristics screen

System Characteristics

Operation Mode: Switch

MAC Address: 00-0F-CD-BF-1E-80

Reset Count: 9
Last Reset Type: Management Reset
Power Status: Primary Power
Local GBIC Type: port 49, None
port 50, None
sysDescr: Ethernet Switch 425-48T
HW:00 FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0
sysObjectID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.1
sysUpTime: 7 days, 17:49:05 sysNtpTime: SNTP not synchronized.
sysServices: 3
sysContact: [ ]
sysName: [ Ethernet 428-48T ]
sysLocation: [ ]

Enter text, press <Return> or <Enter> when complete.


Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.

Table 15 System Characteristics screen fields

Field Description

Operation Mode Read-only field that indicates the operation mode of the unit, for example:
When the unit is part of a stack configuration, the (read-only) field indicates the
unit is operational in a stack, and lists the current unit number of this switch.
When the unit is not part of a stack configuration (operating standalone), the
read-only field indicates the unit is operating as a switch. When in this operation
mode, the Size of Stack and Base Unit fields (see following description) do not
appear.
Size of Stack This read-only field only appears when the switch is participating in a stack
configuration. This field indicates the number of units configured in the stack
configuration (1 to 8 units maximum).
Base Unit This read-only field only appears when the switch is participating in a stack
configuration. This field indicates the unit number of the switch that is currently
operating as the base unit.

System Configuration Guide


102 Chapter 2 Using the console interface

Table 15 System Characteristics screen fields (continued)

Field Description

MAC Address The MAC address of the switch or, when the switch is participating in a stack
configuration, the MAC address of the stack configuration.
Reset Count A read-only field that indicates the number of resets since the operational firmware
was first loaded on the switch.
Default Value 1
Range 0 to 232 -1 (4,294,967,295)
Last Reset Type A read-only field that indicates the last type of reset.
Default Value Power Cycle
Range Power Cycle, Software Download, Management Reset,
Management Factory Reset
Power Status A read-only field that indicates the current power source (primary, RPSU, or both).
Default Value Primary Power
Range Primary Power, Redundant Power, Primary and Redundant
Power
Local GBIC Type A read-only field that indicates the GBIC type that is configured in this unit. (This field
is applicable only to the Ethernet Switch 425).
sysDescr A read-only field that specifies hardware and software versions.
sysObjectID A read-only field that provides a unique identification of the switch, which contains
the vendors private enterprise number.
sysUpTime A read-only field that shows the length of time since the last reset. Note that this field
is updated when the screen is redisplayed.
sysNtpTime A read-only field that displays the current date and time and the configured time
offset from Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
sysServices A read-only field that indicates the switchs physical and data link layer functionality.
sysContact The name and phone number of the person responsible for the switch.
Default Value Zero-length string
Range Any ASCII string of up to 56 printable characters1
sysName A name that uniquely identifies the switch.
Default Value Zero-length string
Range Any ASCII string of up to 56 printable characters1
sysLocation The physical location of the switch.
Default Value Zero-length string
Range Any ASCII string of up to 56 printable characters

320985-A
Chapter 2 Using the console interface 103

1 Although this field can be set to up to 255 characters from a Network Management Station (NMS), only 56 characters
are displayed on the console terminal.

Switch Configuration Menu screen


The Switch Configuration Menu screen (Figure 20) allows you to set or modify
the switch configuration.

Choose Switch Configuration (or press w) from the main menu to open the
Switch Configuration Menu screen (Table 16).

Figure 20 Switch Configuration Menu screen

Switch Configuration Menu

MAC Address Table


MAC Address Security Configuration...
EAPOL Security Configuration...
VLAN Configuration...
Port Configuration...
High Speed Flow Control Configuration...
MultiLink Trunk Configuration...
Port Mirroring Configuration...
Rate Limiting Configuration...
IGMP Configuration...
Display Port Statistics
Clear All Port Statistics
Return to Main Menu

Use arrow keys to highlight option, press <Return> or <Enter> to select


option.
Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.

Note: The Ethernet Switch 325 does not support the High Speed flow
control feature.

System Configuration Guide


104 Chapter 2 Using the console interface

Table 16 describes the Switch Configuration Menu options.

Table 16 Switch Configuration Menu options

Option Description

MAC Address Table Displays the MAC Address Table screen (see Configuring and
Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)). This screen allows you to view
all MAC addresses and their associated port or trunk that the switch
has learned, or to search for a particular MAC address (to see if the
switch has learned the address).
MAC Address Security Displays the MAC Address Security Configuration Menu (see
Configuration... Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)). This screen allows you to set up the MAC
address security feature and provides the following options: MAC
Address Security Configuration, MAC Address Security Port
Configuration, MAC Address Security Port Lists, and MAC Address
Security Table. This menu allows you to enable and disable security
features on the port and trunk levels.
EAPoL Security Configuration Displays the EAPOL Security Configuration Menu (see
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)). This screen allows you to set up
Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL)- based
security.
VLAN Configuration... Displays the VLAN Configuration Menu (see Configuring VLANs,
Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320986-A)). This menu provides the following options:
VLAN Configuration, VLAN Port Configuration, VLAN Display by Port,
MAC-SA, and Return to Switch Configuration Menu screen. This
menu allows you to create and modify VLANs.
Port Configuration... Displays the Port Configuration screen (see Port Configuration
screen on page 109). This screen allows you to configure a specific
switch port, all switch ports or, when in a stack configuration, all stack
ports.
High Speed Flow Control Displays the High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen. (see
Configuration... High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen on page 112).

320985-A
Chapter 2 Using the console interface 105

Table 16 Switch Configuration Menu options (continued)

Option Description

MultiLink Trunk Configuration... Displays the MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu (see
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking
for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320986-A)). This menu provides the following options:
MultiLink Trunk Configuration and MultiLink Trunk Utilization. This
menu allows you to create and modify trunks, and to monitor the
bandwidth utilization of configured trunks.
Port Mirroring Configuration... Displays the Port Mirroring Configuration screen (see System
Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)). This screen allows you to
designate a single switch port as a traffic monitor for one specific port.
Rate Limiting Configuration Displays the Rate Limiting Configuration screen (Rate Limiting
Configuration screen on page 115). This screen allows you to limit
the forwarding rate of broadcast and multicast packets at ingress.
IGMP Configuration Displays the IGMP Configuration screen (Configuring IP
Multicast for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320990-A)). This screen allows you to optimize
multicast traffic by setting up IGMP port memberships that filter
multicast on a per port basis
Display Port Statistics Displays the Port Statistics screen (see System Monitoring Guide
for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)). This screen allows you to view detailed
information about any switch port.
Clear All Port Statistics Allows you to clear all port statistics.
This option is followed by screen prompts that precede a choice of the
actions:
If the switch is operating standalone, choose one of the following:
Yes, to clear all port statistics for all switch ports
No, to abort the option
If the switch is participating in a stack configuration, choose one of
the following:
Clear all port statistics for a specific unit in the stack
Clear all port statistics for the entire stack
No, to abort the option

System Configuration Guide


106 Chapter 2 Using the console interface

Port list syntax

When you enter a port list in a stack configuration, you must specify either a unit/
port list, NONE, or ALL. In a stack configuration, ALL indicates all of the stack
port; whereas, in a standalone scenario, ALL indicates all ports of the switch.

Note: NONE and ALL must be entered in uppercase characters as


shown in the screen prompt.

A unit/port number list is composed of one or more list items, each of which can
be a single number or a range of numbers (where the numbers represents one or
more ports). If a list item is preceded by a number and then a slash (/), the number
represents a stack unit.

For example, 1/1-7,2/1-7,2/9,3/1-4,4/12 is a valid unit/port number list (see entry


S1 in Figure 21 on page 107). It represents the following port order:

Unit 1: ports 1 to 7
Unit 2: ports 1 to 7 and port 9
Unit 3: ports 1 to 4
Unit 4: port 12

320985-A
Chapter 2 Using the console interface 107

Figure 21 MAC Address Security Port Lists screen

MAC Address Security Port Lists

Entry Port List


----- ---------
S1 [ ]

S2 [ ]

S3 [1/3,2/7,3/1-4]

S4 [ ]

S5 [ ]

S6 [ ]

S7 [ ]

More...

Press Ctrl-N to display next screen.


Enter port list, NONE,ALL,1,3,7-9, press <Return> or <Enter> when done.
Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.

Accelerator keys for repetitive tasks

You can use certain keystrokes known as accelerator keys to help speed up
repetitive tasks. For example, you can assign accelerator keys to modify the Port
List field in the MAC Address Security Port List screen (Figure 21). You can
modify the port list in any of the following ways:

Add a new port to an existing port number list


Remove a port from an existing port number list
Copy an existing field into an adjacent field

System Configuration Guide


108 Chapter 2 Using the console interface

Adding a new port to an existing port number list

In the example shown in Figure 21, S3 shows the Port List field values as:

1/3,2/7,3/1-4

If you want to add another port (for example, port 2/9) to the existing port number
list, you could highlight the field and then type another port list, including the new
port number 1/3,2/7,2/9,3/1-4 Enter. This method can be cumbersome.

As an alternative method instead, you can highlight the field and then enter +2/9
Enter. The existing field keeps the previous list and adds the new port number (2/
9) between ports 2/7 and 3/14.

(If you choose to add port 2/8 to the existing port number list, the field accepts the
new port 2/8 but shows the new port number list field as: 1/3,2/7-8,3/1-4.)

Removing a port from an existing port number list

To remove a port from the port number list, use the minus sign (-) character
instead of the plus sign (+) character as described above.

Copying an existing field into and adjacent field

You can use the period (.) character to copy a previously entered field value into
the field directly next to it. For example, to copy the Allowed Source S3 (shown in
Figure 21) into the next field (entry 6):

1 Enter a MAC address into the next MAC address field.


2 Highlight the (blank) Allowed Source field.
3 Enter the period (.) character and click Return.

The port number list from the previous entry is copied into the new field.

320985-A
Chapter 2 Using the console interface 109

Port Configuration screen

The Port Configuration screen (Figures 22 and 23) allows you to configure
specific switch ports or all switch ports. You can enable or disable the port status
of specified switch ports, set the switch ports to autonegotiate for the highest
available speed of the connected station, or set the speed for selected switch ports
(autonegotiation is not supported on fiber optic ports).

You can disable switch ports that are trunk members (except the lowest member
of an active trunk which cannot be disabled until it is removed from the MLT);
however, the screen prompts for verification of the request before completing the
action. Choosing Yes disables the port and removes it from the trunk.

Note: You cannot disable a port that is a member of the MLT if the
switch is operating in the RSTP/MSTP mode.

Note: The Autonegotiation fields, the Speed fields, and the Duplex
fields are independent of MultiLink Trunking, VLANs, and the STP.

To open the Port Configuration screen:

Choose Port Configuration (or press p) from the Switch Configuration


Menu screen.

System Configuration Guide


110 Chapter 2 Using the console interface

Figure 22 Port Configuration screen (1 of 2)

Port Configuration

Port Trunk Status Link LnkTrap Autonegotiation Speed Duplex


---- ----- ------------ ----- ------- --------------- -----------------
1 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
2 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
3 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
4 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
5 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
6 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
7 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
8 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
9 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
10 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
11 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
12 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
13 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
14 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
More...

Press Ctrl-N to display next screen.


Use space bar to display choices, press <Return> or <Enter> to select choice.
Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.

320985-A
Chapter 2 Using the console interface 111

Figure 23 Port Configuration screen (2 of 2)

Port Configuration

Port Trunk Status Link LnkTrap Autonegotiation Speed Duplex


---- ----- ------------ ----- ------- --------------- -----------------
15 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
16 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
17 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
18 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
19 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
20 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
21 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
22 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
23 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
24 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
25 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
26 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
27 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
28 [ Enabled ] Down [ On ] [ Enabled ] [ ]
More...

Press Ctrl-N to display next screen. Press Ctrl-P to display previous screen.
Use space bar to display choices, press <Return> or <Enter> to select choice.
Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.

Table 17 describes the Port Configuration screen fields.

Table 17 Port Configuration screen fields

Field Description

Unit Indicates the unit number that corresponds to the field values from the table
displayed in Figure 23. This field is not visible when the switch is operating in the
standalone mode.
Port Indicates the switch port numbers that correspond to the field values in that row of
the screen (for example, the field values in row 2 apply to switch port 2). The values
that you set in the Switch row affect all switch ports and, when the switch is part of a
stack, the values that you set in the Stack row affects all ports in the entire stack.
Trunk The read-only data displayed in this column indicates the trunks that correspond to
the switch ports specified in the Trunk Members fields of the Trunk Configuration
screen (see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for
Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)).

System Configuration Guide


112 Chapter 2 Using the console interface

Table 17 Port Configuration screen fields (continued)

Field Description

Status Allows you to disable any of the switch ports. You can also use this field to control
access to any switch port.
Default Value Enabled
Range Enabled, Disabled
Link A read-only field that indicates the current link state of the corresponding port, as
follows:
Up: The port is connected and operational.
Down: The port is not connected or is not operational.
LnkTrap Allows you to control whether link up/link down traps are sent to the configured trap
sink from the switch.
Default Value On
Range On, Off
Autonegotiation When enabled, sets the corresponding port speed to match the best service provided
by the connected station, up to 100 Mb/s in full-duplex mode. This field is disabled for
all fiber optic ports.
Default Value Enabled
Range Enabled, Disabled
Speed/Duplex Allows you to manually configure any port to support an Ethernet speed of 10 Mb/s
or 100 Mb/s, in half- or full-duplex mode. This field is set (by default) to 1000 Mb/s,
full-duplex for Gigabit ports only.
Default Value 10Mbs/Half (when Autonegotiation is Disabled)
Range 10Mbs/Half, 10Mbs/Full, 100Mbs/Half, 100Mbs/Full

High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen


The High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen (Figure 24) allows you to
set the port parameters for the Gigabit Ethernet Interface.

Note: The GBIC module must be installed to configure the port.

Choose High Speed Flow Control Configuration (or press h) from the
Switch Configuration Menu screen.

320985-A
Chapter 2 Using the console interface 113

Figure 24 High Speed Flow Control Configuration

High Speed Flow Control Configuration

Port Autonegotiation Speed Duplex Flow Control


---- --------------- -------------- --------------
49 Enabled 1000Mbs / Full Disabled
50 Enabled 1000Mbs / Full Disabled

Use space bar to display choices, press <Return> or <Enter> to select choice.
Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.

Table 18 describes the High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen fields.

Table 18 High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen fields

Field Description

Unit Allows you to select the unit number (when stacking is configured) to view or
configure. To view or configure another unit, type its unit number and press
Enter, or press the spacebar to toggle the unit numbers (the system only
displays a screen for units that are configured with a Gigabit MDA). This field is
not visible if the switch is operating in the standalone mode.
Port Displays the port number

System Configuration Guide


114 Chapter 2 Using the console interface

Table 18 High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen fields (continued)

Field Description

Autonegotiation Indicates if the Autonegotiation has been enabled on the port. When enabled,
the port only advertises support for 1000 Mb/s operation, in full-duplex mode.
Default Value Enabled
Range Enabled, Disabled
Speed/Duplex Displays if a port is configured to support an Ethernet speed of 10 Mb/s or 100
Mb/s, in half- or full-duplex mode. This field is set (by default) to 1000 Mb/s,
full-duplex for Gigabit ports only.
Default 100Mbs/Half (when Autonegotiation is Disabled)
Range 10Mbs/Half, 10Mbs/Full, 100Mbs/Half, 100Mbs/Full
Flow Control Indicates if the switch or unit has been configured to control traffic and avoid
congestion on the Gigabit MDA port. Two modes are available (see Choosing
a high speed flow control mode, next, for details about the two modes). The
Flow Control field cannot be configured unless you set the Autonegotiation field
value to Disabled.
Default Value Disabled
Range Disabled, Symmetric, Asymmetric

Note: All fields (except the Unit field) described in Table 18 are
read-only fields.

Choosing a high speed flow control mode

The high speed flow control feature allows you to control traffic and avoid
congestion on the Gigabit full-duplex link. If the receive port buffer becomes full,
the Ethernet Switch 425-24T issues a flow-control signal to the device at the other
end of the link to suspend transmission. When the receive buffer is no longer full,
the switch issues a signal to resume the transmission. You can choose Symmetric
or Asymmetric flow control mode.

Symmetric mode

This mode allows both the GBIC port and its link partner to send flow control
pause frames to each other.

320985-A
Chapter 2 Using the console interface 115

When a pause frame is received (by either the GBIC port or its link partner), the
port suspends transmission of frames for a number of slot times specified in the
control frame or until a pause-release control frame is received. Both devices on
the link must support this mode when it is selected.

Asymmetric mode

This mode allows the link partner to send flow control pause frames to the GBIC
port. When a pause frame is received, the receiving port suspends transmission of
frames for a number of slot times specified in the control frame or until a
pause-release control frame is received.

In this mode, the GBIC port is disabled from transmitting pause frames to its link
partner. Use this mode when the GBIC port is connected to a buffered repeater
device.

You can choose a high speed flow control mode using CLI commands. For more
information about the commands see Enabling flow control on page 326.

Rate Limiting Configuration screen

The Rate Limiting feature allows you to configure the threshold limits for
broadcast and multicast packets ingressing on a port for a given time interval. The
Ethernet Switch 325/425 drops any packets received above the threshold value if
the traffic ingressing on the port exceeds the threshold. The hardware restrictions
on this platform do not allow you to determine if the traffic from a port is the
cause of excess broadcast or multicast traffic. Consequently you cannot perform
port specific actions such as disabling a port. You can generate a trap to detect the
excess traffic or you can configure the switch to store a message in the system log
when the traffic on the port exceeds the threshold value. This message in the
system log conveys that some traffic to the switch will be dropped.

System Configuration Guide


116 Chapter 2 Using the console interface

The Rate Limiting Configuration screen allows you to limit the forwarding rate
of broadcast and multicast packets at ingress.

Note: All configuration settings that you make in the Rate Limiting
Configuration screen are applied across the entire unit (if stacking in
configured). You cannot set some ports in the unit to limit broadcast
traffic with a value of X pps (Packets Per Second) and some other ports
in the same unit to limit multicast traffic with a value of Y pps.

Figure 25 show sample rate limiting values for the two Rate Limiting
Configuration screens.

To open the Rate Limiting Configuration screen:

Choose Rate Limiting Configuration (or press l) from the Switch


Configuration Menu screen.

320985-A
Chapter 2 Using the console interface 117

Figure 25 Rate Limiting Configuration screen

Rate Limiting Configuration

Packet Type Limit


---- ------------- --------

Switch [ Both ] [ 0 pps ]


Stack [ Both ] [ 0 pps ]

Use space bar to display choices, press <Return> or <Enter> to select choice.
Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main
Menu.

Table 19 describes the fields in the Rate Limiting Configuration screen.

Table 19 Rate Limiting Configuration screen fields

Field Description

Unit Allows you to select the unit number (when stacking is configured) to view or
configure. To view or configure another unit, type its unit number and press
Enter, or press the spacebar to toggle the unit numbers. This field is not present
in a standalone configuration.
Stack Displays information relevant to the stack, if the switch is operating in the stack
configuration.
Packet Type Allows you to select the packet types for rate-limiting.
Default value: Both
Range: Both, Multicast, Broadcast

System Configuration Guide


118 Chapter 2 Using the console interface

Table 19 Rate Limiting Configuration screen fields (continued)

Field Description

Limit Sets the amount of Packets Per Second allowed for forwarding. 0 pps means
Rate Limiting has been disabled.
Default value: 0 pps
Range: 0-262143
Switch Allows you to enable Rate Limiting on current selected unit.
Stack Allows you to enable Rate Limiting on an entire stack. This field is visible only if
stacking has been configured.

When the volume of either packet type is high, placing severe strain on the
network (often referred to as a storm), you can set the forwarding rate of those
packet types to not exceed a specified percentage of the total available bandwidth.
The percentage you set refers to the total available bandwidth, not to a percentage
of current traffic.

320985-A
119

Chapter 3
CLI Basics

You can manage the Ethernet Switch 325/425 with a number of management tools
such as:

Device Manager (GUI)


Web-based management system
Console Interface (CI menus)
Command Line Interface (CLI)

The Ethernet Switch 325/425 Command Line Interface (CLI) is a management


tool that provides methods for configuring, managing, and monitoring the
operational functions of the switch. You can access CLI through a direct
connection to the switch console port, or remotely using Telnet. For a complete,
alphabetical list of CLI commands, refer to Appendix E, Command List, on
page 447.

You can use the CLI interactively, or you can load and execute CLI scripts. CLI
scripts are loaded in one of the following ways:

Entering the configure network command


Manually loading the script in the console menu
Automatically loading the script at boot-up

This chapter discusses the following CLI topics:

CLI command modes


Port numbering on page 123
Accessing CLI on page 125
Setting the system username and password on page 127
Getting help on page 128

System Configuration Guide


120 Chapter 3 CLI Basics

Basic navigation on page 128


Managing basic system information on page 137
Managing MAC address forwarding database table on page 143

CLI command modes


Most CLI commands are available only under a certain command mode. The
Ethernet Switch 325/425 has the following four command modes:

User EXEC
Privileged EXEC
Global Configuration
Interface Configuration

The User EXEC mode is the default mode; it is also referred to as exec. This
command mode is the initial mode of access on powering-up the Ethernet Switch
325/425. In this command mode, the user can access only a subset of the total CLI
commands; however, the commands in this mode are available while the user is in
any of the other four modes. The commands in this mode are those you would
generally need, such as ping and logout.

Commands in the Privileged EXEC mode are available to all other modes but the
User EXEC mode. The commands in this mode allow you to perform basic
switch-level management tasks, such as downloading the software image, setting
passwords, and booting the Ethernet Switch 325/425. The Privileged EXEC mode
is also referred to as privExec mode.

The Global Configuration mode and the Interface Configuration mode allow you
to change the configuration of the Ethernet Switch 325/425. Changes made in
these command modes are immediately applied to the switch configuration and
saved to NVRAM.

The Global Configuration commands allow you to set and display general
configurations for the switch, such as the IP address, SNMP parameters, the
Telnet access, and VLANs. The Global Configuration mode is also referred to as
config mode.

320985-A
Chapter 3 CLI Basics 121

The Interface Configuration commands allow you to configure parameters for


each port, such as speed and duplex mode. The Interface Configuration mode is
also referred to as config-if mode.

Figure 26 provides an illustration of the hierarchy of Ethernet Switch 325/425


CLI command modes.

Figure 26 CLI command mode hierarchy

User Exec
(exec)

Privileged EXEC
(privExec)

Global Configuration
(config)

Interface Configuration
(config-if)

10194EA

You can see a specific value for each command mode at the prompt line, and you
can use specific commands to enter or exit each command mode (Table 20).
Additionally, you can only enter command modes from specific modes and only
exit to specific command modes.

System Configuration Guide


122 Chapter 3 CLI Basics

Table 20 describes the command mode prompts and entrance/exit commands.

Table 20 Command mode prompts and entrance/exit commands

Command Prompt for the Ethernet Prompt for the Ethernet


Enter/exit command
mode Switch 325 Switch 425

User EXEC 325-24T> 425-48T> Default mode,


(exec) automatically enter
logout or exit to
quit to Main Menu
Privileged EXEC 325-24T# 425-48T# enable to enter from
(privExec) User EXEC mode
logout or exit to
quit to Main Menu
Global 325-24T(config)# 425-48T(config)# configure to enter
Configuration from Privileged EXEC
(config) mode
end or exit to exit to
Privileged EXEC mode;
logout to quit to Main
Menu
Interface 325-24T(config-if)# 425-48T(config-if)# interface
Configuration FastEthernet
(config-if) {<portnum>|all} to
enter from Global
Configuration mode
logout to quit to Main
Menu; end to exit to
Privileged EXEC mode;
exit to exit to Global
Configuration mode

The prompt displays the switch name, and the current CLI command mode. For
example:

User EXEC425-48T>
Privileged EXEC425-48T#
Global Configuration425-48T(config)#
Interface Configuration425-48T(config-if)#

Refer to Appendix E, Command List, on page 447, for a complete, alphabetical


list of all CLI commands and where they are explained.

320985-A
Chapter 3 CLI Basics 123

The initial command mode in CLI depends on your access level when you logged
into the Ethernet Switch 325/425 CI menus:

With no password protection, you can enter the CLI in userExec mode, and
use the enable command to move to the privExec command mode.
If you have logged into the CI menus with read-only access, you can enter the
CLI in userExec mode and cannot access any other CLI command modes.
If you have logged into the CI menus with read-write access, you can enter the
CLI in privExec mode and use the commands to move to the other command
modes.

Port numbering
The port numbering for different versions of Ethernet switches are listed below:

Ethernet Switch 325-24T has twenty-four 10/100 Mb/s ports.


Ethernet Switch 325-24G has twenty-four 10/100 Mb/s ports and two
10/100/1000 ports.
Ethernet Switch 425-24T has twenty-four 10/100 Mb/s ports on the front, as
well as two combo ports, which includes two GBIC or two copper ports
10/100/1000Mbps.
Ethernet Switch 425-48T has forty-eight 10/100 ports on the front, as well as
two combo ports, which includes two GBIC or two copper ports
10/100/1000Mbps.

The CLI uses the variable <portlist> when a command specifies one or more
ports for the command.

Note: The Ethernet Switch 425-24T operates either in standalone mode


or in stack mode. The format of the variable <portlist> is different if
you are working on a standalone Ethernet Switch 425-24T or a stack.

System Configuration Guide


124 Chapter 3 CLI Basics

Port numbering in standalone mode

In a standalone mode, the port number variable is an integer between 1 to 50 for


Ethernet Switch 425-48T and 1 to 26 for Ethernet Switch 425-24T. You can use
the <portlist> variable in the following formats:

A single port numberan integer between 1 to 50.


Example: 7 means port 7
A range of port numbersa pair of port numbers between 1 and 50 separated
by a dash.
Example: 1-3 means ports 1, 2, and 3
Example: 5-24 means all ports from port 5 through port 24
A list of port numbers and/or port ranges, separated by commas.
Example: 1,3,7 means ports 1, 3, and 7
Example: 1-3,9-11 means ports 1, 2, 3, 9, 10, and 11
Example: 1,3-5,9-11,15 means ports 1, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, 11, and 15
none means no ports.
all means all the ports on the standalone Ethernet Switch 325/425, including
any GBIC ports.

You can also use the unit/port convention discussed in Port numbering in stacked
mode, with a standalone Ethernet Switch 325/425 as long as the unit number is 1.

Port numbering in stacked mode

In Ethernet Switch 425-24T Stack mode, use the <portlist> variable to


represent the number of the unit within the stack, followed by a forward slash (/),
and the port number(s). Unit number will always be an integer between 1 and 8,
and the port numbers will always be integers between 1 and 25. You can also use
none to indicate none of the ports in the stack or all to indicate all of the ports in
the stack.

In the Stack mode, use the <portlist> variable in the following formats:

A single port numberan integer for the unit, followed by /, and an integer
for the port number
Example: 1/7 means unit 1 port 7

320985-A
Chapter 3 CLI Basics 125

Example: 3/24 means unit 3, port 24


A range of port numbersan integer for the unit, followed by /, and integers
for the port number between 1 and 24 separated by a dash
Example: 1/1-3 means unit 1, ports 1, 2, and 3
Example: 3/5-24 means unit 3, port 5 through port 24
A unit with no ports specifiedan integer for the unit, followed by /, and the
word none.
3/none means unit 3 with no ports
A unit with all ports specifiedan integer for the unit, followed by /, and the
word all.
3/all means unit 3 with all ports
A list of port numbers, port ranges, and/or units with all ports or no ports
using the unit/port formatseparated by commas
Example: 1/1,2/3,3/7 means unit 1 port 1; unit 2, port 3; and unit 3,
port 7
Example: 1/1-3,3/9-11 means unit 1, ports 1, 2, 3; and unit 3, ports 9,
10, and 11
Example: 1/1,4/3-5,5/9-11,7/15 means unit 1, port 1; unit 4, ports
3, 4, 5; unit 5, ports 9, 10, 11; and unit 7, port 15
Example: 1/3,3/ALL,4/NONE means unit 1, port 3; unit 3, all ports; and
unit 4, no ports
none means no ports in the stack.
all means all the ports in the stack, including all GBIC ports.

To view the unit numbers in the stack, issue the show stack-info command
(show stack-info command on page 141). You must be in the Privileged EXEC
(privExec) mode to execute this command.

Accessing CLI
You access the CI menus using Telnet or through a direct connection to the switch
from a terminal or personal computer (PC). You can use any terminal or PC with a
terminal emulator as the CLI command station. Make sure that the terminal has
the following features:

9600 bits per second (b/s), 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, no flow control

System Configuration Guide


126 Chapter 3 CLI Basics

Serial terminal-emulation program such as Terminal or Hyperterm for


Windows* 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows NT*.
Cable and connector to match the male DTE connector (DB-9) on the
Ethernet Switch 325/425 console port, with the DCE/DTE switch on the
switch management module set to DTE
VT100 Arrows checked in the Terminal Preferences window under Terminal
Options, and Block Cursor unchecked; VT-100/ANSI checked under
Emulation.

To access CLI:

1 When you access the Ethernet Switch 325/425, the banner appears
(Figure 27).

Figure 27 Ethernet Switch 425-48T banner

Enter Ctrl-Y to begin.


***************************************************************
*** Ethernet Switch 425-48T ***
*** Nortel ***
*** Copyright (c) 1996-2005, All Rights Reserved ***
*** Release 3.6 SSH ***
*** HW:00 FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0 ***

***************************************************************

2 Press Ctrl+Y, and the Main Menu appears on the console screen (Figure 28)
with the top line highlighted.

320985-A
Chapter 3 CLI Basics 127

Figure 28 Main Menu for Ethernet Switch 425-48T console interface


Ethernet Switch 425-48T Main Menu

IP Configuration/Setup...
SNMP Configuration...
System Characteristics...
Switch Configuration...
Console/Comm Port Configuration...
Display Hardware Units...
Spanning Tree Configuration...
TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration...
Software Download...
Configuration File...
Display System Log...
Reset...
Reset to Default Settings...
Shutdown Command...
Command Line Interface...
Logout...

Use arrow keys to highlight option, press <Return> or <Enter> to select


option.

3 Using the Down Arrow key, scroll down to Command Line Interface, and
press Enter. The CLI prompt appears:
425-48T>

The > sign at the end of the name of the switch indicates that the default CLI
mode is User EXEC mode. Refer to CLI command modes on page 120, to
select the command mode you want to use (and are authorized to use).

Setting the system username and password


You can set usernames and passwords for system access through the Console
Interface, CLI, Telnet, and Web-based management. For more information, refer
to Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).

System Configuration Guide


128 Chapter 3 CLI Basics

Getting help
When you navigate through the CLI, online Help is available at all levels.
Entering a portion of the command, space, and a question mark (?) at the prompt
results in a list of all options for that command.

Refer to help command on page 130 for more information about the specific
types of Help.

Basic navigation
This section discusses basic navigation around the CLI and between the command
modes. As you see, the CLI incorporates various shortcut commands and
keystrokes to simplify its use. The following topics are covered in this section:

General navigation commands


Keystroke navigation on page 129
help command on page 130
no command on page 131
default command on page 131
logout command on page 132
enable command on page 132
configure command on page 132
interface command on page 133
disable command on page 133
end command on page 134
exit command on page 134

General navigation commands

When you enter ? at any point in the CLI session, the system retrieves help
information for whatever portion of the command you entered thus far. Refer to
help command on page 130 for more information.

320985-A
Chapter 3 CLI Basics 129

The system records the last command in a CLI session. However, the last
command is not saved across reboots.

Add the word no to the beginning of most CLI configuration commands to clear
or remove the parameters of the actual command. For example, when you enter
the command ip stack address 192.32.154.126, you set the IP stack
address. However, when you enter no ip stack address, the system returns
the IP address to zero. Refer to Appendix E, Command List, on page 447 for an
alphabetical list of no commands.

Add the word default to the beginning of most CLI configuration commands to
set the parameters of the command to the factory default values. Refer to
Appendix E, Command List, on page 447 for an alphabetical list of default
commands.

When you enter a portion of the command and press the [Tab] key, the system
finds the first unambiguous match of a command and displays that command. For
example, if you enter down+[Tab], the system displays download.

Keystroke navigation

You can change the location of the cursor using the key combinations shown in
Table 21.

Table 21 Keystroke navigation

Key combination Function

Ctrl+A Start of line


Ctrl+B Back 1 character
Ctrl+C Abort command
Ctrl+D Delete the character indicated by the cursor
Ctrl+E End of line
Ctrl+F Forward 1 character
Ctrl+H Delete character left of cursor (Backspace key)
Tab Command/parameter completion
Ctrl+K and Ctrl+R Redisplay line
Ctrl+N or Down arrow Next history command

System Configuration Guide


130 Chapter 3 CLI Basics

Table 21 Keystroke navigation

Key combination Function

Ctrl+P or Up arrow Previous history command


Ctrl+T Transpose characters
Ctrl+U Delete entire line
Ctrl+W Delete word left of cursor
Ctrl+X Delete all characters to left of cursor
Ctrl+z Exit Global Configuration mode (to Privileged EXEC
mode)
? Context-sensitive help
Esc+C and Esc+U Capitalize character at cursor
Esc+l Change character at cursor to lowercase
Esc+B Move back 1 word
Esc+D Delete 1 word to the right
Esc+F Move 1 word forward

help command

The help command is in all command modes and displays a brief message about
using the CLI help system. The syntax for the help command is:

help

The help command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 29 shows the output from the help command.

320985-A
Chapter 3 CLI Basics 131

Figure 29 help command output in privExec mode

425-48T>help
Context help may be requested at any point in a command by entering
a question mark '?'. If nothing matches, the help list will be empty
and you must backup until entering a '?' shows the available options.
Two styles of help are provided:
1. Full help is available when you are ready to enter a
command argument (e.g. 'show?') and describes each possible
argument.
2. Partial help is provided when an abbreviated argument is entered
and you want to know what arguments match the input
(e.g. 'show pr?'.)

no command

The no command is always used as a prefix to a configuration command, and it


negates the action performed by that command. The effect of the no command is
to remove or to clear the configuration controlled by the specified command.
Various no commands are in the config and config-if command modes.

Refer to Appendix E, Command List, on page 447 for an alphabetical listing of


all no commands.

Note: Not all configuration commands support the no prefix


command.

default command

The default command is always used as a prefix to a configuration command,


and it restores the configuration parameters to default values. The default values
are specified by each command.

Refer to Appendix A for an alphabetical listing of all default commands.

Note: Not all commands support the default prefix command.

System Configuration Guide


132 Chapter 3 CLI Basics

logout command

The logout command logs you out of the CLI session and returns you to the
Main Menu of the Console Interface (CI) menus (Figure 28). The syntax for the
logout command is:

logout

The logout command is in all command modes.

The logout command has no parameters or variables.

enable command

The enable command changes the command mode from User EXEC to privExec
mode. The syntax for the enable command is:

enable

The enable command is in the exec command mode.

The enable command has no parameters or variables.

configure command

The configure command moves you to the Global Configuration (config)


command mode and identifies the source for the configuration commands. The
syntax for the configure command is:

configure {terminal|network}

The configure command is in the privExec command mode.

320985-A
Chapter 3 CLI Basics 133

Table 22 describes the parameters and variables for the configure command.

Table 22 configure command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

terminal | network Specifies the source for the configuration commands for the Ethernet Switch
325/425:
terminalallows you to enter config mode to enter configuration commands
networkallows you to set up parameters for auto-loading a script at boot-up
or for loading and executing a script immediately

interface command

The interface command moves you to the Interface Configuration (config-if)


command mode. The syntax for the interface command is:

interface FastEthernet <portlist>

The interface command is in the config command mode.

Table 23 describes the parameters and variables for the interface command.

Table 23 interface command parameters and variables

Parameters
Description
and variables

<portlist> Specifies the portlist you want to be affected by all the commands
issued in the config-if command mode.

disable command

The disable command returns you to the User EXEC (exec) command mode.
The syntax for the disable command is:

disable

The disable command is in the privExec command mode.

The disable command has no parameters or variables.

System Configuration Guide


134 Chapter 3 CLI Basics

end command

The end command moves you to the priv Exec mode from either the Global
Configuration (config) mode or the Interface Configuration (config-if) mode.

The syntax for the end command is:

end

The end command has no parameters or variables.

exit command

The exit command moves you around the command modes:

In User EXEC (exec) and Privileged EXEC (privExec) command modes,


exit allows you to quit the CLI session.
In Global Configuration (config) mode, exit moves you back to the privExec
command mode.
In Interface Configuration (config-if) command mode, exit moves you back
to the config mode.

The syntax for the exit command is:

exit

The exit command has no parameters or variables.

shutdown command for the unit


The shutdown command allows you to safely shut down and power off the
switch. Once the shutdown command is initiated, the switch saves the current
configuration which allows users to power off the switch within the specified time
period (1 to 60 minutes); otherwise, the switch performs a reset.

When the shutdown command is initiated in the CLI, the following message
appears:

Shutdown (y/n) ?

320985-A
Chapter 3 CLI Basics 135

Enter yes at this prompt to shut down the switch.


The following warning message then appears:

Warning the switch/stack has been set to reboot in <xx>


minutes. Current configuration has been saved, no further
configuration changes can be saved until reboot occurs or
'shutdown cancel' command is issued.

The syntax for the shutdown command is:

shutdown [force] [minutes-to-wait <1-60>] [cancel]

Once the shutdown command is initiated, all existing and subsequent Console
Interface sessions display the following message:

Stack will reset in <xxxx> seconds.

While existing CLI sessions do not receive a warning message, all subsequent
CLI sessions display the following message:

The shutdown process is in progress. It is safe to poweroff


the stack. Configuration changes will not be saved. Shutdown
has blocked the flash. Autoreset in <xxxx> seconds.

Neither Web-based management nor Device Manager receive any shutdown


warning messages.

System Configuration Guide


136 Chapter 3 CLI Basics

Table 23 describes the parameters and variables for the shutdown command.

Table 24 shutdown command parameters and variables

Parameters
Description
and variables

force Instructs the switch to skip the shutdown confirmation prompt.


minutes-to-wait Specifies the number of minutes that pass before the switch resets
<1-60>] itself. The default wait time is set at 10 minutes.
cancel Aborts all scheduled switch shutdowns

Note: Any configurations or logins performed on the switch after the


shutdown command is initiated are not saved to NVRAM and are lost
after the reset.

The shutdown command is in the privExec command mode.

reload command

The reload command provides you with a configuration rollback mechanism to


prevent loss of connectivity to a switch, typically for remote configurations. The
reload command allows you to temporarily disable the autosave feature for a
specified time period (1 to 60 minutes), allowing you to make a number of
configuration changes on remote switches without affecting the current saved
configuration. During the interval in which the autosave feature is disabled by the
reload command, you must use the copy config nvram command to force a
manual save of your configurations.

Initiate the reload command before you start the switch configuration
commands. Once you initiate the command in the CLI, the following message
appears:

Reload (y/n) ?

Enter yes at this prompt to set the switch reload.


The following warning message then appears:

320985-A
Chapter 3 CLI Basics 137

Warning the switch/stack has been set to reload in <xx>


minutes. Current configuration has NOT been saved.
Configuration must be explicitly saved.

Once the reload timer expires, the switch resets, reloads the last saved
configuration, and re-enables the autosave feature.

The syntax for the reload command is:

reload [force] [minutes-to-wait <1-60>] [cancel]

Table 23 describes the parameters and variables for the interface command.

Table 25 reload command parameters and variables

Parameters
Description
and variables

force Instructs the switch to skip the reload confirmation prompt.


minutes-to-wait Specifies the number of minutes that pass before the switch reloads
<1-60>] itself. The default wait time is set at 10 minutes.
cancel Aborts all scheduled switch reloads

The reload command is in the privExec command mode.

Managing basic system information


This section shows you how to view basic system information, such as the current
software version and the stack mode; you can renumber the units within a stack.
The following topics are covered:

show sys-info command


show tech command on page 139
show stack-info command on page 141
show stacking-mode command on page 142
renumber unit command on page 143

System Configuration Guide


138 Chapter 3 CLI Basics

show sys-info command

The show sys-info command displays the current system characteristics. The
syntax for the show sys-info command is:

show sys-info

The show sys-info command is in the privExec command mode.

The show sys-info command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 30 displays sample output from the show sys-info command.

Figure 30 show sys-info command output

425-48T#show sys-info
Operation Mode: Switch
MAC Address: 00-0F-CD-BF-1E-80
Reset Count: 34
Last Reset Type: Power Cycle
Power Status: Primary Power
Autotopology: Enabled
Local GBIC Type: (port 49) GBIC is missing
Local GBIC Type: (port 50) GBIC is missing
sysDescr: Ethernet Switch 425-48T
HW:00 FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0
Mfg Date: 05122004
Serial #: SACC2600E5
Operational State:Normal
sysObjectID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.1
sysUpTime: 2 days, 17:26:24
sysNtpTime: SNTP not synchronized.
sysServices: 3
sysContact: c
sysName: Ethernet 425-48T
sysLocation:
425-48T#

To change the system contact, name, or location, refer to the snmp-server


command (see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)).

320985-A
Chapter 3 CLI Basics 139

show tech command

The show tech command displays the system information. The syntax for the
show tech command is:

show tech

The show tech command is in the privExec command mode. The show tech
command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 31, Figure 31 on page 139, and Figure 32 on page 140 display a sample
output from the show tech command.

Figure 31 show tech command output


425# show tech
*****SYS Info*****
System Information:
Operation Mode: Switch
MAC Address: 00-09-97-A2-9D-80
Reset Count: 123
Last Reset Type: Management Reset
Autotopology: Enabled
sysObjectID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.2
sysUpTime: 2 days, 04:41:28
sysNtpTime: SNTP not synchronized.
sysServices: 3
sysContact:
sysName: 425
sysLocation:
Unit #1:
Switch Model: 425-24T
MDA Model: None
Cascade Module: 400-ST1
Hardware Version: 0B
Firmware Version: 3.5.0.2
Software Version: v3.6.0
Serial Number: SACC25003U
Manufacturing Date: 05232003
Power Status: Primary
Fan #1 Status: Normal
Fan #2 Status: Normal
*****UI Button*****
Unit # Button Mode
------ -------------
1 Enabled

System Configuration Guide


140 Chapter 3 CLI Basics

Figure 32 show tech command output (continued)

*****MEMORY INFORMATION*****

status bytes blocks avg block max block


------ --------- -------- ---------- ----------
current
free 3384136 154 21974 3333064
alloc 7077632 4335 1632 -
cumulative
alloc 1036033356 11295553 91 -
*****IP Configuration*****
BootP Mode: BootP Disabled

Configured In Use Last BootP


--------------- --------------- ---------------
Stack IP Address: 192.168.100.100 0.0.0.0
Switch IP Address: 192.168.100.13 192.168.100.13 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0
Default Gateway: 192.168.100.1 192.168.100.1 0.0.0.0
*****MLT Configuration*****
Trunk Name Members Bpdu Mode Status
----- -------------------- ------------------- ------ ------ --------
1 Trunk #1 NONE All basic Disabled
2 Trunk #2 NONE All basic Disabled
3 Trunk #3 NONE All basic Disabled
4 Trunk #4 NONE All basic Disabled
5 Trunk #5 NONE All basic Disabled
6 Trunk #6 NONE All basic Disabled
*****VLAN Configuration*****
Id Name Type Protocol User PID Active Mgmt
--- -------------------- -------- ---------------- -------- ------ ----
1 VLAN #1 Port None 0x0000 Yes Yes
Port Members: 1-25
*****STP Configuration*****
Current STP Operation Mode: MSTP
Maximum Mst Instance Number: 8
Number of Msti Supported: 1
Cist Bridge Priority (hex): 8000
Stp Version: Mstp Mode
Cist Bridge Max Age: 20 seconds
Cist Bridge Forward Delay: 15 seconds
Tx Hold Count: 3
Path Cost Default Type: 32-bit
Max Hop Count: 2000

320985-A
Chapter 3 CLI Basics 141

Figure 33 show tech command output (continued)

VLAN members
------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
1

Msti Config Id Selector: 0


Msti Region Name: 00:0f:6a:7d:bb:e0
Msti Region Version: 0
Msti Config Digest:
AC:36:17:7F:50:28:3C:D4:B8:38:21:D8:AB:26:DE:62
Port Role State STP Status Oper Status
---- ---------- ---------- ---------- -----------
1 Root Forwarding Enabled Enabled
2 Disabled Discarding Enabled Disabled
3 Disabled Discarding Enabled Disabled
[...]
24 Designated Forwarding Enabled Enabled
25 Disabled Discarding Enabled Disabled
*****Port Interface*****
Status Auto Flow
Port Trunk Admin Oper Link LinkTrap Negotiation Speed Duplex Control
---- ----- ------- ---- ---- -------- ----------- -------- ------ -------
1 Enable Up Up Enabled Enabled 100Mbps Full
2 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
3 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
[...]
24 Enable Up Up Enabled Enabled 100Mbps Full
25 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
*****System Log*****
Type Time Idx Src Message
---- ----------------------------- ---- --- -------
S 00:00:00:00 1 NVR Base Unit changed
S 00:00:00:00 2 NVR #1 Reset initiated through telnet
by IP address: 11.127.249.74, access mode: no security
S 00:00:00:00 3 NVR SMGR event JOIN STACK

show stack-info command

The show stack-info is specific only to Ethernet Switch 425-24T and


425-48T in stacked mode. This command displays the current stack information,
which includes unit numbers, GBIC, and software version for all units.

System Configuration Guide


142 Chapter 3 CLI Basics

The syntax for the show stack-info command is:

show stack-info

The show stack-info command is in the privExec command mode.

The show stack-info command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 34 displays sample output from the show stack-info command.

Figure 34 show stack-info command output

425-24T(config)#show stack-info
Unit # Switch Model GBIC Port SW Version
------ ---------------- ----------- ------------
1 425-24T (1/25) SX v3.6.0
2 425-24T (2/25) None v3.6.0
425-24T(config)#

show stacking-mode command

The show stacking-mode command displays the current and next stacking
mode for the switch or stack.

The syntax for the show stacking-mode command is:

show stacking-mode

The show stacking-mode command is in the exec command mode.

The show stacking-mode command has no parameters or variables.

320985-A
Chapter 3 CLI Basics 143

Figure 35 displays sample output from the show stacking-mode command.

Figure 35 show stacking-mode command output

425-24T>show stacking-mode
Current mode for unit 1 is stackable, base unit set.
Next mode for unit 1 is stackable, base unit set.
Current mode for unit 2 is stackable, base unit not set.
Next mode for unit 3 is stackable, base unit not set.
Next mode will be applied after reset

renumber unit command

This command is applicable only to Ethernet Switch 425-24T, in its stacked


mode.

The renumber unit command changes the unit number of each switch in the
stack. The syntax for the renumber unit command is:

renumber unit

The renumber unit command is in the config command mode.

The renumber unit command has no parameters or variables.

Note: This command does not take effect until you reset the stack.

Managing MAC address forwarding database table


This section describes the commands to view the contents of the MAC address
forwarding database table, as well as setting the age-out time for the addresses.
The following topics are covered:

show mac-address-table command on page 144


mac-address-table aging-time command on page 145
default mac-address-table aging-time command on page 146

System Configuration Guide


144 Chapter 3 CLI Basics

show mac-address-table command

The show mac-address-table command displays the current contents of the


MAC address forwarding database table. The syntax for the show
mac-address-table command is:

show mac-address-table [vid <1-4094>] [aging-time]


[address <H.H.H>] [port <LINE>] [include/exclude <pattern>]

The show mac-address-table command is in the privExec command mode.

Table 26 describes the parameters and variables for the show


mac-address-table command.

Table 26 show mac-address-table command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

vid <1-4094> Enter the number of the VLAN you want to display the
forwarding database.
Default is to display the management VLANs database.
aging-time Displays the time in seconds after which an unused entry is
removed from the forwarding database.
address <H.H.H> Displays a specific MAC address if it exists in the database.
Enter the MAC address you want displayed.
port <LINE> List of ports.
include/exclude Allows you to filter the results of the command by printing
<pattern> only those entries in the address table that include or exclude
a given pattern. The value for <pattern> must be a sequence
of 1 to 6 bytes in hex, separated by dashes.
for example: show mac-address-table
port 1/1-5 address include 00-0E-45-23

320985-A
Chapter 3 CLI Basics 145

Figure 36 displays sample output from the show mac-address-table


command.

Figure 36 show mac-address-table command output

425-48T(config)#show mac-address-table
Mac Address Table Aging Time: 400
Number of addresses: 13

MAC Address Source MAC Address Source


----------------- -------- ----------------- --------
00-00-81-9B-12-78 Trunk: 3 00-00-E2-13-38-38 Trunk: 3
00-00-E2-1F-9D-0D Trunk: 3 00-04-DC-6F-43-F4 Trunk: 3
00-09-97-89-82-C1 Trunk: 3 00-0C-F8-1A-0F-F8 Trunk: 3
00-0C-F8-61-00-01 Trunk: 3 00-0F-3D-E5-28-01 Trunk: 3
00-0F-6A-82-2E-C1 Trunk: 3 00-0F-6A-82-36-21 Trunk: 3
00-0F-CD-BF-1E-80 00-80-2D-6E-47-38 Trunk: 3
00-80-2D-6E-47-82 Trunk: 3 08-00-20-9F-F3-2C Trunk: 3
425-48T(config)#

mac-address-table aging-time command

The mac-address-table aging-time command sets the time that the switch
retains unseen MAC addresses. The syntax for the mac-address-table
aging-time command is:

mac-address-table aging-time <time>

The mac-address-table aging-time command is in the config command


mode.

Table 27 describes the parameters and variables for the mac-address-table


aging-time command.

Table 27 mac-address-table aging-time command parameters and variables

Parameters
and Description
variables

time Enter the aging time in seconds that you want for MAC
addresses before they are flushed.

System Configuration Guide


146 Chapter 3 CLI Basics

Figure 37 displays sample output from the mac-address-table aging-time


command.

Figure 37 mac-address-table aging-time output

425-48T(config)#mac-address-table aging-time 400


425-48T(config)#

default mac-address-table aging-time command

The default mac-address-table aging-time command sets the time that


the switch retains unseen MAC addresses to 300 seconds. The syntax for the
default mac-address-table aging-time command is:

default mac-address aging-time

The default mac-address-table aging-time command is in the config


command mode.

The default mac-address-table aging-time command has no parameters


or variables.

320985-A
147

Chapter 4
Getting Started with Device Manager

The Java Device Manager (JDM) software is a Graphical User Interface (GUI)
that allows you to manage a standalone switch or a stack. JDM (also referred to as
Device Manager) provides options found in other management tools such as
management of VLANs and MultiLink Trunks, and displaying and printing of
statistics in graph format.

To use Device Manager, you must have network connectivity to a management


station running Device Manager on one of the supported platforms. You must also
assign an IP address to the switch or stack.

This chapter contains information on the following topics:

Installing Device Manager


Device Manager basics on page 171

Installing Device Manager


The JDM software is provided on the device software CD as a self-extracting
executable file, and is also available from the Nortel web site. This chapter
provides instructions for installing the JDM software in a Windows*, UNIX*, or
Linux* environment.

The Java Runtime Environment (JRE) is bundled with the JDM software and does
not require a separate installation.

For details on installing JDM, refer to the following sections:

JDM installation precautions on page 148


Installing the Device Manager software on page 149

System Configuration Guide


148 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

Installing JDM on Windows on page 149


Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux on page 159
Starting Device Manager on page 171

JDM installation precautions


The following warnings apply to Device Manager on all operating environments:

The JDM and Ethernet Switch software versions must match for the correct
dialog boxes and information to be shown and accessible. Please refer to the
Release Notes for a complete compatibility list.
If you want to use JDM to support multiple Nortel switches in your network,
ensure that the JDM version you use supports each version of software
running on each Nortel device in your network.
Prior to upgrading JDM, either uninstall your previous version of the Device
Manager software, or install the new software to a different directory. (You
can have multiple versions of Device Manager stored on your Windows,
UNIX, or Linux machine, provided that each version is stored in a separate
directory.)

Note: Do not install the JDM to a directory where a previous version of


Device Manager software already exists.

JDM saves the IP addresses that are visited to a settings file. A JDM uninstall
operation does not remove this settings file.
In a Windows environment, the settings file is dm.ini, and is created in the
JDM install directory.
In a UNIX environment, the settings file is ~/.jdm/dm.ini.
In a Linux environment, the settings file is ~/.jdm/dm.ini.
The dm.ini file containing IP addresses visited from a previous JDM version
is automatically used by a new JDM version installed in the same directory.
You must manually move or copy the dm.ini file from a previous version of
JDM to a new JDM installation in a different directory.

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 149

Installing the Device Manager software


Device Manager software can be installed in Windows, UNIX, or Linux
environment. The following sections provide information on the system
requirements and installation procedures to install Device Manager software in
Windows, UNIX, and Linux environments.

Installing JDM on Windows


Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux on page 159

Installing JDM on Windows


This section includes the following topics:

Windows minimum requirements


Removing previous versions of JDM on Windows on page 150
Installing JDM on Windows from the CD on page 150
Installing JDM on Windows from the web on page 151
Executing the JDM installation software on Windows on page 152

Windows minimum requirements

The minimum system requirements for installing JDM on Microsoft*


Windows NT*, Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000, or Windows XP are:

350 MHz or higher Pentium processor


256 MB DRAM
300 MB space on hard drive

System Configuration Guide


150 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

Removing previous versions of JDM on Windows

Note: Removing previous versions of JDM is an optional process. Multiple


versions of JDM can exist on one system, as long as each version is in a
separate location.
If you decide to allow previous versions of JDM to remain, then you must
choose a different folder to use during the installation process.

Remove existing versions of Device Manager software by using the Uninstall DM


option that was created in the Windows Start menu during installation.

For example, to remove Device Manager from a Windows XP system using the
default program group, choose the following option from the Windows Start
menu: All Programs>Nortel>Java Device Manager>Uninstall DM.

If no program group was added to the Windows Start menu during installation,
then complete the following steps to remove existing Device Manager software:

1 Navigate to the folder where the JDM software is installed.


2 Open the UninstallerData sub-folder.
3 Run the following file: Uninstall Java Device Manager.exe.

Note: If more than one version of Device Manager software is installed,


ensure you select the correct software to uninstall.

Installing JDM on Windows from the CD

To access the JDM software from the installation CD:

1 Close all programs.


2 Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3 From the Windows Start menu, choose Run.
The Run dialog box opens.
4 Use Browse to navigate to the drive where the CD-ROM is located.

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 151

5 On the CD-ROM drive, locate the \Windows\Device Manager subdirectory.


6 Double-click the jdm_xxxx.exe file.

Note: In the file name, xxxx represents the current version of the JDM
software.

Continue with Executing the JDM installation software on Windows on


page 152.

Installing JDM on Windows from the web

To obtain the JDM software from the Nortel web site:

1 Go to the following URL:


http://www.nortel.com/support
2 Select the software support page for your product.
The software page opens.
3 Click the Java Device Manager version you want.
The Software Detail Information page opens.
4 Download the JDM software for Windows to a desired directory on your
system. The software download is a self-extracting .exe file.
Once the file transfer is complete, continue with step 5.
5 Close all programs.
6 Navigate to the directory on your system where you downloaded the JDM
Software.
7 Double-click the jdm_xxxx.exe file.

Note: In the file name, xxxx represents the current version of the JDM
software.

Continue with Executing the JDM installation software on Windows on


page 152.

System Configuration Guide


152 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

Executing the JDM installation software on Windows

An install screen opens, followed by a Nortel dialog box. When the


InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box appears (Figure 38), you are ready to
install the JDM.

Figure 38 InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box

1 Click Next to begin the installation process.


The License Agreement dialog box opens.

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 153

2 Click I accept the terms of the License Agreement (Figure 39).

Figure 39 License Agreement dialog box

3 Click Next.
The Choose Install Set dialog box opens (Figure 40).

Figure 40 Choose Install Set dialog box

System Configuration Guide


154 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

4 Do one of the following:


Select Typical installation to install the common set features, as well as
online help.
Select Minimal installation to select minimal features to install
(recommended for those with limited disk space).
Select Help to install only the online help.
Select Custom installation to customize the features prior to installation.
5 Click Next.
If you did not select Custom installation in step 4, then the Choose Install
Folder dialog box opens. Continue with step 8 on page 155.
If you selected Custom installation in step 4, then the Feature Sets dialog
box opens (Figure 41).

Figure 41 Feature Sets dialog box

6 Select which features to install from the feature sets list.

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 155

7 Click Next.
The Choose Install Folder dialog box opens (Figure 42).

Figure 42 Choose Install Folder dialog box

8 Click Restore Default Folder to use the default location for JDM, or click
Choose to select a different storage path.

Note: If Device Manager is already installed on your computer, you must


choose a storage path that does not conflict with the already existing version.

System Configuration Guide


156 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

9 Click Next.
The Choose Shortcut Folder dialog box opens (Figure 43).

Figure 43 Choose Shortcut Folder dialog box

10 Select the desired shortcut path from the list provided.


11 Click Next.

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 157

The Pre-Installation Summary dialog box opens (Figure 44). A summary of


the choices you have made is displayed for confirmation.

Figure 44 Pre-Installation Summary dialog box

12 Verify the folder, shortcut, and disk space required to install the software. If
necessary, click Previous to return to the appropriate dialog box and make
changes.

System Configuration Guide


158 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

13 Click Install.
The installation process begins. When the installation is complete, the Install
Complete dialog box opens (Figure 45).

Figure 45 Install Complete dialog box

14 Click Done to exit the installation.


JDM is now installed on your machine.

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 159

Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux


Note: JDM installation procedures are standardized across all platforms. In
addition, the required Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.4.1 is part of
the JDM installation package and does not require a separate installation. The
bundled JRE is used with this JDM only, and does not affect other Java
applications on the same system.

Note: With Solaris and HP-UX, certain OS patches are required for JRE and
JDM to function properly. Please consult SUN or HP to install the appropriate
OS patches before launching JDM.

Note: UNIX and Linux systems are case-sensitive. Use lower-case to specify
file names, and check to ensure that directories are entered correctly.

This section includes the following topics:

Minimum requirements on page 160


Installing JDM on Linux from the CD on page 161
Installing JDM on Solaris from the CD on page 160
Installing JDM on HP-UX from the CD on page 160
Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux from the web on page 161

System Configuration Guide


160 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

Minimum requirements

JDM supports two UNIX platforms and one Linux platform:

a UNIX SPARC* workstation running the Sun* Solaris* 2.7.x (or higher)
an HP* workstation running the HP-UX* 11.x operating system (or higher)
a PC running Linux Kernel 2.2 operating system (or higher)

The minimum system requirements for installing JDM on any UNIX or Linux
platform are:

4 MB available in a temporary directory


300 MB free in the directory where you want to install the JDM software
128 MB DRAM

Installing JDM on Solaris from the CD

To install the JDM software to a Solaris environment from the CD:

1 Close all programs.


2 Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3 Navigate to the Solaris/JDM subdirectory on the software CD.
4 Run the dm_xxxx_solaris_sparc.sh file.
Continue with Executing the JDM installation software on UNIX or Linux
on page 163.

Installing JDM on HP-UX from the CD


To install the JDM software to a HP-UX environment from the CD, follow these
steps with the exact syntax:

1 Close all programs.


2 Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3 Navigate to the HP-UX/JDM subdirectory on the software CD.

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 161

4 Run the jdm_xxxx_hpux_pa-risc.sh file.


Continue with Executing the JDM installation software on UNIX or Linux
on page 163.

Installing JDM on Linux from the CD


To install the Device Manager software to a Linux environment from the CD:

1 Close all programs.


2 Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3 Navigate to the Linux/JDM subdirectory on the software CD.
4 Run the jdm_xxxx_linux.sh file.
Continue with Executing the JDM installation software on UNIX or Linux
on page 163.

Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux from the web

To install the JDM software to a UNIX (Solaris or HP-UX) environment from the
web:

1 Go to the following URL:


http://www.nortel.com/support
2 Select the software support page for your product.
The software page opens.
3 Click the Java Device Manager version you want.
The Software Detail Information page opens.
4 Download the JDM software for your operating environment to a desired
directory on your system. The software download is a self-extracting .sh file.
Once the file transfer is complete, continue with step 5.
5 Close all programs.
6 Navigate to the directory on your system where you loaded the JDM software.

System Configuration Guide


162 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

7 Make the installation file executable.


For the Solaris environment, make the file executable by entering:
chmod a+x dm_xxxx_solaris_sparc.sh
For the HP-UX environment, make the file executable by entering:
chmod a+x jdm_xxxx_hpux_pa-risc.sh
For the Linux environment, make the file executable by entering:
chmod a+x jdm_xxxx_linux.sh
8 Run the installation file.
For the Solaris environment, run the dm_xxxx_solaris_sparc.sh file.
For the HP-UX environment, run the jdm_xxxx_hpux_pa-risc.sh file.
For the Linux environment, run the jdm_xxxx_linux.sh file.
Continue with Executing the JDM installation software on UNIX or Linux
on page 163.

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 163

Executing the JDM installation software on UNIX or Linux

An install screen opens, followed by a Nortel dialog box. When the


InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box appears (Figure 46), you are ready to
begin the JDM installation.

Figure 46 InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box

System Configuration Guide


164 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

1 Click Next to continue the installation process.


The License Agreement dialog box opens (Figure 47).

Figure 47 License Agreement dialog box

2 Click I accept the terms of the License Agreement.

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 165

3 Click Next.
The Choose Install Set dialog box opens (Figure 48).

Figure 48 Choose Install Set dialog box

4 Do one of the following:


Select Typical installation to install the common set features, as well as
online help.
Select Minimal installation to select minimal features to install
(recommended for those with limited disk space).
Select Help to install only the online help.
Select Custom installation to customize the features prior to installation.

System Configuration Guide


166 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

5 Click Next.
If you did not select Custom installation in step 4, then the Choose Install
Folder dialog box opens. Continue with step 8 on page 167.
If you selected Custom installation in step 4, then the Feature Sets dialog
box opens (Figure 49).

Figure 49 Feature Sets dialog box

6 Select which features to install from the feature sets list.


7 Click Next.
The Choose Install Folder dialog box opens (Figure 50).

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 167

Figure 50 Choose Install Folder dialog box

8 Click Restore Default Folder to use the default location for JDM, or click
Choose to select a storage path.

Note: If Device Manager is already installed on your computer, you must


choose a storage path that does not conflict with the already existing version.

System Configuration Guide


168 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

9 Click Next.
The Pre-Installation Summary dialog box opens (Figure 51).

Figure 51 Pre-Installation Summary dialog box

10 Verify the folder and disk space required to install the software. If necessary,
click Previous to return to the appropriate dialog box and make changes.

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 169

11 Click Install.
The installation process begins (Figure 52).

Figure 52 Installing Java Device Manager dialog box

System Configuration Guide


170 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

When the installation is complete, the Install Complete dialog box opens
(Figure 53).

Figure 53 Install Complete dialog box

12 Click Done to exit the installation.


JDM is now installed on your machine.

Removing JDM in Unix or Linux environments

In a UNIX or Linux environment, complete the following steps to remove the


existing JDM software:

1 Navigate to the directory where the JDM software is installed (for example
/JDM).
2 Open the UninstallerData sub-directory.
3 Run the following file: Uninstall_Java_Device_Manager.

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 171

Device Manager basics


This section describes basic procedures for using the Device Manager software.
The section includes the following information:

Starting Device Manager


Setting the Device Manager properties on page 172
Opening a device on page 174
Device Manager window on page 177
Editing objects on page 186
Working with statistics and graphs on page 186
Telnet session on page 193
Opening an SSH connection to the device on page 194
Opening the Web-based management home page on page 194
Trap log on page 195
Online Help on page 196

Starting Device Manager


Do one of the following, depending upon your operating system environment:

In a Microsoft* Windows* environment, choose All Programs > Nortel >


Java Device Manager > DM from the Windows Start menu.
In a UNIX environment, verify that the Device Manager installation
directory is in your search path; then enter:
./JDM
The initial Device Manager window opens (Figure 54).

Note: On startup, the Device Manager performs a DNS lookup for the
machine on which it is running. If the DNS lookup is slow or fails, the
initial Device Manager window may take up to 30 seconds to open.

System Configuration Guide


172 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

Figure 54 Device Manager window

Setting the Device Manager properties


The Device Manager communicates with the Ethernet Switch 325/425 using
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). The software is shipped with
default values set for important communication parameters, such as the polling
interval, timeout, and retry count. You can set the parameters before you open a
device to manage.

To set the Device Manager properties:

1 Choose Device > Properties.


The Properties dialog box opens (Figure 55).

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 173

Figure 55 Properties dialog box

2 Type information and select check boxes.


3 Click OK.

Table 28 describes the Properties dialog box fields.

Table 28 Properties dialog box fields

Area Field Description

Polling Status Interval Interval at which status information is gathered (default is 20


seconds). For a full stack, set this interval to 60 seconds.
(If Traps, Status Interval at which statistics and status information are gathered
Interval:) when traps are enabled. The default is 60.
Hotswap Detect every: The interval at which Device Manager detects the module
information. The default is 1 interval.
Enable Enables (true) or disables (false) periodic polling of the device
for updated status. If polling is disabled, the chassis status is
updated only when you click Refresh on the Chassis tab.

System Configuration Guide


174 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

Table 28 Properties dialog box fields (continued)

Area Field Description

SNMP Retry Count Number of times Device Manager sends the same polling
request if a response is not returned to Device Manager.
You may want to set this field to three or four.
Timeout Length of each retry of each polling waiting period. When you
access the device through a slow link, you may want to increase
the timeout interval and then change the Retransmission
Strategy to superlinear.
Trace The trace field is used to enable and disable SNMP tracing.
When Trace is selected, SNMP protocol data units (PDUs) are
displayed in the Device > Log dialog box.
Register for Traps When selected (enabled), automatically registers to received
traps when Device Manager is launched against a device. This
attribute does not apply to Ethernet Switch 325/425.
Listen for Traps When selected (enabled), Device Manager will listen for traps
from the device.
Max Traps in Log The specified number of traps that may exist in the trap log. The
default is 500.
Trap Port Specifies the UDP port that Device Manager will listen to receive
SNMP traps.
Listen for Syslogs When selected (enabled), Device Manager will listen to the
syslog.
Confirm row deletion A dialog box displays when checked, before deleting a row.
Default Read Specifies the default read community.
Community
Default Write Specifies the default write community.
Community

Opening a device
Opening a device displays the device view, a picture of the device. To open the
device view, you must enter community strings that determine the access level
granted to the device.

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 175

Table 29 describes the default access community strings for the Device Manager
software.

Table 29 SNMP community string default values

Access level Description

Read-only public
Read/write private

To display the device view:

1 Do one of the following:


Choose Device > Open.
Choose Device > Open Last, and select an IP address from the list.
Click the folder icon in the Device Manager window.

Press Ctrl+O.
The Open Device dialog box opens (Figure 56).

Figure 56 Open Device dialog box

System Configuration Guide


176 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

Table 30 describes the Open Device dialog box fields.

Table 30 Open Device dialog box fields

Field Description

Device Name Either an IP address or a DNS name for the device, entered by
the user.
Read Community SNMP read community string for the device. Default is public
(displayed as ******). The entry is case-sensitive.
Write Community SNMP write community string for the device. Default is
private (displayed as *******).The entry is case-sensitive.
v3 Enabled When selected (enabled), Open Device dialog box will display
SNMPv3 options.
User Name Indicates the name of the user.
Authentication Identifies the authentication protocol used.
Protocol
Authentication Specifies the current authentication password.
Password
Privacy Protocol Identifies the privacy protocol.
Privacy Password Specifies the current privacy password.

2 In the Device Name text box, type the DNS name or IP address of the device.
3 In the Read Community and Write Community text boxes, type the
appropriate community strings.

Note: To gain read/write access to a device in Device Manager, you


must enter the read/write community string for both the Read
Community and Write Community strings.

4 Click Open.
Device Manager automatically determines what version of software the
selected device is running and displays the appropriate Device Manager
dialog boxes.

The Device Manager window opens, showing a picture of the device


(Figure 57) that represents the physical features of the device.

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 177

Figure 57 Device view

Device Manager window


The Device Manager window (Figure 58) has the following parts:

Menu bar
Toolbar
Device view
Status bar

Figure 58 Parts of the Device Manager window

Menu bar
Toolbar

Device view

Status bar

Menu bar
Use the menu bar to set up and operate the Device Manager

System Configuration Guide


178 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

Table 31 describes the Menu Bar commands.

Table 31 Menu bar commands

Command Description

Device Opens the Open Device dialog box. It also allows you to:
Set the Properties used during a Device Manager session
Refresh the status of the currently viewed device
Rediscover device
Telnet to a device
Open an SSH connection to a device
View SNMP traps that the Device Manager receives
View Syslogs
View SNMP trace logs
Edit Opens edit dialog boxes for selected objects in the device view. This
command opens dialog boxes for managing files, running diagnostic
tests and configuring data for selected objects. This command also lets
you set security parameters, SNTP, and SNMP v3 related configurations.
Graph Opens statistics and graphing dialog boxes for the selected object.
VLAN Opens dialog boxes for managing VLANs, Spanning Tree Groups
(STGs), RSTP, MSTP, Multi-Link Trunks and Link Aggregation Control
Protocol (LACP).
QoS Opens configuration dialog boxes for Quality of Service (QoS) and
DSCP.
RMON Opens RMON configuration and monitoring dialog boxes.
Actions Provides quick access to the Web Management Software Home page.
Help Opens online Help topics for Device Manager and provides a legend for
the port colors in the device view.

Toolbar
The toolbar contains buttons that provide quick access to commonly used
commands and some additional actions.

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 179

Table 32 describes the toolbar buttons.

Table 32 Toolbar buttons

Button Name Description Menu bar equivalent

Open Opens the Open Device dialog Device > Open


Device box.

Refresh Refreshes the device view Device > Refresh Status


Device information.
Status
Telnet Opens a Telnet session. Device > Telnet

SSH Opens an SSH session. Device > SSH


Connection

Trap Log Opens the trap log. Device > Trap Log

Help Opens online Help in a Web Help > Device


browser.

Edit Displays configuration data for Edit > Unit


Selected the selected chassis object.

Graph Opens statistics and graphing Graph > Port


Selected dialog boxes for the selected Graph > Chassis
object.
Home Page Opens the Web Management Actions > Open Home
Software Home Page. Page

Alarm Opens the Rmon Alarm Rmon > Alarm Manager


Manager Manager.

Device view
The device view allows you to determine at a glance the operating status of the
various units and ports in your hardware configuration. You can also use the
device view to perform management tasks on specific objects.

System Configuration Guide


180 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

Selecting objects

The types of objects contained in the device view are:

A standalone switch (called a unit in the menus and dialog boxes)


A switch stack (called a chassis in the menus and dialog boxes)
A port (including the SFP GBIC port)

Figure 59 shows the objects in the device view.

Figure 59 Objects in the device view


Port object

Unit or
Chassis
object

SFP GBIC Port object

Selecting a single object

To select a single object:

Click the edge of the object.

The object is outlined in yellow, indicating that it is selected. Subsequent


activities in Device Manager refer to the selected object.

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 181

Selecting multiple objects

For instructions on selecting multiple objects of the same type (such as ports or
switches of the same type), see Table 33:

Table 33 Selecting multiple objects

Object to be selected Action

To select a block of contiguous ports Drag to select the group of ports


To select multiple ports or switches in a stack Press Ctrl+left-click on the objects
To select all ports in a standalone switch or in a stack Choose Edit > Select > Ports
To select all the units (all switches in a stack) Choose Edit > Select > Units
To select an entire stack Choose Edit > Select > Chassis

Viewing information about a GBIC port

To view information about a GBIC port:

1 Select the GBIC.


2 Choose Edit > Port.

The Port dialog box opens with the Interface tab displayed (Figure 60).

The Interface tab describes the GBIC installed in the switch. (The Edit > Unit
dialog box describes the MDA installed in the switch.)

System Configuration Guide


182 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

Figure 60 Interface tab

LEDs and ports

The color of LEDs in the device view is the same as the colors of the LEDs on
the physical switch. However, the device view does not show blinking activity of
the LEDs.

For a full description of the LEDs for the Ethernet Switch 325/425, refer to
About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 on page 39.

The ports on the device view are color coded to show port status.

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 183

Table 34 describes the status assigned to each color.

Table 34 Port color codes

Color Description

Green Port is operating.


Red Port has been manually disabled.
Orange Port has no link.

In addition, the Help menu provides a legend that identifies the port colors and
their meanings (Figure 61).

Figure 61 Color port legend

Shortcut menus
Each object in the device view has a shortcut menu that opens when you
right-click a selected object. The switch unit shortcut menu (Figure 62) provides
access to basic hardware information about the switch and to the graphing dialog
boxes for the switch.

Figure 62 Switch unit shortcut menu

System Configuration Guide


184 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

Table 35 describes the Switch unit shortcut menu command on the switch unit
shortcut menu.

Table 35 Switch unit shortcut menu command

Command Description

Edit Opens a dialog box that provides basic hardware information


about the switch and allows you to set the Rate Limiting
configuration for the switch unit.
Show Port Tooltip Indicates that the tooltip function is active. When unchecked, the
tooltip function is disabled.
A Tooltip is a descriptive text box that appears when the mouse
pointer is held over a tool, button or other object.
Refresh Port Tooltip Refreshes the tooltip information.

The port shortcut menu (Figure 63) provides a faster path for editing and graphing
a single port; however, you can access the same options using the menu bar or the
toolbar.

Figure 63 Port shortcut menu

Table 36 describes the commands on the port shortcut menu.

Table 36 Port shortcut menu commands

Command Description

Edit Opens a dialog box that allows you to set operating parameters
for the port.
Graph Opens a dialog box that displays statistics for the port and
allows you to display the statistics as a graph.
Enable Administratively brings a port up.
Disable Administratively shuts down a port. The color of the port
changes to red in the device view.

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 185

Status bar

The status bar displays error and informational messages from the software
application. These messages are not related to the device being managed.

Using the buttons in Device Manager dialog boxes

Table 37 describes buttons in Device Manager dialog boxes.

Table 37 Device Manager buttons

Button Name Description

Insert Opens a dialog box to create a new entry for a table; then
from the dialog box, inserts the new entry in the table.
Copy Copies selected cells from a table.

Paste Pastes copied values to a currently selected table cell.

Reset Causes changed (but not applied) fields to revert to their


Changes previous values.

Print Table or Prints the table or graph that is displayed.


Print Graph

Stop/Refresh Stops the current action (compiling, saving, and so forth).


If you are updating or compiling a large data table, the
Refresh button changes to a Stop button while this action
is taking place. Clicking the Stop button interrupts the
polling process.
Export Data Exports information to a file you specify. You can then
import this file into a text editor or spreadsheet for further
analysis.

Note: Not all buttons appear in all the dialog boxes.

System Configuration Guide


186 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

Editing objects
You can edit objects and values in the Device Manager device view in the
following ways:

Select an object on the toolbar, click the Edit Selected button.

The Edit dialog box opens for that object.


From a switch or port shortcut menu, choose Edit. The Edit dialog box opens
for that object.

When you change the value in a box, the changed value is displayed in bold.
However, changes are not applied to the running configuration until you click
Apply.

Note: Many dialog boxes contain a Refresh button. After you apply
changes to fields, click Refresh to display the new information in the
dialog box.

Working with statistics and graphs


Device Manager tracks a wide range of statistics for the stack (chassis), and each
port. You can view and graph statistics for a single object or multiple objects. For
information about the statistics tracked for the switch and ports, refer to Statistics
for single and multiple objects on page 190 and to the System Monitoring Guide
for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A).

This section describes the types of statistics and graphs available, the graph dialog
boxes, and the procedure for creating a graph.

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 187

Types of statistics

The data tables in the statistics dialog boxes list the counters, or categories of
statistics being gathered, for the specified object. For example, the categories for
ports include Interface, Ethernet Errors, Bridge, and Rmon. Each category can be
associated with six types of statistics.

Table 38 describes the types of statistics that are available.

Table 38 Types of statistics

Statistic Description

AbsoluteValue The total count since the last time counters were reset. A system
reboot resets all counters.
Cumulative The total count since the statistics window was first opened. The
elapsed time for the cumulative counter is displayed at the bottom of
the graph window.
Average The cumulative count divided by the cumulative elapsed time.
Minimum The minimum average for the counter for a given polling interval over
the cumulative elapsed time.
Maximum The maximum average for the counter for a given polling interval over
the cumulative elapsed time.
LastValue The average for the counter over the last polling interval.

Types of graphs

With Device Manager, you can create line, area, bar, and pie graphs. Figure 64,
Figure 65, Figure 66, and Figure 67 provide examples of different types of graphs.

System Configuration Guide


188 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

Figure 64 Line graph

Figure 65 Area graph

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 189

Figure 66 Bar graph

Figure 67 Pie graph

System Configuration Guide


190 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

Statistics for single and multiple objects

Statistics for a selected object or objects are displayed in the statistics dialog box.

The dialog box for a single object shows all six types of statistics for each counter
(Figure 68).

Figure 68 Interface statistics for a single port

The statistics dialog box for multiple objects shows a single type of statistics
(Table 38 on page 187) for the selected objects. For example, Figure 69 shows
LastValue statistics for the selected ports.

Figure 69 Interface statistics for multiple ports

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 191

To change the type of statistics displayed, select a different type from the show
list at the bottom of the dialog box.

The statistics are updated based on the poll interval shown at the bottom of the
dialog box. You can select a different polling interval.

Buttons for bar, pie, and line graphs are located at the bottom of a statistics dialog
box.

See the next section, Viewing statistics as graphs, for instructions to use these
buttons.

You can export the statistics to a tab-separated file format and import the file into
other applications. To export the information, use the Export Data button below
the table.

Viewing statistics as graphs

To create a graph for an object:

1 Select the object or objects to be graphed.


See Selecting objects on page 180.

2 Do one of the following:


On the toolbar, click Graph Selected.

From the shortcut menu for the object, choose Graph.


From the main menu, choose Graph > Chassis or Graph > Port.
A statistics dialog box opens with tabs for different categories of statistics for
the selected object (Figure 70).

System Configuration Guide


192 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

Figure 70 Statistics dialog box for a port

3 Select a tab for the group of statistics you want to view.


4 On the displayed data table, click and drag to select the cells you want to
graph. (They must be in the same row or column.)
5 Click one of the graph buttons at the bottom of the dialog box
See Types of graphs on page 187.

A graph dialog box opens for the selected graph type.

6 To print a copy of the graph, click Print.

Buttons at the top of the graph dialog boxes for line, area, and bar graphs allow
you to change the orientation of the graph, change the scale, or change the graph
type.

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 193

Table 39 describes the buttons in the graph dialog boxes.

Table 39 Graph dialog box buttons

Button Name Description

Stacked Stacks data quantities instead of displaying them


side-by-side.

Horizontal Rotates the graph 90 degrees.

Log Scale Changes the scale of the x-axis (of an unrotated graph)
from numeric to logarithmic.

Line Chart Converts an area graph or bar graph to a line graph.

Area Chart Converts a line graph or bar graph to an area graph.

Bar Chart Converts a line graph or area graph to a bar graph.

Pie Chart Converts a line graph or area graph to a pie chart.

Telnet session
From Device Manager, you can initiate a Telnet session to the console interface
for the switch or stack you are currently accessing.

To Telnet to a switch:

Do one of the following:

From the Device Manager main menu, choose Device> Telnet.


On the toolbar, click the Telnet button.

System Configuration Guide


194 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

A Telnet window to the switch opens.

Opening an SSH connection to the device


From Device Manager, you can initiate a Secure Shell (SSH) connection to the
Console Interface for the switch or stack you are currently accessing.

To open an SSH connection to a device:

Do one of the following:

From the Device Manager main menu, choose Device > SSH
Connection.
On the toolbar, click the SSH button.

An SSH window to the device opens.

Note: The SSH connection is established only when the device is SSH
capable and enabled. For more information on SSH connections, refer to
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).

Opening the Web-based management home page


From the Device Manager, you can access the Web-based management home
page.

To open the Web-based management home page:

Do one of the following:

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 195

From the Device Manager main menu, choose Actions > Open Home
Page.
On the toolbar, click the Open Home Page button.

The Web-based management home page opens (Figure 71).

Figure 71 Web-based management home page

Trap log
You can configure an Ethernet Switch 325/425 to send SNMP generic traps.
When the Device Manager is running, any traps received are recorded in the trap
log. You set the maximum number of entries in the trap log using the Properties
dialog box (Figure 55 on page 173). The default number of trap log entries is 500.

To view the trap log:

Do one of the following:

System Configuration Guide


196 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

On the toolbar, click the Trap Log button.

From the Device Manager Main Menu, choose Device > Trap Log.

Note: When you operate Device Manager from a UNIX platform, you
must be logged in as root in order to receive traps.

Device Manager receives traps on port 162. If this port is being used by another
application, you will not be able to view the trap log until the other application is
disabled and Device Manager is restarted.

By default, traps are sent in SNMP V2c format. However, if you are using an
older network management system (NMS), one that supports only SNMP V1
traps (HP OpenView), you can specify the traps to be sent in V1 format.

For more information about traps and trap receivers, refer to Configuring and
Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A).

Online Help
Online Help in Device Manager is context-sensitive. You use a Web browser to
display online Help. The Web browser should launch automatically when you
click the Help button. If the Help topic you are accessing is not displayed in your
browser, exit the existing browser session and click the Help button again.

If the Web browser does not launch, the default locations of the Help files are the
directories listed below.

320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 197

Table 40 describes the Help file locations.

Table 40 Help file locations

Platform Default path

Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT, <JDM Installation directory>/help/


Windows 2000, Windows XP hummingbird/v360.zip.
After you unzip the file, <JDM Installation
directory>/help/ hummingbird/v360/help.html.
help.html is the home page for the online help.
UNIX <JDM Installation directory>/help/
hummingbird/v360.zip.
After you unzip the file, <JDM Installation
directory>/help/ hummingbird/v360/help.html.
help.html is the home page for the online help.

System Configuration Guide


198 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager

320985-A
199

Chapter 5
Using the Web-based management interface

This chapter describes the requirements for using the Web-based management
interface and how to use it as a tool to configure your Ethernet Switch 325/425.

Requirements
To use the Web-based management interface, you need the following items:

A computer connected to a network port that is a member of the management


VLAN
One of the following Web browsers installed on the computer:
Microsoft* Internet Explorer, version 4.0 or later on Windows 95,
Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows NT*, or Windows XP*
Netscape Navigator*, version 4.51 or later on Windows 95, Windows 98,
Windows 2000, Windows NT, Windows XP, and UNIX*
IP address of the Ethernet Switch 325/425

Note: The Web pages of the Web-based management interface may load
at different speeds depending on the Web browser you use.

Note: In order to use the Ethernet Switch 325/425 Web-based


management functionality, such as downloading software, you must
connect your TFTP server to an Ethernet Switch 325/425.

For instructions to set the IP address of the switch, refer to IP Configuration/


Setup screen on page 214.

System Configuration Guide


200 Chapter 5 Using the Web-based management interface

Access to the Web management interface must also be enabled for the switch (the
default setting) using the Console Interface. For information about enabling Web
access, refer to TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen on
page 234.

Logging in to the Web-based management interface


Before you log in to the Web-based management interface, use the console
interface to verify the VLAN port assignments and to ensure that your switch
CPU and computer are assigned to the same VLAN. If the devices are not
connected to the same VLAN, the IP address will not display the home page.

To log in to the Web-based management interface:

1 Start your Web browser.


2 In the address bar, type the IP address for your host switch, for example,
http://192.168.151.175, and press Enter.
The home page opens (Figure 72).

Figure 72 Web-based management interface home page

320985-A
Chapter 5 Using the Web-based management interface 201

Network security does not exist the first time you access the Embedded Web
Server. The system administrator must create access parameters and passwords to
protect the integrity of your network configuration(s). For more information, refer
to Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).

Menu

The menu (Figure 73) is the same for all pages. It contains a list of seven main
headings.

Figure 73 Menu

To navigate the Web-based management interface menu, click a menu title and
then click one of its options. When you click an option, the corresponding page
opens.

The first six headings provide options for viewing and configuring switch
parameters. The Support heading provides options to open the online Help file and
the Nortel Web site.

System Configuration Guide


202 Chapter 5 Using the Web-based management interface

Table 41 lists the main headings in the Web-based management user interface and
their associated options.

Table 41 Main headings and options

Main menu titles Option

Summary Stack Information (stack mode only)


Switch Information
Identify Unit Numbers (stack mode only)
Stack Numbering (stack mode only)
Configuration IP
System
SNMPv1
SNMPv3
SNMP Trap
MAC Address Table
Find MAC Address
Port Management
High Speed Flow Control
Software Download
ASCII Config Download
Configuration File
Console/Comm Port
Fault RMON Threshold
RMON Event Log
System Log
Statistics Port
Interface
Ethernet Errors
Transparent Bridging
RMON Ethernet
RMON History
Application Port Mirroring
Rate Limiting
MAC Address Security
VLAN
Spanning Tree
Multilink Trunk
LACP
QoS

320985-A
Chapter 5 Using the Web-based management interface 203

Table 41 Main headings and options (continued)

Main menu titles Option

Administration System Information


Quick Start
Security
Logout
Reset
Reset to Defaults
Support Help
Release Notes
Manuals
Upgrade

Tools are provided in the menu to assist you in navigating the Web-based
management interface.

Caution: Web browser capabilities such as page bookmarking, refresh,


and page forward and page back, function as they would in any other
Web site. However, these capabilities do not enhance the functionality of
the Web-based management interface. Nortel recommends that you use
only the navigation tools provided in the management interface.

Table 42 describes the icons that appear on the menu.

Table 42 Menu icons

Button or icon Description

This icon identifies a menu title. Click on this icon to display its
options.
This icon identifies a menu title option. Click on this icon to display
the corresponding page.
This icon identifies a menu title option with a hyperlink to related
pages.
This icon is linked to an action, for example, logout, reset, or reset
to system defaults.
Clicking on the Nortel logo opens the corporate home page in a
new Web browser.

System Configuration Guide


204 Chapter 5 Using the Web-based management interface

Management page

When you click a menu option, the corresponding management page opens.
Figure 74 shows the page displayed for the Administration > Security >
Console option.

Figure 74 Console page

Note: The Console Stack Password Setting section is active only


when the switch is in the stack mode.

A page is composed of one or more of the following elements:

Tables and input forms


The gray cells in a page are display only, and white cells are input fields.
Check boxes
You enable or disable a selection by clicking a check box. When a check mark
is displayed in the box, that selection is enabled. You disable a selection by
clicking the checked box.

320985-A
Chapter 5 Using the Web-based management interface 205

Icons and buttons


Icons and buttons perform an action concerning the displayed page or the
switch. Some pages include a button that opens another page or updates the
values shown on the current page. Some pages include icons that initiate an
action, such as reformatting the current displayed data as a bar or pie chart.

Table 43 describes the icons that you use to modify information in a statistical
table.

Table 43 Page icons

Icon Name Description

Modify Accesses a modification page for the selected row.

View Accesses a view only statistics page for the selected row.

Delete Deletes a row.

Help Accesses the Help menu in a new Web browser.

Note: Text within a table that is underlined and highlighted in


blue and is a hyperlink to a related management page.

Viewing summary information


This section contains information on the following topics:

Viewing summary switch information


Viewing stack information on page 207
Changing stack numbering on page 209
Identifying unit numbers on page 211

System Configuration Guide


206 Chapter 5 Using the Web-based management interface

Viewing summary switch information

You can view summary information about the switch. For example, the unit
number and its corresponding physical description and serial number.

To view summary switch information:

From the main menu, choose Summary > Switch Information.

The Switch Information page opens (Figure 75).

Figure 75 Switch Information page

Table 44 describes the fields on the Switch Information page.

Table 44 Switch Information page fields

Item Description

Module Description The factory set description of the policy switch.


GBIC Description The factory set description of the sub-component/GBIC.
Firmware Version The firmware version of the policy switch.
Software Version The version of the running software.

320985-A
Chapter 5 Using the Web-based management interface 207

Table 44 Switch Information page fields

Item Description

Manufacturing Data The date of manufacture of the board in ASCII format.


Code
Hardware Version The hardware version of the policy switch.
Serial Number The serial number of the policy switch.
Operational State The current operational state of the device. The operational states are: Other, Not
Available, Removed, Disabled, Normal, Reset in Progress, Testing, Warning, Non
Fatal Errors, Fatal Error, and Not Configured.
Mac Address The mac address of the switch.
IP Address The IP address of the switch.
Power Status The power status of the switch.
Fans Status The fan status of the switch.

Viewing stack information

You can view a summary of your stack framework, for example, the current
version of the running software and the IP address of the Web-based management
interface.

Note: The Web-based management user interface automatically detects


the operational mode of your system. If the system is in standalone
mode, the Stack Information page is not an option listed in the menu.

To view stack information:

1 From the main menu, choose Summary > Stack Information.


The Stack Information page opens (Figure 76).

System Configuration Guide


208 Chapter 5 Using the Web-based management interface

Figure 76 Stack Information page

Table 45 describes the fields on the Stack Information and Stack Inventory
sections of the Stack Information page.

Table 45 Stack Information page fields

Section Field Description

Stack System Description The name created in the configuration process to identify the
Information stack.
Software Version The version of the running software.
MAC Address The MAC address of the stack.
IP Address The IP address of the stack.
Manufacturing Date The date of manufacture of the board in ASCII format:
Code YYYYMMDD.
Serial Number The serial number of the base unit.
Operational State The current operational state of the device. The operational
states are: Other, Not Available, Removed, Disabled, Normal,
Reset in Progress, Testing, Warning, Non Fatal Errors, Fatal
Error, and Not Configured

320985-A
Chapter 5 Using the Web-based management interface 209

Table 45 Stack Information page fields (continued)

Section Field Description

Stack Inventory Unit The unit number assigned to the device by the network
manager.
For more information on stack numbering, see page 209.
Description The description of the device or its subcomponent.
Operational State The current operational state of the stack. The operational states
are: Other, Not Available, Removed, Disabled, Normal, Reset in
Progress, Testing, Warning, Non Fatal Errors, Fatal Error, and
Not Configured.

2 In the lower-left corner of the Stack Information page, click the number of
the device you want to view.
The Stack Information page is updated with information about the selected
switch.

Changing stack numbering

If your system is set to stack operational mode, you can view existing stack
numbering information and renumber the devices in your stack framework.

To view or renumber devices within the stack framework:

Note: The unit number does not affect the base unit designation.

1 From the main menu, choose Summary > Stack Numbering.


The Stack Numbering page opens (Figure 77).

System Configuration Guide


210 Chapter 5 Using the Web-based management interface

Figure 77 Stack Numbering Setting page

Table 46 describes the fields on the Stack Numbering Setting page.

Table 46 Stack Numbering Setting page fields

Item Range Description

Current Unit Number 1..8 Unit number previously assigned to the policy switch. The
entries in this column are displayed in the order of their current
physical cabling with respect to the base unit, and can show
nonconsecutive unit numbering if one or more units were
previously moved or modified. The entries can also include
unit numbers of units that are no longer participating in the
stack (not currently active).
MAC Address XX.XX.XX.XX.XX.XX MAC address of the corresponding unit listed in the Current
Unit Number field.
New Unit Number 1..8 Choose a new number from the list to assign to your selected
policy switch.

2 Click Submit.
A message opens prompting you to confirm your request.

3 Do one of the following:


Click OK to renumber the stack.
Click Cancel to return to the Stack Numbering page without making
changes.

320985-A
Chapter 5 Using the Web-based management interface 211

Identifying unit numbers

You can identify unit numbers of the switches participating in a stack


configuration by viewing the active LEDs on the front panel of each switch.

To identify unit numbers in your configuration:

1 From the main menu, choose Summary > Identify Unit Numbers.
The Identify Unit Numbers page opens (Figure 78).

Figure 78 Identify Unit Numbers page

2 To continue viewing summary information or to start the configuration


process, choose another option from the main menu.

System Configuration Guide


212 Chapter 5 Using the Web-based management interface

320985-A
213

Chapter 6
System configuration using the Console Interface

This chapter describes how to configure and manage the Ethernet Switch 325/425
using the menu-driven Console Interface (CI).

This chapter covers the following topics:

IP Configuration/Setup screen
SNMP Configuration screen
System Characteristics screen on page 221
Console/Comm Port Configuration screen on page 223
Logging in on page 231
Renumber Stack Units screen on page 232
Hardware Unit Information screen on page 233
TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen on page 234
Software Download screen on page 237
Configuration File Download/Upload screen on page 240
ASCII Configuration file Download on page 244
Using SNTP
Using DNS to ping and Telnet

System Configuration Guide


214 Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface

IP Configuration/Setup screen

The IP Configuration/Setup screen (Figure 79) allows you to set or modify the
Ethernet Switch 325/425 IP configuration parameters. Data that you enter in the
user-configurable fields takes effect as soon as you press Enter.

To open the IP Configuration/Setup screen:

Choose IP Configuration/Setup (or press i) from the main menu.

Figure 79 IP Configuration/Setup screen

IP Configuration/Setup

BootP Request Mode: [ BootP When Needed ]

Configurable In Use Last BootP


------------------- --------------- -------------
In-Band Stack IP Address: [ 0.0.0.0 ] 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
In-Band Switch IP Address: [ 134.177.224.102 ] 134.177.224.102 0.0.0.0
In-Band Subnet Mask: [ 255.255.255.0 ] 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0

Default Gateway: [ 134.177.224.1 ] 134.177.224.1 0.0.0.0

IP Address to Ping: [ 10.30.40.1 ]


Start Ping: [ No ]

Use space bar to display choices, press <Return> or <Enter> to select choice.
Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.

Table 47 describes the IP Configuration/Setup screen fields.

Note: The read-only fields in this screen are updated based on the BootP
mode specified in the BootP Request Mode field. (See Choosing a
BootP request mode on page 216 for more information.)

320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface 215

Table 47 IP Configuration/Setup screen fields

Field Description

BootP Request One of four modes of operation for BootP. (See Choosing a BootP request mode on
Mode page 216 for details about the four modes.)
Default Value BootP When Needed
Range BootP Disabled, BootP When Needed, BootP Always, BootP or Last
Address
Configurable Column header for the user-configurable IP configuration fields in this screen.
In Use Column header for the read-only fields in this screen. The read-only data displayed in
this column represents IP configuration that is currently in use.
Last BootP Column header for the read-only fields in this screen. The read-only data displayed in
this column represents IP configuration obtained from the last BootP reply received.
In-Band Stack IP The in-band stack IP address field. This field is not required for the operation of the
Address standalone switch.
Default Value 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned)
Range Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented
as a decimal value, between 0 and 255, separated by a decimal
point
In-Band Switch The in-band IP address of the switch. This field is not required for the operation of the
IP Address stack. This field can not use the same IP address used for the stack.
Default Value 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned)
Range Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented
as a decimal value, between 0 and 255, separated by a decimal
point
Note: When the IP address is entered in the In-Band IP Address field, and the
In-Band Subnet Mask field value is not present, the software provides an
in-use default value for the In-Band Subnet Mask field that is based on the
class of the IP address entered in the In-Band IP Address field.

System Configuration Guide


216 Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface

Table 47 IP Configuration/Setup screen fields (continued)

Field Description

In-Band Subnet The subnet address mask associated with the in-band IP address shown on the screen
Mask (see In-Band Switch IP address field). Network routers use the subnet mask to
determine the network or subnet address portion of a hosts IP address. The bits in the
IP address that contain the network address (including the subnet) are set to 1 in the
address mask, and the bits that contain the host identifier are set to 0.
Default Value 0.0.0.0 (no subnet mask assigned)
Range Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented
as a decimal value, between 0 and 255, separated by a decimal
point
Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway.
Default Value 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned)
Range Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented
as a decimal value, between 0 and 255, separated by a decimal
point
IP Address to The IP address of the network device you want to ping. This field is not required for the
Ping operation of the stack.
Default Value 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned)
Range Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented
as a decimal value, between 0 and 255, separated by a decimal
point
Start Ping Pings the selected network device when you choose Yes.
Default Value No
Range No, Yes

Choosing a BootP request mode

The BootP Request Mode field in the IP Configuration screen allows you to
choose which method the switch uses to broadcast BootP requests:

BootP When Needed


BootP Always
BootP Disabled

320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface 217

BootP or Last Address

Note: Whenever the switch is broadcasting BootP requests, the BootP


process eventually times out if a reply is not received. When the process
times out, the BootP request mode automatically changes to BootP
Disabled mode. To restart the BootP process, change the BootP request
mode to any of the three following modes:
BootP When Needed
BootP Always
BootP or Last Address.

BootP When Needed

Allows the switch to request an IP address if one has not already been set from the
console terminal. The Ethernet Switch 325/425 operates in the BootP When
Needed mode as described in the steps below:

When the IP data is entered from the console terminal, the data becomes the
in-use address of the switch and BootP requests are not broadcast. The switch
can be managed using this in-band IP address.
When the in-band IP address is not set from the console terminal, the switch
broadcasts BootP requests until it receives a BootP reply containing an IP
address. If the switch does not receive a BootP reply that contains an IP
address, the switch cannot be managed in-band.

If an IP address is not currently in use, these actions take effect immediately. If an


IP address is currently in use, these actions take effect only after the switch is reset
or power cycled.

BootP Always

This option allows you to manage the switch that has been configured with the IP
address obtained from the BootP server. The Ethernet Switch 325/425 operates in
the BootP Always mode as described in the steps below:

The switch continues to broadcast BootP requests, regardless of whether an


in-band IP address is set from the console terminal.
If the switch receives a BootP reply that contains an in-band IP address, the
switch uses this new in-band IP address.

System Configuration Guide


218 Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface

If the switch does not receive a BootP reply, the switch cannot be managed
using the in-band IP address set from the console terminal.

If an IP address is not currently in use, these actions take effect immediately. If an


IP address is currently in use, these actions take effect only after the switch is reset
or power cycled.

BootP Disabled

This option allows you to manage the switch by using the IP address set from the
console terminal. The Ethernet Switch 325/425 operates in the BootP Disabled
mode as described in the steps below:

The switch does not broadcast BootP requests, regardless of whether an IP


address is set from the console terminal.
The switch can be managed only by using the in-band switch IP address set
from the console terminal.

BootP or Last Address

This option allows you to manage the switch even if a BootP server is not
reachable. The Ethernet Switch 325/425 operates in the BootP or Last Address
mode as described in the steps below:

When you specify the IP data from the console terminal, the IP address
becomes the in-band address of the switch. BootP requests are not broadcast.
You can manage the switch using this in-band IP address.
When you do not specify the in-band IP address from the console terminal,
the switch broadcasts BootP requests until it receives a BootP reply
containing an in-band IP address. If the switch does not receive a BootP reply
that contains an in-band IP address within 10 minutes, the switch uses the last
in-band IP address it received from a BootP server. This IP information is
displayed in the Last BootP column.

If the IP address specified as the in-band IP address is not currently in use, these
actions take effect immediately. If an IP address is currently in use, these actions
take effect only after the switch is reset or power cycled.

320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface 219

SNMP Configuration screen

The SNMP Configuration screen (Figure 80) allows you to set or modify the
SNMP configuration parameters.

To open the SNMP Configuration screen:

Choose SNMP Configuration (or press m) from the main menu.

Figure 80 SNMP Configuration screen

SNMP Configuration

Read-Only Community String: [ public ]


Read-Write Community String: [ private ]

Trap #1 IP Address: [ 0.0.0.0 ]


Community String: [ ]
Trap #2 IP Address: [ 0.0.0.0 ]
Community String: [ ]
Trap #3 IP Address: [ 0.0.0.0 ]
Community String: [ ]
Trap #4 IP Address: [ 0.0.0.0 ]
Community String: [ ]

Authentication Trap: [ Enabled ]


AutoTopology: [ Enabled ]

Enter text, press <Return> or <Enter> when complete.


Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.

System Configuration Guide


220 Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface

Table 48 describes the SNMP Configuration screen fields.

Table 48 SNMP Configuration screen fields

Field Description

Read-Only The community string used for in-band read-only SNMP operations.
Community String
Default Value public
Range Any ASCII string of up to 32 printable characters
Read-Write The community string used for in-band read-write SNMP operations.
Community String
Default value private
Range Any ASCII string of up to 32 printable characters
Trap #1 IP Address1 Number one of four trap IP addresses. Successive Trap IP address fields
are numbered 2, 3, and 4. Each trap address has an associated community
string (see Community String).
Default value 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned)
Range Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is
represented as a decimal value, separated by a decimal
point
Community String The community string associated with one of the four trap IP addresses
(see Trap #1 IP Address).
Default value Zero-length string
Range Any ASCII string of up to 32 printable characters
Authentication Trap Determines whether a trap is sent when there is an SNMP authentication
failure.
Default value Enabled
Range Enabled, Disabled
Autotopology Allows you to enable or disable the switch participation in autotopology,
which allows network topology mapping of other switches in your network.
Default value Enabled
Range Disabled
1 The Trap IP Address and Community String fields can be set using a MIB table (in a Nortel proprietary MIB). The status
of the row in the MIB table can be set to Ignore. If the row status is set to Ignore, the fields appear to be set when
viewed from the console terminal; however, no traps are sent to that address until the row status is set to Valid.

320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface 221

System Characteristics screen


The System Characteristics screen (Figure 81) allows you to view system
characteristics and contains three user-configurable fields: sysContact, sysName,
and sysLocation.

To open the System Characteristics screen:

Choose System Characteristics (or press s) from the main menu.

Figure 81 System Characteristics screen

System Characteristics

Operation Mode: Switch

MAC Address: 00-0F-CD-BF-1E-80

Reset Count: 9
Last Reset Type: Management Reset
Power Status: Primary Power
Local GBIC Type: port 49, None
port 50, None
sysDescr: Ethernet Switch 425-48T
HW:00 FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0
sysObjectID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.1
sysUpTime: 7 days, 17:49:05 sysNtpTime: SNTP not synchronized.
sysServices: 3
sysContact: [ ]
sysName: [ Ethernet 428-48T ]
sysLocation: [ ]

Enter text, press <Return> or <Enter> when complete.


Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.

System Configuration Guide


222 Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface

Table 49 describes the System Characteristics screen fields

Table 49 System Characteristics screen fields

Field Description

Operation Mode Read-only field that indicates the operation mode of the unit, for example:
When the unit is part of a stack configuration, the (read-only) field indicates the
unit is operational in a stack, and lists the current unit number of this switch. In
this example (see Figure 81 on page 221), the current unit number is Unit 2.
When the unit is not part of a stack configuration (operating standalone), the
read-only field indicates the unit is operating as a switch. When in this operation
mode, the Size of Stack and Base Unit fields (see following description) do not
appear.
Size of Stack This read-only field only appears when the switch is participating in a stack
configuration. This field indicates the number of units configured in the stack
configuration (1 to 8 units maximum).
Base Unit This read-only field only appears when the switch is participating in a stack
configuration. This field indicates the unit number of the switch that is currently
operating as the base unit.
MAC Address The MAC address of the switch or, when the switch is participating in a stack
configuration, the MAC address of the stack configuration.
Reset Count A read-only field that indicates the number of resets since the operational firmware
was first loaded on the switch.
Default Value 1
Range 0 to 232 -1 (4,294,967,295)
Last Reset Type A read-only field that indicates the last type of reset.
Default Value Power Cycle
Range Power Cycle, Software Download, Management Reset,
Management Factory Reset
Power Status A read-only field that indicates the current power source (primary, RPSU, or both).
Default Value Primary Power
Range Primary Power, Redundant Power, Primary and Redundant
Power
Local GBIC Type A read-only field that indicates the GBIC type that is configured in this unit. (This field
is applicable only to the Ethernet Switch 425).
sysDescr A read-only field that specifies hardware and software versions.
sysObjectID A read-only field that provides a unique identification of the switch, which contains
the vendors private enterprise number.
sysUpTime A read-only field that shows the length of time since the last reset. Note that this field
is updated when the screen is redisplayed.

320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface 223

Table 49 System Characteristics screen fields (continued)

Field Description

sysServices A read-only field that indicates the switchs physical and data link layer functionality.
sysContact The name and phone number of the person responsible for the switch.
Default Value Zero-length string
Range Any ASCII string of up to 56 printable characters1
sysName A name that uniquely identifies the switch.
Default Value Zero-length string
Range Any ASCII string of up to 56 printable characters1
sysLocation The physical location of the switch.
Default Value Zero-length string
Range Any ASCII string of up to 56 printable characters
1 Although this field can be set to up to 255 characters from a Network Management Station (NMS), only 56 characters
are displayed on the console terminal.

Console/Comm Port Configuration screen

The Console/Comm Port Configuration screen (Figure 82) allows you to


configure and modify the console/comm port parameters and security features of a
standalone switch or any participating switch in a stack configuration.

To open the Console/Comm Port Configuration screen:

Choose Console/Comm Port Configuration (or press o) from the main


menu.

System Configuration Guide


224 Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface

Figure 82 Console/Comm Port Configuration screen

Console/Comm Port Configuration

Comm Port Data Bits: 8 Data Bits


Comm Port Parity: No Parity
Comm Port Stop Bits: 1 Stop Bit
Console Port Speed: [ 9600 Baud ]

Console Switch Password Type: [ None ]


Console Stack Password Type: [ None ]
Telnet/WEB Switch Password Type: [ None ]
Telnet/WEB Stack Password Type: [ None ]

Console Read-Only Switch Password: [ user ]


Console Read-Write Switch Password: [ secure ]
Console Read-Only Stack Password: [ user ]
Console Read-Write Stack Password: [ secure ]

Primary RADIUS Server: [ 0.0.0.0 ]


Secondary RADIUS Server: [ 0.0.0.0 ]
UDP RADIUS Port: [ 1645 ]
RADIUS Shared Secret: [ ]

Use space bar to display choices, press <Return> or <Enter> to select choice.
Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.

Note: Release 3.6 software supports a security enhancement that


provides usernames in addition to passwords for switch access. If you set
a password in the Console/Comm Port Configuration screen, the next
time you log in to the switch, you are prompted to enter a valid username
(see Figure 83 on page 231). Therefore, ensure you are aware of the
valid usernames (default RW and RO) before you change passwords.
For information about modifying existing usernames, see Configuring
and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).

320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface 225

Table 50 describes the Console/Comm Port Configuration screen fields.

Table 50 Console/Comm Port Configuration screen fields

Field Description

Comm Port Data Bits A read-only field that indicates the current console/comm port data bit setting.
Comm Port Parity A read-only field that indicates the current console/comm port parity setting.
Comm Port Stop Bits A read-only field that indicates the current console/comm port stop bit setting.
Console Port Speed Allows you to set the console/comm port baud rate to match the baud rate of the
console terminal.
Default Value: 9600 Baud
Range: 2400 Baud, 4800 Baud, 9600 Baud, 19200 Baud, 38400 Baud
Caution: If you choose a baud rate that does not match your
console terminal baud rate, you can lose communication with the
configuration interface when you press Enter. If communication
is lost, set your console terminal to match the new service port
setting.
Achtung: Bei Auswahl einer Baud rate, die nicht mit der
Baudrate des Konsolenterminals bereinstimmt, geht die
Kommunikation mit der Konsolenschnittstelle verloren, wenn
Sie die Eingabetaste drcken. Stellen Sie in diesem Fall das
Konsolenterminal so ein, da es mit der neuen Einstellung der
Service-Schnittstelle bereinstimmt.
Attention: Si vous slectionnez un dbit diffrent de celui de
votre terminal, vous perdrez le contact avec l'interface de votre
console ds que vous appuierez sur [Entre]. Pour restaurer la
communication, alignez le dbit de votre terminal sur le nouveau
dbit de votre port de service.
Precaucin: Si selecciona una velocidad de transmisin que no
coincide con la velocidad de transmisin del terminal de la
consola, perder la comunicacin con el interfaz de la consola al
pulsar [Intro]. Si se pierde la comunicacin, ajuste el terminal de
la consola para que coincida con el nuevo valor del puerto de
servicio.
Attenzione: Nel caso in cui si scelga una velocit di
trasmissione non corrispondente a quella del terminale della
console, la comunicazione con l'interfaccia della console cadr
premendo il tasto [Invio]. Se la comunicazione cade, impostare il
terminale della console in modo tale che corrisponda alla nuova
impostazione della porta di servizio.

System Configuration Guide


226 Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface

Table 50 Console/Comm Port Configuration screen fields (continued)

Field Description

Console Switch Enables password protection for accessing the console interface (CI) of a
Password Type standalone switch through a console terminal.
If you set this field to Local Password, you can use the Logout option to restrict
access to the CI. Thereafter, you must specify the correct password at the
console-terminal prompt. See Console Read-Only Switch Password and
Console Read-Write Switch Password for more information.
Default Value None
Range None, Local Password, RADIUS Authentication
Console Stack Enables password protection for accessing the console interface (CI) of any
Password Type participating switch in a stack configuration through a console terminal.
If you set this field to Required, you can use the Logout option to restrict access
to the CI of any stack unit. Thereafter, you must specify the correct password at
the console-terminal prompt when accessing the stack. See Console Read-Only
Stack Password and Console Read-Write Stack Password for more information.
Default Value None
Range None, Local Password, RADIUS Authentication
TELNET/WEB Switch Enables password protection for accessing the console interface (CI) of a
Password Type standalone switch through a Telnet/WEB session.
If you set this field to Required, you can use the Logout option to restrict access
to the CI. Thereafter, you must specify the correct password at the
console-terminal prompt. See Console Read-Only Switch Password and
Console Read-Write Switch Password descriptions for more information.
Default Value None
Range None, Local Password, RADIUS Authentication
TELNET/WEB Stack Enables password protection for accessing the console interface (CI) of any
Password Type participating switch in a stack configuration, through a Telnet/WEB session.
If you set this field to Required, you can use the Logout option to restrict access
to the CI of any stack unit. Thereafter, you must specify the correct password at
the console-terminal prompt when accessing the stack. See Console Read-Only
Stack Password and Console Read-Write Stack Password for more information.
Default Value None
Range None, Local Password, RADIUS Authentication

320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface 227

Table 50 Console/Comm Port Configuration screen fields (continued)

Field Description

Console Read-Only When the Console Switch Password field is set to Required (for Telnet, for
Switch Password Console, or for Both), this field allows read-only password access to the CI of a
standalone switch. Users can access the CI using the correct password (see
default), but cannot change parameters or use the Reset option or Reset to
Default option.
Default Value user
Range An ASCII string of up to 15 printable characters
Console Read-Write When the Console Switch Password field is set to Required (for Telnet, for
Switch Password Console, or for Both), this field allows read-write password access to the CI of a
standalone switch. Users can log in to the CI using the correct password (see
default) and can change any parameter, except the stack passwords.
You can change the default passwords for read-only access and read-write
access to a private password.
Default Value: secure
Range: Any ASCII string of up to 15 printable characters
Caution: If you change the system-supplied default passwords, be sure to
write the new passwords down and keep them in a safe place. If you forget the
new passwords, you cannot access the console interface. In that case, contact
Nortel for help.
Achtung: Wenn Sie die fr das System standardmig eingestellten
Pawrter ndern, notieren Sie sich die neuen Pawrter, und bewahren Sie sie
an einem sicheren Ort auf. Falls Sie die neuen Pawrter vergessen, knnen Sie
nicht mehr auf die Konsolenschnittstelle zugreifen. Wenden Sie sich in diesem
Fall an Nortel, um Untersttzung zu erhalten.
Attention: Si vous changez les mots de passe par dfaut du systme,
assurez-vous de bien noter vos nouveaux mots de passe et de les conserver dans
un endroit sr. Si vous perdez vos nouveaux mots de passe, vous ne pourrez
plus accder votre interface. Le cas chant, veuillez contacter Nortel.

Precaucin: Si modifica las contraseas predeterminadas asignadas por el


sistema, asegrese de anotar las nuevas contraseas y gurdelas en un lugar
seguro. Si olvida las nuevas contraseas, no podr acceder al interfaz de la
consola. En ese caso, pngase en contacto con Nortel para obtener ayuda al
respecto.

Attenzione: In caso di modifica delle password predefinite nel sistema,


assicurarsi di annotare le nuove password e di conservarle in un luogo sicuro.
Nel caso in cui le nuove password vengano dimenticate, non sar possibile
accedere all'interfaccia della console. In tal caso, contattare la Nortel per avere
assistenza.

System Configuration Guide


228 Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface

Table 50 Console/Comm Port Configuration screen fields (continued)

Field Description

Console Read-Only When the Console Switch Password field is set to Required (for Telnet, for
Stack Password Console, or for Both), this field allows read-only password access to the CI of
any participating switch in a stack configuration. Users can access the CI using
the correct password (see default), but cannot change any parameters or use
the Reset option or Reset to Default option.
Default Value user
Range An ASCII string of up to 15 printable characters

320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface 229

Table 50 Console/Comm Port Configuration screen fields (continued)

Field Description

Console Read-Write When the Console Switch Password field is set to Local Password (for Telnet,
Stack Password for Console, or for Both), this field allows read-write password access to the CI of
any participating switch in a stack configuration. Users can log in to the CI using
the correct password (see default), and can change any parameter, except the
switch password.
You can change the default passwords for read-only access and read-write
access to a private password.
Default Value: secure
Range: Any ASCII string of up to 15 printable characters
Caution: When you change the system-supplied default passwords, be sure to
write the new passwords down and keep them in a safe place. If you forget the
new passwords, you cannot access the console interface. In that case, contact
Nortel for help.
Achtung: Wenn Sie die fr das System standardmig eingestellten
Pawrter ndern, notieren Sie sich die neuen Pawrter, und bewahren Sie sie
an einem sicheren Ort auf. Falls Sie die neuen Pawrter vergessen, knnen Sie
nicht mehr auf die Konsolenschnittstelle zugreifen. Wenden Sie sich in diesem
Fall an Nortel, um Untersttzung zu erhalten.
Attention: Si vous changez les mots de passe par dfaut du systme,
assurez-vous de bien noter vos nouveaux mots de passe et de les conserver dans
un endroit sr. Si vous perdez vos nouveaux mots de passe, vous ne pourrez
plus accder votre interface. Le cas chant, veuillez contacter Nortel.
Precaucin: Si modifica las contraseas predeterminadas asignadas por el
sistema, asegrese de anotar las nuevas contraseas y gurdelas en un lugar
seguro. Si olvida las nuevas contraseas, no podr acceder al interfaz de la
consola. En ese caso, pngase en contacto con Nortel para obtener ayuda al
respecto.
Attenzione: In caso di modifica delle password predefinite nel sistema,
assicurarsi di annotare le nuove password e di conservarle in un luogo sicuro.
Nel caso in cui le nuove password vengano dimenticate, non sar possibile
accedere all'interfaccia della console. In tal caso, contattare la Nortel per avere
assistenza.

System Configuration Guide


230 Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface

Table 50 Console/Comm Port Configuration screen fields (continued)

Field Description

Primary RADIUS Server The IP address of the Primary RADIUS server.


Default 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned)
Range Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is
represented as a decimal value, separated by a decimal point
Secondary RADIUS The IP address of the Secondary RADIUS server.
Server
Default 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned)
Range Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is
represented as a decimal value, separated by a decimal point
RADIUS UPD Port The user datagram protocol (UDP) port for the RADIUS server.
Default 1645
Range 0 to 65536
RADIUS Shared Secret Your special switch security code that provides authentication to the RADIUS
server.
Default Null string (which is not authenticated)
Range Any contiguous ASCII string that contains at least 1 printable
character, up to a maximum of 35

320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface 231

Logging in

If you set a password in the Console/Comm Port Configuration screen


(Figure 82 on page 224), the next time you access the switch, you are prompted
for a username and password as shown in Figure 83 (default usernames are RW
and RO).

Figure 83 Login screen

Ethernet Switch 425-48T HW:0C FW 3.5.0.2 SW 3.6.0

Username: [ RW ]
Password: [ *************** ]

Enter Password: ********

Enter text, press <Return> or <Enter> when complete.

Enter a valid username and password and press Enter. You are then directed to the
Console Interface main menu.

For information about modifying the existing usernames, see Configuring and
Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A).

System Configuration Guide


232 Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface

Renumber Stack Units screen

The Renumber Stack Units screen (Figure 75) allows you to renumber the units
configured in the stack. When selected, this option identifies the unit number of
each unit in the stack configuration by lighting the corresponding number of (100
Mb/s port) LEDs on each unit for approximately 10 seconds. For example, unit 3
displays three LEDs.

Note: This menu option and screen appears only when the switch is
participating in a stack configuration.

To open the Renumber Stack Units screen:

Choose Renumber Stack Units (or press n) from the main menu.

Figure 84 Renumber Stack Units screen.

Renumber Stack Units

Current Unit Number MAC Address New Unit Number


------------------- ---------------------------- ---------------
[ 1 ] 00-60-fd-77-a6-0c [ 1 ]
[ 2 ] 00-60-fd-77-a5-f0 [ 2 ]
[ 3 ] 00-60-fd-77-a4-4c [ 3 ]
[ 4 ] 00-60-fd-77-ab-84 [ 4 ]

Renumbering stack units will cause an automatic Reset to Current Settings to


occur across the entire stack. The current configuration will be adapted to
the new numbering scheme. Check the stack configuration after the reset to
confirm the desired configuration is set.

Are you sure you want to renumber switches with the new settings? [ No ]

Use space bar to display choices, press <Return> or <Enter> to select choice.
Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.

320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface 233

Table 51 describes the Renumber Stack Units screen fields.

Table 51 Renumber Stack Units screen fields

Field Description

Current Unit Number Read-only field which lists the current unit number of each of the configured stack
units. The entries in this column are displayed in order of their current physical
cabling with respect to the base unit, and can show nonconsecutive unit
numbering if one or more units were previously moved or modified. The entries can
also include unit numbers of units that are no longer participating in the stack (not
currently active).
MAC Address Read-only field listing the MAC address of the corresponding unit listed in the
Current Unit Number field.
New Unit Number Allows you to set the current unit number of each unit in the stack. You can change
any of the fields, as required. You can also delete entries by typing zero (0) or
using the space bar to clear the field.
Default Value Current stack order
Range 1 to 8
Renumber units with Specifies whether to start the renumbering process (default is No). Use the
new setting? spacebar to toggle the selection to Yes.
Renumbering resets the switch with the current configuration values. When you
select this option, the switch resets, runs a self-test, then displays the Nortel logo
screen. After you press Ctrl+Y at the screen prompt, the console screen
temporarily displays the (standalone) Ethernet Switch 325/425 main menu. Then,
within 20 seconds, the console screen refreshes and displays the main menu
screen for the stack configuration. The Unit LEDs display the new numbering
order.
Default Value No
Range No, Yes

Hardware Unit Information screen


The Hardware Unit Information screen (Figure 85) lists the switch models,
including any installed GBICs that are configured in your standalone or stack
configuration.

To open the Hardware Unit Information screen.

Choose Display Hardware Units (or press h) from the main menu.

System Configuration Guide


234 Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface

Figure 85 Hardware Unit Information screen

Hardware Unit Information

Unit# Switch Model GBIC1 Model GBIC2 Model SW Version

----- ---------------- ---------------- ---------------- -------------


1 425-48T None None v3.6.0

Press Ctrl-N to display next screen.


Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.

TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen

The TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen (Figure 86) allows a


user at a remote console terminal to communicate with the Ethernet Switch 325/
425 as if the console terminal were directly connected to it. You can have up to
four active Telnet sessions at one time.

To open the TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen

Choose TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration (or press t) from the


main menu.

320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface 235

Figure 86 TELNET Configuration screen

TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration

TELNET: | Access: Use List:


Login Timeout :[ 1 minute ] | TELNET: [ Enabled ] [ Yes ]
Login Retries :[ 3 ] | SNMP : [ Enabled ] [ Yes ]
Inactivity Timeout:[ 15 minutes ] | WEB : [ Enabled ] [ Yes ]
Event Logging :[ All ] |

# Allowed Source IP Address Allowed Source Mask


-- ------------------------- -------------------------
1 [ 0.0.0.0 ] [ 0.0.0.0 ]
2 [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ]
3 [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ]
4 [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ]
5 [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ]
6 [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ]
7 [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ]
8 [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ]
9 [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ]
10 [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ]

Enter number, press <Return> or <Enter> when complete.


Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.

Table 52 describes the TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen


fields.

Table 52 TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen fields

Field Description

TELNET Access Allows a user remote access to the CI through a Telnet session.
Default value Enabled
Range Enabled, Disabled
SNMP Access Specifies if SNMP access is allowed and only to those on the list. (SNMP access
includes the DM system.)
Default value Access: Enabled; Use List: Yes
Range Access: Enabled, Disabled; Use List: Yes, No

System Configuration Guide


236 Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface

Table 52 TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen fields (continued)

Field Description

WEB Access Specifies if access to the Web-based management system is allowed and only to those
on the list.
Default value Access: Enabled; Use List: Yes
Range Access: Enabled, Disabled; Use List: Yes, No
Login Timeout Specifies the amount of time a user has to enter the correct password at the
console-terminal prompt.
Default value 1 minute
Range 0 to 10 minutes (0 indicates no timeout)
Login Retries Specifies the number of times a user can enter an incorrect password at the
console-terminal prompt before terminating the session.
Default value 3
Range 1 to 100
Inactivity Specifies the amount of time the session can be inactive before it is terminated.
Timeout
Default value 15 minutes
Range 0 to 60 minutes (0 indicates no timeout)
Event Logging Specifies the types of events that are displayed in the Event Log screen (see System
Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A).
Default value All
Range All, None, Accesses, Failures
Description All: Logs the following Telnet events to the Event Log screen:
TELNET connect: Indicates the IP address and access mode of a
Telnet session.
TELNET disconnect: Indicates the IP address of the remote host
and the access mode, due to either a logout or inactivity.
Failed TELNET connection attempts: Indicates the IP address of
the remote host whose IP address is not on the list of allowed
addresses, or indicates the IP address of the remote host that did
not supply the correct password.
None: Indicates that no Telnet events are logged in the Event Log
screen.
Accesses: Logs only Telnet connect and disconnect events in the
Event Log screen.
Failures: Logs only failed Telnet connection attempts in the Event Log
screen.

320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface 237

Table 52 TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen fields (continued)

Field Description

Allowed Source Specifies up to 10 user-assigned host IP addresses that are allowed Telnet access to the
IP Address CI.
Default value 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned)
Range Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented
as a decimal value, separated by a decimal point
Allowed Source Specifies up to 10 user-assigned allowed source address masks. The remote IP address
Mask is masked with the Allowed Source Mask and, if the resulting value equals the Allowed
Source IP address, the connection is allowed.
For example, a connection would be allowed with the following settings:
Remote IP address = 192.0.1.5
Allowed Source IP Address = 192.0.1.0
Allowed Source Mask = 255.255.255.0
Default value 0.0.0.0 (no IP mask assigned)
Range Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented
as a decimal value, separated by a decimal point

Software Download screen

The Software Download screens (Figure 87 and Figure 89) allow you to revise
the Ethernet Switch 325/425 software image and diagnostics image that are
located in nonvolatile flash memory.

Caution: Do not interrupt power to the device during the software


download process. If the power is interrupted, the firmware image can
become corrupted.

Achtung: Unterbrechen Sie die Stromzufuhr zum Gert nicht, whrend


die Software heruntergeladen wird. Bei Unterbrechung der Stromzufuhr
kann das Firmware-Image beschdigt werden.

Attention: Ne pas couper l'alimentation de l'appareil pendant le


chargement du logiciel. En cas d'interruption, le programme rsident
peut tre endommag.

System Configuration Guide


238 Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface

Precaucin: No interrumpa la alimentacin del dispositivo durante el


proceso de descarga del software. Si lo hace, puede alterar la imagen de
la programacin (firmware).

Attenzione: Non interrompere l'alimentazione elettrica al dispositivo


durante il processo di scaricamento del software. In caso di interruzione,
l'immagine firmware potrebbe danneggiarsi.

To download the software image, you need a properly configured Trivial File
Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server in your network, and an IP address for the switch
(or stack, if configured). To learn how to configure the switch or stack IP address,
refer to IP Configuration/Setup screen on page 214.

To open the Software Download screen:

Choose Software Download (or press f) from the main menu.

You can monitor the software download process by observing the LEDs
(see LED Indications during the download process on page 240).

320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface 239

Figure 87 Software Download screen for an Ethernet Switch 325/425 stack

Software Download

Software Image Filename: [ docu/hummingbird_360.img ]


Diagnostics Image Filename: [ ]

TFTP Server IP Address: [ 198.202.188.174 ]

Start TFTP Load of New Image: [ No ]

Enter text, press <Return> or <Enter> when complete.


Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.

Table 53 describes the Software Download screen fields.

Table 53 Software Download screen fields

Field Description

Image Filename The Ethernet Switch 325/425 software image load file name.
Note: Certain software releases may require you to download two images: the boot code
image and the agent image. For proper operation of the switch, the new boot code image
must be downloaded before the agent image is downloaded.
Default value Zero-length string
Range An ASCII string of up to 30 printable characters
Diagnostics The Ethernet Switch 325/425 diagnostics file name.
Filename
Default value Zero-length string
Range An ASCII string of up to 30 printable characters
TFTP Server IP The IP address of your TFTP load host.
Address
Default value 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned)
Range Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented
as a decimal value, separated by a decimal point

System Configuration Guide


240 Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface

Table 53 Software Download screen fields (continued)

Field Description

Start TFTP Load Specifies whether to start the download of the switch software image (default is No).
of New Image
Use the spacebar to toggle the selection to Yes.
Press Enter to initiate the software download process.
Note: The software download process can take up to 60 seconds to complete (or more if
the load host path is congested or there is a high volume of network traffic).
To ensure that the download process is not interrupted, do not power down the switch for
approximately 10 minutes.
Default value No
Range No, Software Image, Diagnostics, Software Image If Newer,
Download image without reset, Download diag without reset.

LED Indications during the download process

The software download process automatically completes without user


intervention. The process erases the contents of flash memory and replaces it with
a new software image. Be careful not to interrupt the download process until after
it runs to completion (the process can take up to 10 minutes, depending on
network conditions).

Note: If problems occur during the software download process, the


Software Download screen displays error codes that define the problem.
The error codes are described in Chapter 13, Troubleshooting, on page
405.

Configuration File Download/Upload screen

The Configuration Management feature allows you to store and retrieve the
configuration parameters of an Ethernet Switch 325/425 or a stack to a TFTP
server. This feature supports two different methods for managing the system's
configuration files:

Binary configuration file management


ASCII configuration file management

320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface 241

The Configuration File Download/Upload screen (Figure 89) allows you to store
and retrieve your switch/stack configuration parameters on a TFTP server. It also
allows you to enable and disable the autosave feature.

Binary configuration download


You can retrieve the configuration parameters of a standalone switch or an entire
stack and use the retrieved parameters to automatically configure a replacement
switch or stack. Certain requirements apply when automatically configuring a
switch or stack using this feature (see Requirements on page 243). You must set
up the file on your TFTP server and set the filename read/write permission to
enabled before you can save the configuration parameters.

Although most configuration parameters are saved to the configuration file,


certain parameters are not saved (see Table 55 on page 244).

To view the Configuration File Menu (Figure 88):

Choose Configuration File (or press g) from the main menu.

Figure 88 Configuration File menu

Configuration File Menu

Configuration File Download/Upload...


Ascii Configuration File Download...
Autosave Configuration...
Return to Main Menu

Use arrow keys to highlight option, press <Return> or <Enter> to select


option.
Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.

System Configuration Guide


242 Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface

To open the Configuration File Download/Upload screen (Figure 89):

Choose Configuration File Download/Upload (or press c) from the main


menu

Figure 89 Configuration File Download/Upload screen

Configuration File Download/Upload

Configuration Image Filename: [ ]


TFTP Server IP Address: [ 198.202.188.174 ]
Copy Configuration Image to Server: [ No ]
Retrieve Configuration Image from Server: [ No ]

Enter text, press <Return> or <Enter> when complete.


Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.

Table 54 describes the Configuration File Download/Upload screen fields.

Table 54 Configuration File Download/Upload screen fields

Field Description

Configuration Image The file name you have chosen for the configuration file. Choose a
Filename meaningful file name that allows you to identify the file for retrieval when
required. The file must already exist on your TFTP server and must be read/
write enabled.
Default value Zero-length string
Range An ASCII string of up to 30 printable characters
TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of your TFTP load host.
Default value 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned)
Range Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is
represented as a decimal value, separated by a decimal
point

320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface 243

Table 54 Configuration File Download/Upload screen fields (continued)

Field Description

Copy Configuration Specifies whether to copy the presently configured switch/stack parameters to
Image to Server the specified TFTP server (default is No).
Use the spacebar to toggle the selection to Yes.
Press Enter to initiate the process.
Default Value No
Range Yes, No
Retrieve Configuration Specifies whether to retrieve the stored switch/stack configuration parameters
Image from Server from the specified TFTP server (default is No). If you choose Yes, the
download process begins immediately and, when completed, causes the
switch/stack to reset with the new configuration parameters.
Use the spacebar to toggle the selection to Yes.
Press Enter to initiate the process.
Default Value No
Range Yes, No

Requirements

The following requirements apply to the Configuration File feature:

The Configuration File feature can only be used to copy standalone switch
configuration parameters to other standalone switches or to copy stack
configuration parameters to other stack configurations.
For example, you cannot duplicate the configuration parameters of a unit in a
stack configuration and use it to configure a standalone switch.
A configuration file obtained from a standalone switch can only be used to
configure other standalone switches that have the same firmware revision and
model type as the donor standalone switch.
A configuration file obtained from a stack unit can only be used to configure
other stacks that have the same number of switches, firmware version, model
types, and physical IDs as the stack the donor stack unit resides in.
Reconfigured stacks are configured according to the unit order number of the
donor unit. For example, the configuration file parameters from a donor unit
with physical ID x are used to reconfigure the unit with physical ID x.

System Configuration Guide


244 Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface

Table 55 describes configuration file parameter information.

Table 55 Parameters not saved to the configuration file

These parameters are not saved Used in this screen See page

In-Band Stack IP Address IP Configuration/Setup 214


In-Band Switch IP Address
In-Band Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Console Read-Only Switch Password Console/Comm Port Configuration 223
Console Read-Write Switch Password
Console Read-Only Stack Password
Console Read-Write Stack Password
Configuration Image Filename Configuration File Download/Upload 240
TFTP Server IP Address

ASCII Configuration file Download

The ASCII Configuration File Download screen (Figure 90) allows you to
download an ASCII configuration file containing CLI commands from a TFTP
server to configure the switch or stack.

To view the ASCII Configuration File Download screen

Choose ASCII Configuration File Download (or press a) from the


Configuration File Menu to open the ASCII Configuration File Download
screen.

320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface 245

Figure 90 ASCII Configuration File Download screen

ASCII Configuration File Download

ASCII Configuration Filename: [ ]


TFTP Server IP Address: [ 0.0.0.0 ]
Retrieve Configuration File from Server: [ No ]
Last Manual Configuration Status: Passed

Last Auto Configuration Status: Passed


Auto Configuration on Reset: [ Disabled ]

Enter text, press <Return> or <Enter> when complete.


Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.

Table 56 describes the fields available on the ASCII Configuration File


Download screen.

Table 56 ASCII Configuration File Download/Upload screen fields

Field Description

ASCII Configuration Enter the file name of the ASCII configuration file you want to download to
Filename the switch. Specify a file name that allows you to identify the file for retrieval.
The ASCII configuration file must already exist on the TFTP server. It must
also be read/write enabled.
Default value Zero-length string
Range An ASCII string of up to 30 printable characters
TFTP Server IP Address Specify the IP address of your TFTP server.
Default value 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned)
Range Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is
represented as a decimal value, separated by a decimal
point.

System Configuration Guide


246 Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface

Table 56 ASCII Configuration File Download/Upload screen fields

Field Description

Retrieve Configuration File This field specifies whether to retrieve the stored ASCII configuration file
from Server from the specified TFTP server (default value is No).
If you choose Yes, the download process begins immediately and, when
the download is completed, the switch/stack will be configured based on
the CLI commands in the ASCII configuration file.
Use the spacebar to toggle the selection to Yes.
Press Enter to initiate the download process.
Default value No
Range Yes, No
Last Manual Configuration The system displays the status of the last manual configuration.
Status
Default value Passed
Range Passed, Failed
Last Auto Configuration The system displays the status of the last automatic configuration.
Status
Default value Passed
Range Passed, Failed
Auto Configuration on This field allows you to select the option of automatically configuring the
Reset switch or stack every time the switch or the stack is reset. The values that
can be assigned to this field are:

Disabled Auto configuration on reset is disabled.


Use Configured Use manually configured ASCII configuration file
name and TFTP server address for auto configuration on reset.
Use BootP Retrieve ASCII configuration file name, and optionally
server address, using BootP, when BootP is enabled, and perform auto
configuration on reset using these parameters.
Note: Refer to Appendix D, Sample BootP configuration file, on page 443
for a sample BootP configuration file.
Default value Disabled
Range Disabled, Use Configured, Use BootP

320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface 247

Enabling and disabling autosave

The Autosave Configuration screen (Figure 91) allows you to enable and disable
the autosave feature on the switch or stack.

To view the Autosave Configuration screen:

From the Configuration File Menu, choose Autosave Configuration (or


press s).

Figure 91 Autosave Configuration screen

Autosave Configuration

Autosave [ Enabled ]

Use space bar to display choices, press <Return> or <Enter> to select choice.
Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.

Table 57 describes the fields available in the Autosave Configuration screen.

Table 57 Autosave Configuration screen fields

Field Description

Autosave Enables or disables the autosave feature.

System Configuration Guide


248 Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface

Using SNTP
The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) feature synchronizes the Universal
Coordinated Time (UTC) to an accuracy within 1 second. This feature adheres to
the IEEE RFC 2030 (MIB is the s5agent). With this feature, the system can obtain
the time from any RFC 2030-compliant NTP/SNTP server.

Note: If you have trouble using this feature, try other NTP servers. Some
NTP servers may be overloaded or currently inoperable.

The system attempts to connect to the NTP server at least three times, with five
minutes duration between each retry. If the connection fails after three attempts,
the system waits for the next synchronization time (the default is 24 hours) and
begins the process again.

SNTP provides a real-time timestamp for the software, shown as Greenwich


Mean Time (GMT).

If SNTP is enabled (the default value is disabled), the system synchronizes with
the configured NTP server at boot-up and at user-configurable periods thereafter
(the default sync interval is 24 hours). The first synchronization is not performed
until network connectivity is established.

SNTP supports primary and secondary NTP servers. The system tries the
secondary NTP server only if the primary NTP server is unresponsive.

Configuring with CLI

You can use the CLI to configure the SNTP feature, ensuring that you complete
the following steps:

1 Set the primary and secondary NTP server.


2 Enable SNTP.
3 Display the UTC time.
4 Optionally, to ensure the synchronization happens immediately, force a
synchronization.

320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface 249

Setting local time zone

SNTP uses Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) for all time synchronizations so it
is not affected by different time zones. In order for the switch report the correct
time for your local time zone and daylight savings time, you must use the
following commands:

clock time-zone on page 294


no clock time-zone on page 295
clock summer-time on page 295
no clock summer-time on page 296
show clock time-zone on page 296
show clock summer-time on page 296

Using DNS to ping and Telnet


Using the DNS client, you can ping or Telnet to a host server or to a host by name.

To use this feature, you must configure at least one Domain Name Server (DNS);
You may also configure a default domain name. If you configure a default domain
name, that name is appended to host names that do not contain a dot. The default
domain name and addresses are saved in NVRAM.

The host names for ping and Telnet cannot be longer than 63 alphanumeric
characters, and the default DNS domain name cannot be longer than 255
characters.

Configuring with CLI

Use the CLI to configure the DNS client. Following are the commands used to
configure the DNS client using the CLI.

show ip dns command


ping command
ip name-server command
no ip name-server command

System Configuration Guide


250 Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface

ip domain-name command
no ip domain-name command
default ip domain-name command

For more information on these commands, see System configuration using the
CLI on page 251.

320985-A
251

Chapter 7
System configuration using the CLI

In the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, the Command Line Interface (CLI)
commands allows you to display and modify the switch configuration while the
switch is operating.

This chapter includes information about general switch maintenance, such as


setting up access parameters, upgrading the software, and setting the speed. This
chapter covers the following topics:

Configuring the switch IP address, subnet mask and default gateway on


page 252
Using DNS to ping and telnet on page 261
Configuration Management on page 266
Customizing your system on page 270
Displaying the ARP table on page 282
Displaying interfaces on page 282
Saving the configuration to NVRAM on page 285
Enabling and disabling autosave on page 287
Setting time on network elements using Simple Network Time Protocol on
page 289
Enabling Autopology on page 297
Configuring LEDs on the display panel on page 312
Upgrading software on page 315

System Configuration Guide


252 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

Configuring the switch IP address, subnet mask and


default gateway

IP notation

To enter IP addresses and subnet masks in the CLI, enter both the IP address and
the subnet mask in dotted decimal notation (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX).

Assigning and clearing IP addresses

Using the CLI, you can assign IP addresses and Gateway addresses, clear these
addresses, and view configured IP addresses. This section covers these topics:

ip address command
no ip address command on page 253
ip default-gateway command on page 254
no ip default-gateway command on page 254
show ip command on page 255

ip address command

The ip address command sets the IP address and subnet mask for the switch or
a stack. The syntax for the ip address command is:

ip address [stack|switch|unit] <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> [netmask


<XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>]

The ip address command is in the config command mode.

If you do not enter either the stack or switch parameter, the system automatically
modifies the stack IP address when in stack mode and modifies the switch IP
address when in standalone mode.

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 253

Table 58 describes the parameters and variables for the ip address command.

Table 58 ip address command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

stack|switch Sets the stack the IP address and subnet mask or the switch IP
address and netmask.
unit Sets the IP address of another unit in a stack.
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Enter IP address in dotted decimal notation; netmask is optional.
netmask Set the IP subnet mask for the stack or switch.

Note: When you change the IP address or subnet mask, you may lose
connection to Telnet and the Web.

no ip address command

The no ip address command clears the IP address and subnet mask. This
command sets the IP address and subnet mask for a switch or a stack to all zeros
(0). The syntax for the no ip address command is:

no ip address {stack|switch}

The no ip address command is in the config command mode.

Table 59 describes the parameters and variables for the no ip address


command.

Table 59 no ip address command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

stack|switch Zeroes out the stack IP address and subnet mask for the switch IP
address and subnet mask.
unit Sets the IP address of another unit in a stack.

System Configuration Guide


254 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

Note: When you change the IP address or subnet mask, you may lose
connection to Telnet and the Web. You also disable any new Telnet
connection, and you must connect to the serial console port to configure
a new IP address.

ip default-gateway command

The ip default-gateway command sets the IP default gateway address for a


switch or a stack. The syntax for the ip default-gateway command is:

ip default-gateway <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>

The ip default-gateway command is in the config command mode.

Table 60 describes the parameters and variables for the ip default-gateway


command.

Table 60 ip default-gateway command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Enter the dotted-decimal IP address of the default IP gateway.

Note: When you change the IP gateway, you may lose connection to
Telnet and the Web.

no ip default-gateway command

The no ip default-gateway command sets the IP default gateway address to


zeros (0). The syntax for the no ip default-gateway command is:

no ip default-gateway

The no ip default-gateway command is in the config command mode.

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 255

The no ip default-gateway command has no parameters or variables.

Note: When you change the IP gateway address, you may lose
connection to Telnet and the Web. You also may disable any new Telnet
connection required to connect to the serial console port to configure a
new IP Gateway address.

show ip command

The show ip command displays the IP configurations, specifically BootP mode,


stack address, switch address, subnet mask, and gateway address. This command
displays the these parameters for what is configured, what is in use, and the last
BootP. The syntax for the show ip command is:

show ip [bootp] [default-gateway] [address [stack|switch]]


[dns]

The show ip command is in the exec command mode.

If you do not enter any parameters, this command displays all the IP-related
configuration information.

Table 61 describes the parameters and variables for the show ip command.

Table 61 show ip command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

bootp Displays BootP-related IP information.


default-gateway Displays the IP address of the default gateway.
address Displays the current IP address.
stack|switch Specifies current IP address of the stack or the switch.
dns Displays DNS configuration.

Figure 92 displays a sample output of the show ip command.

System Configuration Guide


256 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

Figure 92 show ip command output

425-48T(config-if)#show ip
BootP Mode: BootP Disabled

Configured In Use Last BootP


--------------- --------------- ---------------
Stack IP Address: 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
Switch IP Address: 192.168.151.175 192.168.151.175 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0
Default Gateway: 192.168.151.1 192.168.151.1 0.0.0.0
425-48T(config-if)#

show ip address command

The show ip address command displays the IP configurations, stack address,


switch address, subnet mask, and gateway address, when the Ethernet Switch
425-24T Switch is in the stack mode. The syntax for the show ip address
command is:

show ip address [address [stack|switch|unit]]

The show ip address command is in the exec command mode.

Table 62 describes the parameters and variables for the show ip address
command.

Table 62 show ip address command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

address Displays the current IP address.


stack|switch Specifies current IP address of the stack or the switch.
unit Displays the IP address of another unit in a stack.

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 257

Figure 93 displays a sample output of the show ip address command.

Figure 93 show ip address command output

425-24T(config)#show ip address unit 1

Configured In Use Last BootP


--------------- --------------- ---------------
Stack IP Address: 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
Default Gateway: 192.168.151.1 192.168.151.1 0.0.0.0

Assigning and clearing IP addresses for specific units

You can assign IP addresses for specific units within a stack. This section covers
these topics:

ip address unit command


no ip address unit command on page 258
default ip address unit command on page 258

ip address unit command

The ip address unit command sets the IP address and subnet mask for a
specific unit in the stack. The syntax for the ip address unit command is:

ip address unit <1-8> A.B.C.D

The ip address unit command is in the config command mode.

Table 63 describes the parameters and variables for the ip address unit
command.

Table 63 ip address unit command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

unit <1-8> Sets the unit you are assigning an IP address.


A.B.C.D Enter IP address in dotted decimal notation.

System Configuration Guide


258 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

Note: When you change the IP address or subnet mask, you may lose
connection to Telnet and the Web.

no ip address unit command

The no ip address unit command sets the IP address for the specified unit in
a stack to all zeros (0). The syntax for the no ip address unit command is:

no ip address unit <1-8>

The no ip address unit command is in the config command mode.

Table 64 describes the parameters and variables for the no ip address unit
command.

Table 64 no ip address unit command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

unit <1-8> Zeroes out the IP address for the specified unit.

Note: When you change the IP address or subnet mask, you may lose
connection to Telnet and the Web.You also disable any new Telnet
connection, and you must connect to the serial console port to configure
a new IP address.

default ip address unit command

The default ip address unit command sets the IP address for the
specified unit in a stack to all zeros (0). The syntax for the default ip
address unit command is:

default ip address unit <1-8>

The default ip address unit command is in the config command mode.

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 259

Table 65 describes the parameters and variables for the default ip address
unit command.

Table 65 default ip address unit command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

unit <1-8> Zeroes out the IP address for the specified unit.

Note: When you change the IP gateway, you may lose connection to
Telnet and the Web.

Pinging

To ensure that the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 has connectivity to the network,
ping a device you know is connected to this network.

ping command

The ping command tests the network connection to another network device. The
command sends an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet from the
switch to the target device. The local IP address must be set before issuing the
ping command. Refer to Assigning and clearing IP addresses on page 252 for
information on setting IP addresses.

The syntax for the ping command is:

ping <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> [datasize <64-4096>]


[{count <1-9999>} | continuous] [{timeout | -t} <1-120>]
[interval <1-60>] [debug]

The ping command is in the exec command mode.

System Configuration Guide


260 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

Table 66 describes the parameters and variables for the ping command.

Table 66 ping command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Specify the IP address of the target device in dotted-decimal


notation.
datasize Specifies the size of the ICMP packet to be sent. The data size
<64-4096> range is from 64 to 4096 bytes.

{count Sets the number of ICMP packets to be sent. The continuous


<1-9999>} | mode sets the ping running until the user interrupts it by entering
continuous Ctrl-C.

{timeout | -t} Set the timeout using either the timeout or -t parameter
<1-120> followed by the number of seconds the switch must wait before
timing out.
interval Specifies the number of seconds between transmitted packets.
<1-60>
debug Provides additional output information such as ICMP sequence
number and trip time.

If the device receives the packet, it sends a ping reply. When the switch receives
the reply, it displays a message indicating that the specified IP address is being
used. If no reply is received, a message indicates that the address is not
responding.

Figure 94 shows sample ping responses.

Figure 94 ping command responses

425-48T>ping 192.168.151.174
Reply from 192.168.151.174: 64 bytes time=16 ms
Host is reachable
425-48T>

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 261

Resetting the switch to default configuration


The restore factory-default command resets the switch or stack to its
default configuration.

The syntax for the restore factory-default command is:

restore factory-default [ -y ]

where the [ -y ] parameter instructs the switch not to prompt for confirmation.
If the [ -y ] parameter is not included in the command, the following message
appears:

Warning the switch/stack will be reset to factory default


configuration

Do you wish to continue (y/n) ?

Enter y to restore the switch to default.

The restore factory-default command is in the privExec command mode.

Using DNS to ping and telnet


Using the Domain Name Server (DNS) client, you can ping or telnet to a host
server or to a host by name. To use this feature, you must configure at least one
DNS; you may also configure a default domain name. If you configure a default
domain name, that name is appended to hostnames that do not contain a dot. The
default domain name and addresses are saved in NVRAM.

The hostnames for ping and telnet cannot be longer than 63 alphanumeric
characters, and the default DNS domain name cannot be longer than 255
characters. This section covers these commands:

show ip dns command on page 262


ping command on page 262
ip name-server command on page 263
no ip name-server command on page 264

System Configuration Guide


262 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

ip domain-name command on page 265


no ip domain-name command on page 265
default ip domain-name command on page 265

show ip dns command


The show ip dns command displays the DNS domain name, as well as any
configured DNS servers. The syntax for the show ip dns command is:

show ip dns

The show ip dns command is in the exec command mode.

The show ip dns command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 95 displays sample output from the show ip dns command.

Figure 95 show ip dns command output

425-48T(config)#show ip dns
DNS Default Domain name: None
DNS Servers
-----------
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
425-48T(config)#

ping command

The ping command tests the network connection to another network device. The
command sends an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet from the
switch to the target device. The local IP address must be set before issuing the
ping command.

You can ping a host using either its IP address or hostname.

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 263

The syntax for the ping command is:

ping <A.B.C.D or Hostname>

The ping command is in the exec command mode.

Table 67 describes the parameters and variables for the ping command.

Table 67 ping command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

<A.B.C.D or Specify:
Hostname> the IP address of the target device in dotted-decimal notation
the hostname of the device to ping (The hostname can be a
simple name, such as fred; in this case the DNS domain
name, if set, is appended. Or the hostname can be a full
hostname, such as fred.ca.nortel.com.)

If the device receives the packet, it sends a ping reply. When the switch receives
the reply, it displays a message indicating that the specified IP address is being
used. If no reply is received, a message indicates that the address is not
responding.

Figure 96 displays sample ping responses.

Figure 96 ping command responses

425-48T#ping 10.10.40.29
Host is reachable
425-48T#

There is no default value for this command.

ip name-server command

The ip name-server command adds one or more DNS servers IP addresses.


The syntax for the ip name-server command is:

ip name-server <A.B.C.D>

System Configuration Guide


264 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

The ip name-server command is in the config command mode.

Note: You can add up to 3 servers; adding one at a time.

Table 68 describes the parameters and variables for the ip name-server


command.

Table 68 ip name-server command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

<A.B.C.D> Enter the IP address of a DNS server.

The default value is 0.0.0.0.

no ip name-server command

The no ip name-server command removes one or more DNS servers IP


addresses. The syntax for the no ip name-server command is:

no ip name-server <A.B.C.D>

The no ip name-server command is in the config command mode.

Table 69 describes the parameters and variables for the no ip name-server


command.

Table 69 no ip name-server command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

<A.B.C.D> Enter the IP address of a DNS server.

The default value is 0.0.0.0.

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 265

ip domain-name command

The ip domain-name command sets the systems DNS domain name. The
syntax for the ip domain-name command is:

ip domain-name [<LINE>]

The ip domain-name command is in the config command mode.

Table 70 describes the parameters and variables for the ip domain-name


command.

Table 70 ip domain-name command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

<LINE> Enter a DNS domain name.

The default value for this command is an empty string.

no ip domain-name command

The no ip domain-name command clears the systems DNS domain name (sets
it to an empty string). The syntax for the no ip domain-name command is:

no ip domain-name

The no ip domain-name command is in the config command mode.

The no ip domain-name command has no parameters or variables.

default ip domain-name command

The default ip domain-name command clears the systems DNS domain


name (set it to an empty string). The syntax for the default ip domain-name
command is:

default ip domain-name

System Configuration Guide


266 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

The default ip domain-name command is in the config command mode.

The default ip domain-name command has no parameters or variables.

Configuration Management
This section covers the following topics:

Automatically loading Configuration file on page 266


ASCII Configuration Generator on page 268

Automatically loading Configuration file

This section discusses how to download a configuration file when the system
boots. You use standard CLI commands to modify the configuration file you want
to download. This section covers these commands:

configure network command


show config-network command on page 267

configure network command

The configure network command allows you to load and execute a script
immediately and to configure parameters to automatically download a
configuration file when you reboot the switch or stack. The syntax for the
configure network command is:

configure network [load-on-boot


{disable|use-bootp|use-config}] [filename <WORD>] [address
<XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>]

The configure network command is in the exec mode.

Note: When you enter configure network with no parameters, the


system prompts you for the script file name and TFTP server address and
then downloads the script.

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 267

Table 71 describes the parameters and variables for the configure network
command.

Table 71 configure network command parameters and variables

Parameters and variables Description

load-on-boot Specifies the settings for automatically loading a configuration file when
{disable|use-bootp|use-config the system boots:
disabledisables the automatic loading of config file
use-bootspecifies using the BootP file as the automatically loaded
config file
use-configspecifies using the ASCII configuration file as the
automatically loaded config file

Note: If you omit this parameter, the system immediately downloads and
runs the ASCII config file.
filename <WORD> Specifies the file name.

Note: If you omit this parameter and do not specify BootP, the system
uses the configured file name.
address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> Specifies the TFTP server from which to load the file. Enter the IP
address in dotted-decimal notation.

Note: If you omit this parameter and do not specify BootP, the system
uses the configured address.

Note: When you specify the file name or address, these parameters will
be changed at the next reboot, even if you do not specify load-on-boot.

show config-network command

The show config-network command displays information regarding the


automatic loading of the configuration file, including the current status of this
feature, the file name, the TFTP server address, and the status of the previous
automatic configuration command. The syntax for the show config-network
command is:

show config-network

The show config-network command is in the privExec mode.

System Configuration Guide


268 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

The show config-network command has no parameters or values.

Figure 97 shows the output for the show config-network command.

Figure 97 show config-network command

425-48T(config-if)#show config-network
Auto-Load Configuration On Boot: Disabled
Configuration Filename:
TFTP Server IP Address: 198.202.188.174
Last Auto Configuration Status: Passed
Last Manual Configuration Status: Passed

ASCII Configuration Generator

The primary goal of the ASCII Configuration Generator (ACG) is to provide the
users of the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 with a tool that allows them to easily
modify configuration of a particular switch or a stack.

ACG generates an ASCII configuration file which reproduces the behavior of the
current binary configuration file. The user can also rely on this function to
maintain backup configurations, as well as use it as a reliable method for
debugging the current configuration of a switch.

The Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 can download an editable ASCII
configuration file from the TFTP server. You can load the ASCII configuration
file automatically at boot time or on demand using console menus or CLI. Once
downloaded, the configuration file automatically configures the switch or stack
according to the Command Line Interface (CLI) commands in the file. The
maximum size for an ASCII configuration file is 100 KBs; larger configuration
files must be split into multiple files.

For more information on loading the ASCII configuration file automatically, see
Automatically loading Configuration file on page 266.

The commands that are associated with ACG are:

show running-config command on page 269


copy running-config tftp command on page 270

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 269

show running-config command

This command displays the current configuration of switch or a stack as a series of


CLI commands.

This command must be executed in the configuration mode and has no parameters
or variables.

The syntax of this command is:

show running-config

Figure 98 shows the output of the show running-config command

Figure 98 Output of the show running-config command

425-48T(config-if)#show running-config
! Embedded ASCII Configuration Generator Script
! Model = Ethernet Switch 425-48T
! Software version = v3.6.0
enable
configure terminal
!
! *** CORE ***
!
mac-address-table aging-time 300
autotopology
no radius-server
radius-server host 0.0.0.0
radius-server secondary-host 0.0.0.0
radius-server port 1645
! radius-server key ********
telnet-access login-timeout 1
telnet-access retry 3
telnet-access inactive-timeout 15
telnet-access logging all
cli password switch serial none
cli password switch telnet none
! cli password switch read-only "********"
425-48T(config-if)#

System Configuration Guide


270 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

copy running-config tftp command

This command copies contents of the current configuration file to another file on
the TFTP server. The syntax of the command is

copy running-config tftp {<address> <filename>}

This command can be executed in the config mode.

Table 72 describes the parameters and variables of this command.

Table 72 copy running-config tftp command parameters and variables

Parameter Description

address Signifies the IP address of the TFTP server


filename Denotes the filename to store configuration commands
on the TFTP server

Customizing your system


You can customize your system using the CLI commands described in this
section. This section covers the following topics:

Setting the terminal on page 270


Displaying system information on page 273
Setting boot parameters on page 274
Setting TFTP parameters on page 276
Setting the default management interface on page 279
Customizing the opening banner on page 280
Setting the default management interface on page 279

Setting the terminal

You can view the terminal settings, set them to default settings, or customize the
terminal settings. This sections covers:

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 271

show terminal command


terminal command on page 271

show terminal command

The show terminal command displays the current serial port information,
which includes connection speed, as well as the terminal width and length in
number of characters. The syntax for the show terminal command is:

show terminal

The show terminal command is in the exec command mode.

The show terminal command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 99 shows the output from the show terminal command.

Figure 99 show terminal command output

425-48T(config-if)#show terminal
Terminal speed: 9600
Terminal width: 79
Terminal length: 23
425-48T(config-if)#

terminal command

The terminal command configures the settings for the terminal. These settings
are transmit and receive speeds, terminal length, and terminal width. The syntax
of the terminal command is:

terminal speed {2400|4800|9600|19200|38400}|length


<1-132>|width <1-132>

The terminal command is in the exec mode.

System Configuration Guide


272 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

Table 73 describes the parameters and variables for the terminal command.

Table 73 terminal command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

speed Sets the transmit and receive baud rates for the terminal. You can
{2400|4800|9600| set the speed at one of the five options shown; default is 9600.
19200|38400}
length Sets the length of the terminal display in characters; default is 24.
width Sets the width of the terminal displaying characters; default 79.

show cli command

The show cli command displays the current CLI settings. The syntax for the
show cli command is:

show cli [info|mode|password]

The show cli command is in the exec command mode.

Table 74 describes the parameters and variables for the show cli command.

Table 74 show cli command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

info Displays general CLI settings.


mode Displays CLI mode.
password Displays CLI usernames and passwords.

Figure 100 displays the output from the show cli command.

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 273

Figure 100 show cli command output

425-48T(config)#show cli info


Inactivity Timeout: 15 minute(s)
Login Timeout: 1 minute(s)
Login Retries: 3
More: True
Screen Lines: 23
425-48T(config)#RW RW ***************
RO RO ***************
425-48T#

Displaying system information

The show sys-info command displays the current system characteristics.

Note: You must have SNTP enabled and configured to display GMT
time.

The syntax for the show sys-info command is:

show sys-info

The show sys-info command is in the privExec command mode.

The show sys-info command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 101 displays sample output from the show sys-info command.

System Configuration Guide


274 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

Figure 101 show sys-info command output

425-48T(config-if)#show sys-info
Operation Mode: Switch
MAC Address: 00-0F-CD-BF-1E-80
Reset Count: 35
Last Reset Type: Management Reset
Power Status: Primary Power
Autotopology: Enabled
Local GBIC Type: (port 49) GBIC is missing
Local GBIC Type: (port 50) GBIC is missing
sysDescr: Ethernet Switch 425-48T
HW:00 FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0
Mfg Date: 05122004
Serial #: SACC2600E5
Operational State:Normal
sysObjectID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.1
sysUpTime: 0 days, 00:38:44
sysNtpTime: SNTP not synchronized.
sysServices: 3
sysContact: c
sysName: Ethernet 425-48T
sysLocation:
425-48T(config-if)#

Setting boot parameters

You can reboot the switch or stack and configure BootP. The topics covered in
this section are:

boot command
ip bootp server command on page 275
no ip bootp server command on page 276
default ip bootp server command on page 276

boot command

The boot command performs a soft-boot of the switch or stack. The syntax for
the boot command is:

boot [default]

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 275

The boot command is in the privExec command mode.

Table 75 describes the parameters and variables for the boot command.

Table 75 boot command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

default Restores switch or stack to factory-default settings after rebooting.

Note: When you reset to factory defaults, the stack operational mode,
last reset count, and reason for last reset will not be set to factory
defaults.

ip bootp server command

The ip bootp server command configures BootP on the current instance of


the switch or server. The syntax for the ip bootp server command is:

ip bootp server {last|needed|disable|always}

The ip bootp server command is in the config command mode.

Table 76 describes the parameters and variables for the ip bootp server
command.

Table 76 ip bootp server command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

last|needed|disable| Specifies when to use BootP:


always lastuse BootP or the last known address
neededuse BootP only when needed
disablenever use BootP
alwaysAlways use BootP

System Configuration Guide


276 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

no ip bootp server command

The no ip bootp server command disables the BootP server. The syntax for
the no ip bootp server command is:

no ip bootp server

The no ip bootp server command is in the config command mode.

The no ip bootp server command has no parameters or values.

default ip bootp server command

The default ip bootp server command sets the BootP server status to
BootP when needed. The syntax for the default ip bootp server command
is:

default ip bootp server

The default ip bootp server command is in the config command mode.

The default ip bootp server command has no parameters or values.

Setting TFTP parameters

You can display the IP address of the TFTP server, assign an IP address you want
to use for a TFTP server, copy a configuration file to the TFTP server, or copy a
configuration file from the TFTP server to the switch to use to configure the
switch. This section covers:

show tftp-server command on page 277


tftp-server command on page 277
no tftp-server command on page 278
copy config tftp command on page 278
copy tftp config command on page 278

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 277

show tftp-server command

The show tftp-server command displays the IP address of the server used for
all TFTP-related transfers. The syntax for the show tftp-server command is:

show tftp-server

The show tftp-server command is in the privExec command mode.

The show tftp-server command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 102 shows a sample output of the show tftp-server command.

Figure 102 show tftp-server command output

425-48T(config-if)#show tftp-server
TFTP Server IP address : 198.202.188.174
425-48T(config-if)#

tftp-server command

The tftp-server command assigns the address for the stack or switch to use for
TFTP services. The syntax of the tftp-server command is:

tftp-server <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>

The tftp-server command is in the config command mode.

Table 77 describes the parameters and variables for the tftp-server


command.

Table 77 tftp-server command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Enter the dotted-decimal IP address of the server you want to


use for TFTP services.

System Configuration Guide


278 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

no tftp-server command

The no tftp-server command clears the TFTP server IP address to 0.0.0.0.


The syntax of the no tftp-server command is:

no tftp-server

The no tftp-server command is in the config command mode.

The no tftp-server command has no parameters or values.

copy config tftp command

The copy config tftp command copies the current configuration file onto the
TFTP server. The syntax for the copy config tftp command is:

copy config tftp [address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>] filename <WORD>

The copy config tftp command is in the privExec command mode.

Table 78 describes the parameters and variables for the copy config tftp
command.

Table 78 copy config tftp command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

address Specifies the TFTP server IP address; enter in dotted-decimal


<XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> notation.
filename <WORD> Specifies filename that you want to copy the configuration file
onto the TFTP server. Enter the name you want the
configuration file to have on the TFTP server.

copy tftp config command

The copy tftp config command retrieves the system configuration file from
the TFTP server and uses the retrieved information as the current configuration on
the system.The syntax for the copy tftp config command is:

copy tftp config [address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>] filename <WORD>

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 279

The copy tftp config command is in the privExec command mode.

Table 79 describes the parameters and variables for the copy tftp config
command.

Table 79 copy tftp config command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

address Specifies the TFTP server IP address; enter in dotted-decimal


<XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> notation.
filename <WORD> Enter the name of the configuration file you want to copy from
the TFTP server.

Setting the default management interface

You can use cmd-interface command to set the default management interface
when you connect to Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 through console port or
Telnet. This selection is stored in NVRAM and propagated to all units in a stack
configuration.

On startup, the switch or stack displays the banner and prompts the user to press
[Ctrl}+y. After entering these characters, the system displays either a menu or the
Nortel Command Line Interface (NCLI) prompt, depending on which is set using
this command.

When using the console port, you must logout for the new mode to display. When
using Telnet, all subsequent Telnet sessions display the selection.

cmd-interface command

The cmd-interface command allows you to set the default management


interface when you use the console port or Telnet.

The syntax for the cmd-interface command is:

cmd-interface {cli|menu}

The cmd-interface command is in the privExec command mode.

System Configuration Guide


280 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

Table 80 describes the parameters and variables for the cmd-interface


command.

Table 80 cmd-interface command parameters and variables

Parameters and variables Description

cli | menu Allows you to set the default management system when
using console port or Telnet:
clithe system automatically enters the CLI mode
and displays the CLI prompt after you enter Crtl+Y
menuthe system automatically enters the CI menu
mode and displays the menus after you enter Ctrl+Y.

Customizing the opening banner

You can customize the banner that appears when you connect to the Ethernet
Switch 325/425. You can customize the text that reads NORTEL. However you
cannot customize the second line that reads Enter [Ctrl]+y to begin.

The Banner Control feature provides an option to specify the banner text. If you
choose not to display the banner, the system enters the command mode through
the default command interface. You do not have to press the Ctrl+y keys.

The Banner display that you select is used for subsequent console sessions. For
executing the new mode in the console, you must logout. For Telnet access, all
subsequent sessions use the selected mode.

This section covers the following commands:

banner command for displaying banner


show banner command on page 281
no banner command on page 281

banner command for displaying banner

The banner command for displaying banner specifies the banner displayed at
startup; either static or custom. The syntax for the banner command to display
banner is:

banner [ custom | static | disabled | <1-15> LINE]

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 281

The banner command for displaying banner is in the config mode.

Table 81 describes the parameters for the banner command.

Table 81 banner command parameters

Parameters Description

static Displays the default agent-banner.


custom Displays the custom agent-banner.
disabled Skips the agent-banner display.
<1-15> LINE Fills the Nth line of the custom banner (1<N<15) with the
text specified in LINE.

show banner command

The show banner command displays the banner. The syntax for the show
banner command is:

show banner [ custom | static ]

The show banner command is in the config mode.

Table 82 describes the parameters for the banner command.

Table 82 show banner command parameters

Parameters Description

static Displays default banner


custom Displays custom banner
(if empty) Displays static, custom or disabled status if
parameter is not entered.

no banner command

The no banner command allows you to clear all lines of a previously stored
custom banner. The syntax for the no banner command is:

no banner

System Configuration Guide


282 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

The no banner command is in the config mode.

Displaying the ARP table


The show arp-table command displays the arp table of the device. The
syntax for the show arp-table command is:

show arp-table

The show arp-table command is in the exec command mode.

The show arp-table command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 103 displays a sample output of the show arp-table command.

Figure 103 show arp-table command output

425-48T#show arp-table
Port IP Address MAC Address
---- --------------- -----------------
37 192.168.151.1 00:80:2D:6E:47:82
425-48T#

Displaying interfaces
You can view the status of all interfaces on the switch or stack, including
MultiLink Trunk membership, link status, autonegotiation, and speed. This
section covers:

show interfaces command


show interfaces config command

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 283

show interfaces command

The show interfaces command displays the current configuration and status
of all interfaces. The syntax for the show interfaces command is:

show interfaces [names] [<portlist>]

The show interfaces command is in the exec command mode.

Table 83 describes the parameters and variables for the show interfaces
command.

Table 83 show interfaces command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

names <portlist> Displays the interface names; enter specific ports if you want to
see only those.

Figure 104 displays a sample output of the show interfaces names


command.

Figure 104 show interfaces names command output

425_48T SW 1.1 in SC2-02 LAB>show interfaces names 1-3


Port Name
---- ----------------------------------------------------------------
1 LabBldg4
2 Testing
3 Floor1Bldg2
425_48T#

Figure 105 Shows a sample output of the show interfaces command without
the names variable.

System Configuration Guide


284 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

Figure 105 show interfaces command output

425-48T(config-if)#show interfaces
Status Auto Flow
Port Trunk Admin Oper Link LinkTrap Negotiation Speed Duplex Control
---- ----- ------- ---- ---- -------- ----------- -------- ------ -------
1 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
2 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
3 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
4 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
5 Enable Down Down Enabled Custom
6 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
7 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
8 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
9 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
10 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
11 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
12 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
13 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
14 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
15 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
16 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
17 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
18 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
19 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled
425-48T(config-if)#

show interfaces config command

The show interfaces config command displays the current operational


status of interfaces and provides supplementary information about the current port
settings for Spanning Tree Protocol.

The syntax for the show interfaces config command is:

show interfaces [<portlist>] config

The show interfaces config command is in the privExec command mode.

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 285

Table 83 describes the parameters and variables for the show interfaces
config command.

Table 84 show interfaces config command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

<portlist> Enter the ports you want to display.

Figure 104 displays a sample output of the show interfaces config


command.

Figure 106 show interfaces config command output

425 (config)#show interfaces 1/1,1/2 config


Status Auto Flow
Port Trunk Admin Oper Link LinkTrap Negotiation Speed Duplex Control
--------- ----- ------ --- --- ------- ---------- ----- ------ ------
1 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled

*****Spanning-tree port configurations*****


Port Role State STP Status Oper Status
---- ---------- ---------- ---------- -----------
1 Root Forwarding Enabled Enabled

Saving the configuration to NVRAM


You can save your configuration parameters to Non-Volatile RAM (NVRAM)
using any of the following CLI commands:

copy config nvram command on page 285


write memory command on page 286
save config command on page 286

copy config nvram command

The copy config nvram command copies the current configuration to


NVRAM. The syntax for the copy config nvram command is:

System Configuration Guide


286 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

copy config nvram

The copy config nvram command is in the privExec command mode.

The copy config nvram command has no parameters or variables.

Note: The system automatically issues the copy config nvram


command periodically. See Enabling and disabling autosave on
page 287 for details.

write memory command

The write memory command copies the current configuration to NVRAM. The
syntax for the write memory command is:

write memory

The write memory command is in the privExec command mode.

The write memory command has no parameters or variables.

save config command

The save config command copies the current configuration to NVRAM. The
syntax for the save config command is:

save config

The save config command is in the privExec command mode.

The save config command has no parameters or variables.

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 287

Enabling and disabling autosave


The Ethernet Switch 325/425 performs a check every sixty seconds to detect
changes in the configuration file or a new log message in the non-volatile storage.
If any of these two events occurs, the switch automatically saves its configuration
and the non-volatile log to flash memory. Autosave also automatically saves your
configuration information across reboots.

You can enable or disable this feature. When you disable autosave, changes in the
configuration file are not saved to the flash memory.

This section covers the following commands:

show autosave command


autosave enable command on page 288
no autosave enable command on page 288
default autosave enable command on page 288

Note: You can use the CLI command copy config nvram to force
a manual save of the configuration when autosave is disabled.

show autosave command

The show autosave command displays the status of the autosave feature, either
enabled or disabled. The syntax for the show autosave command is:

show autosave

The show autosave command is in the privExec command mode.

The show autosave command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 107 displays sample output from the show autosave command.

System Configuration Guide


288 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

Figure 107 show autosave command output

425-48T(config-if)#show autosave
Auto Save: Enabled
425-48T(config-if)#

autosave enable command

The autosave enable command enables the autosave feature. The syntax for
the autosave enable command is:

autosave enable

The autosave enable command is in the config command mode.

The autosave enable command has no parameters or variables.

no autosave enable command

The no autosave enable command disables the autosave feature. The syntax
for the no autosave enable command is:

no autosave enable

The no autosave enable command is in the config command mode.

The no autosave enable command has no parameters or variables.

default autosave enable command


The default autosave enable command defaults the autosave feature to the
default value of enabled. The syntax for the default autosave enable
command is:

default autosave enable

The default autosave enable command is in the config command mode.

The default autosave enable command has no parameters or variables.

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 289

Setting time on network elements using Simple Network


Time Protocol
The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) feature synchronizes the Universal
Coordinated Time (UTC) to an accuracy within 1 second. This feature adheres to
the IEEE RFC 2030 (MIB is the s5agent). With this feature, the system can obtain
the time from any RFC 2030-compliant NTP/SNTP server.

Note: If you have trouble using this feature, try various NTP servers.
Some NTP servers may be overloaded or currently inoperable.

show sntp command


Displaying system information on page 273
sntp enable command on page 290
no sntp enable command on page 290
sntp server primary address command on page 291
sntp server secondary address command on page 291
no sntp server command on page 292
sntp sync-now command on page 293
sntp sync-interval command on page 293

show sntp command

The show sntp command displays the SNTP information, as well as the
configured NTP servers. The syntax for the show sntp command is:

show sntp

The show sntp command is in the privExec command mode.

The show sntp command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 108 displays sample output from the show sntp command.

System Configuration Guide


290 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

Figure 108 show sntp command output

425-48T(config-if)#show sntp
SNTP Status: Disabled
Primary server address: 0.0.0.0
Secondary server address: 0.0.0.0
Sync interval: 24 hours
Last sync source: 0.0.0.0
Primary server sync failures: 0
Secondary server sync failures: 0
Last sync time: Not Set
Next sync time: Not Set
Current time: Not Set
425-48T(config-if)#

sntp enable command

Note: The default setting for SNTP is disabled.

The sntp enable command enables SNTP. The syntax for the sntp enable
command is:

sntp enable

The sntp enable command is in the config command mode.

The sntp enable command has no parameters or variables.

no sntp enable command

The no sntp enable command disables SNTP. The syntax for the no sntp
enable command is:

no sntp enable

The no sntp enable command is in the config command mode.

The no sntp enable command has no parameters or variables.

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 291

sntp server primary address command

The sntp server primary address command specifies the IP addresses of


the primary NTP server. The syntax for the sntp server primary address
command is:

sntp server primary address <A.B.C.D>

The sntp server primary address command is in the config command


mode.

Table 85 describes the parameters and variables for the sntp server primary
address command.

Table 85 sntp server primary address command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

<A.B.C.D> Enter the IP address of the primary NTP server.

The default is 0.0.0.0.

sntp server secondary address command

The sntp server secondary address command specifies the IP addresses


of the secondary NTP server. The syntax for the sntp server secondary
address command is:

sntp server secondary address <A.B.C.D>

The sntp server secondary address command is in the config command


mode.

System Configuration Guide


292 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

Table 86 describes the parameters and variables for the sntp server
secondary address command.

Table 86 sntp server secondary address command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

<A.B.C.D> Enter the IP address of the secondary NTP server.

The default is 0.0.0.0.

no sntp server command

The no sntp server command clears the NTP server IP addresses. The syntax
for the no sntp server command is:

no sntp server <primary|secondary>

The no sntp server command is in the config command mode.

Table 87 describes the parameters and variables for the no sntp server
command.

Table 87 no sntp server command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

<primary|secondary> Enter the NTP server you want to clear:


primaryclears the IP address for the primary NTP
server
secondaryclears the IP address for the secondary NTP
server

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 293

sntp sync-now command

The sntp sync-now command forces a manual synchronization with the NTP
server.

Note: You must have SNTP enabled before this command can take
effect.

The syntax for the sntp sync-now command is:

sntp sync-now

The sntp sync-now command is in the config command mode.

The sntp sync-now command has no parameters or variables.

sntp sync-interval command

The sntp sync-interval command specifies recurring synchronization with


the NTP server in hours relative to initial synchronization. The syntax for the
sntp sync-interval command is:

sntp sync-interval <0-168>

The sntp sync-interval command is in the config command mode.

Table 88 describes the parameters and variables for the sntp sync-interval
command.

Table 88 sntp sync-interval command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

<0-168> Enter the number of hours you want for periodic synchronization
with the NTP server.

Note: 0 is boot-time only, and 168 is once a week; the default


value is 24 hours.

System Configuration Guide


294 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

Setting local time zone


SNTP uses Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) for all time synchronizations so it
is not affected by different time zones. In order for the switch report the correct
time for your local time zone and daylight savings time, you must use the
following commands:

clock time-zone on page 294


no clock time-zone on page 295
clock summer-time on page 295
no clock summer-time on page 296
show clock time-zone on page 296
show clock summer-time on page 296

clock time-zone

The clock time-zone command sets the local time zone relative to Universal
Coordinated Time (UTC). The syntax for the clock time-zone command is:

clock time-zone <zone> <hours> <minutes>

The clock time-zone command is in the config command mode.

Table 89 describes the parameters and variables for the clock time-zone
command.

Table 89 clock time-zone command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

zone Time zone acronym that can be displayed when showing system
time (Range: Up to 4 characters)
hours Hours difference from UTC. (Valid Range: 12 to +12)
minutes Optional minutes difference from UTC. (Range: 059)

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 295

no clock time-zone

The no clock time-zone command disables the clock time zone feature. The
syntax for the no clock time-zone command is:

no clock time-zone

The no clock time-zone command is in the config command mode.

The no clock time-zone command has no parameters or variables.

clock summer-time

The clock summer-time command sets the daylight savings time with start
and end dates. The syntax for the clock summer-time command is:

clock summer-time <zone> [date {<day> <month> <year>


<hh:mm>} {<day> <month> <year> <hh:mm>}] [<offset>]

The clock summer-time command is in the config command mode.

Table 90 describes the parameters and variables for the clock summer- time
command.

Table 90 clock summer-time command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

zone The acronym to display when summer time is in effect. If


unspecified default to the time zone acronym. (Range: up to 4
characters)
date {<day> <month> The first date specifies when summer time should start and the
<year> <hh:mm>} second date specifies when summer time should end.
{<day> <month> day: day of the month (Range: 1 to 31)
<year> <hh:mm>}
month: month (Range: first three letters by name)
hh:mm: time in military format, in hours and minutes
Note: <day> <month> parameters can also be entered in order:
<month> <day>.
offset Number of minutes to add during summer time (Range: 1 to
1440).

System Configuration Guide


296 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

no clock summer-time

The no clock summer-time command disables the daylight savings time


feature. The syntax for the no clock summer-time command is:

no clock summer-time

The no clock summer-time command is in the config command mode.

The no clock time-zone command has no parameters or variables.

show clock time-zone

The show clock time-zone command displays the local time zone settings.
The syntax for the show clock time-zone command is:

show clock time-zone

The show clock time-zone command is in the config command mode.

The show clock time-zone command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 109 displays sample output from the show clock time-zone
command.

Figure 109 show clock time-zone output

425 (config)#show clock time-zone


Time Zone is set to 'PDT', offset from UTC is -08:00

show clock summer-time

The show clock summer-time command displays the daylight savings time
settings. The syntax for the show clock summer-time command is:

show clock summer-time

The show clock summer-time command is in the config command mode.

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 297

The show clock summer-time command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 110 displays sample output from the show clock summer-time
command.

Figure 110 show clock summer-time

425(config)#show clock summer-time


Summer time is set to:
start: 1 April 2006 at 12:00
end: 1 October 2006 at 12:00
Offset: 60 minutes. Timezone will be 'DST'

Enabling Autopology
You can enable the Optivity* Autopology* protocol using the CLI. Refer to
www.nortel.com/support for information on Autopology. (The product family for
Optivity and Autotopology is Data and Internet.). This section covers the
following commands:

autotopology command
no autotopology command on page 298
default autotopology command on page 298

autotopology command

The autotopology command enables the Autotopology protocol. The syntax for
the autotopology command is:

autotopology

The autotopology command is in the config command mode.

The autotopology command has no parameters or values.

System Configuration Guide


298 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

no autotopology command

The no autotopology command disables the Autotopology protocol. The


syntax for the no autotopology command is:

no autotopology

The no autotopology command is in the config command mode.

The no autotopology command has no parameters or values.

default autotopology command

The default autotopology command enables the Autotopology protocol. The


syntax for the default autotopology command is:

default autotopology

The default autotopology command is in the config command mode.

The default autotopology command has no parameters or values.

show autotopology settings

The show autotopology settings command displays information on the


Autotopology configuration. The syntax for the
show autotopology settings command is:

show autotopology settings

The show autotopology settings command is in the privExec mode.

The show autotopology settings command has no parameters or variables.


Figure 111 displays a sample output of the show autotopology settings
command.

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 299

Figure 111 show autotopology settings command output

425-48T#show autotopology settings


Autotopology: Enabled
Last NMM Table Change: 1 days, 01:08:24
Maximum NMM Table Entries: 100
Current NMM Table Entries: 7
425-48T#

show autotopology nmm-table

The show autotopology nmm-table command displays information about


the network management module (NMM) table. The syntax for the
show autotopology nmm-table command is:

show autotopology nmm-table

The show autotopology nmm-table command is in the privExec mode.

The show autotopology nmm-table command has no parameters or


variables.

Figure 112 displays a sample output of the show autotopology nmm-table


command.

Figure 112 show autotopology nmm-table command output

425-48T#show autotopology nmm-table


LSlot RSlot
LPort IP Addr Seg ID MAC Addr Chassis Type BT LS CS RPort
----- --------------- -------- ------------ ---------------- -- --- ---- -----
0/ 0 192.168.151.175 0x000000 000FCDBF1E81 425-48T 12 Yes HTBT NA
1/37 192.168.151.1 0x00030d 00802D6E4738 1100 12 Yes HTBT 3/13
1/37 192.168.151.170 0x000115 000CF8610001 5510-24T 12 Yes HTBT 1/21
1/37 192.168.151.171 0x000115 000F6A822EC1 325-24G 12 Yes HTBT 1/21
1/37 192.168.151.172 0x000115 0009978982C1 460-24T-PWR 12 Yes HTBT 1/21
1/37 192.168.151.174 0x000113 000F6A823621 325-24T 12 Yes HTBT 1/19
1/37 192.168.151.176 0x000107 000F3DE52801 3510-24T 12 Yes HTBT 1/ 7

System Configuration Guide


300 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

Configuring LLDP using the CLI


You can enable the LLDP using the CLI. For more information about LLDP, see
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (IEEE 802.1ab) on page 40. This section covers
the following commands:

lldp command
default lldp command on page 301
lldp port config notification command on page 302
no lldp port config notification command on page 302
default lldp port config notification command on page 303
lldp tx-tlv command on page 303
no lldp tx-tlv command on page 304
default lldp tx-tlv command on page 305
lldp port status command on page 305
no lldp port status command on page 306
default lldp port status command on page 306
show lldp command on page 307
show lldp port command on page 309

lldp command

The lldp command sets the LLDP transmission parameters. The syntax for the
lldp command is:

lldp [tx-interval <5-327698>] [tx-hold-multiplier <2-10>]


[reinit-delay <1-10>] [tx-delay <1-8192>]
[notification-interval <5-3600>]

The lldp command is in the config command mode.

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 301

Table 58 describes the parameters and variables for the lldp command.

Table 91 lldp command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

tx-interval Sets the interval between successive transmission cycles.


<5-327698>
tx-hold-multiplier Sets the multiplier for tx-interval used to compute the Time To Live
<2-10> value for the TTL TLV.
reinit-delay <1-10> Sets the delay for re-initialization attempt if the adminStatus is
disabled.
tx-delay <1-8192> Sets the minimum delay between successive LLDP frame
transmissions.
notification-interval Sets the interval between successive transmissions of LLDP
<5-3600> notifications.

default lldp command

The default lldp command sets the LLDP transmission parameters to their
default values. The syntax for the default lldp command is:

default lldp [tx-interval] [tx-hold-multiplier]


[reinit-delay] [tx-delay] [notification-interval]

If no parameters are specified, the default lldp command sets all parameters
to their default values.

The default lldp command is in the config command mode.

Table 92 describes the parameters and variables for the default lldp
command.

Table 92 default lldp command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

tx-interval Sets retransmit interval to the default value (30).


tx-hold-multiplier Sets transmission multiplier to the default value (4).

System Configuration Guide


302 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

Table 92 default lldp command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables
reinit-delay Sets reinitialize delay to the default value (2).
tx-delay Sets transmission delay to the default value (2).
notification-interval Sets notification interval to the default value (5).

lldp port config notification command

The lldp port config notification command enables notification when


new neighbor information is stored or when existing information is removed.

The syntax for the lldp port config notification command is:

lldp port <portlist> config notification

The lldp port config notification command is in the config-if


command mode.

Table 93 describes the parameters and variables for the lldp port config
notification command.

Table 93 lldp port config notification command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the ports affected by the command.

no lldp port config notification command

The no lldp port config notification command disables config


notification. The syntax for the no lldp port config notification
command is:

no lldp port <portlist> config notification

The no lldp port config notification command is in the config-if


command mode.

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 303

Table 94 describes the parameters and variables for the no lldp port config
notification command.

Table 94 no lldp port config notification command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the ports affected by the command.

default lldp port config notification command

The default lldp port config notification command sets config


notification to its default value (disabled). The syntax for the default lldp
port config notification command is:

default lldp port <portlist> config notification

The default lldp port config notification command is in the


config-if command mode.

Table 94 describes the parameters and variables for the default lldp port
config notification command.

Table 95 no lldp port config notification command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the ports affected by the command.

lldp tx-tlv command

The lldp tx-tlv command specifies the optional TLVs to include in the
transmitted LLDPDUs. The syntax for the lldp tx-tlv command is:

lldp tx-tlv [port <portlist>] [port-desc] [sys-name]


[sys-desc] [sys-cap] [local-mgmt-addr]

The lldp tx-tlv command is in the config-if command mode.

System Configuration Guide


304 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

Table 96 describes the parameters and variables for the lldp tx-tlv command.

Table 96 lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the ports affected by the command.


port-desc Port description TLV
sys-name System name TLV
sys-desc System description TLV
sys-cap System capabilities TLV
local-mgmt-addr Local management address TLV

no lldp tx-tlv command

The no lldp tx-tlv command specifies the optional TLVs not to include in
the transmitted LLDPDUs. The syntax for the lldp tx-tlv command is:

no lldp tx-tlv [port <portlist>] [port-desc] [sys-name]


[sys-desc] [sys-cap] [local-mgmt-addr]

The no lldp tx-tlv command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 97 describes the parameters and variables for the no lldp tx-tlv
command.

Table 97 no lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the ports affected by the command.


port-desc Port description TLV.
sys-name System name TLV
sys-desc System description TLV
sys-cap System capabilities TLV
local-mgmt-addr Local management address TLV

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 305

default lldp tx-tlv command

The default lldp tx-tlv command specifies the optional TLVs not to
include in the transmitted LLDPDUs (by default, the optional TLVs are not
included in LLDPDUs). The syntax for the default lldp tx-tlv command
is:

default lldp tx-tlv [port <portlist>] [port-desc] [sys-name]


[sys-desc] [sys-cap] [local-mgmt-addr]

The default lldp tx-tlv command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 97 describes the parameters and variables for the default lldp tx-tlv
command.

Table 98 default lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the ports affected by the command.


port-desc Port description TLV. (default value is false: not included)
sys-name System name TLV (default value is false: not included)
sys-desc System description TLV (default value is false: not included)
sys-cap System capabilities TLV (default value is false: not included)
local-mgmt-addr Local management address TLV (default value is false: not
included)

lldp port status command


The lldp port status command sets the LLDPU transmit and receive status
on ports. The syntax for the lldp port status command is:

lldp port <portlist> status [rxOnly | txAndRx | txOnly]

The lldp port status command is in the config-if command mode.

System Configuration Guide


306 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

Table 99 describes the parameters and variables for the lldp port status
command.

Table 99 lldp port status command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the ports affected by the command.


rxOnly Enables LLDPU receive only.
txAndRx Enables LLDPU transmit and receive.
txOnly Enables LLDPU transmit only.

no lldp port status command

The no lldp port status command disables 802.1ab on ports. The syntax
for the no lldp port status command is:

no lldp port <portlist> status

The no lldp port status command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 100 describes the parameters and variables for the no lldp port
status command.

Table 100 no lldp port status command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the ports affected by the command.

default lldp port status command

The default lldp port status command sets the LLDPU transmit and
receive status on specified ports to its default value (txAndRx). The syntax for the
default lldp port status command is:

default lldp port <portlist> status

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 307

The default lldp port status command is in the config-if command


mode.

Table 101 describes the parameters and variables for the default lldp port
status command.

Table 101 default lldp port status command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the ports affected by the command.

show lldp command

The show lldp command displays configuration data for LLDP. The syntax for
the show lldp command is:

show lldp [local-sys-data] [mgmt-sys-data] [stats]

The show lldp command is in the exec command mode.

Table 102 describes the parameters and variables for the show lldp command.

Table 102 show lldp command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

local-sys-data Displays local LLDP system data.


mgmt-sys-data Displays LLDP management data.
stats Displays LLDP statistics.

System Configuration Guide


308 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

Figure 113 displays the output from the show lldp local-sys-data
command.

Figure 113 show lldp local-sys-data command output

425>show lldp local-sys-data


-------------------------------------------------------------------------
LLDP local-sys-data chassis
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
ChassisIdSubtype ChassisId SysName SysCap Supported Enabled

SysDesc
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:dd 425 B B
Ethernet Switch 425-48T HW:0C FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
LLDP local-sys-data port
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Num PortIdSubtype PortId PortDesc
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1/1 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:00 port1
1/2 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:01 port2
1/3 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:02 port3
1/4 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:03 port4
1/5 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:04 port5
1/6 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:05 port6
1/7 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:06 port7
----More (q=Quit, space/return=Continue)----
Sys capability: O-Other; R-Repeater; B-Bridge; W-WLAN accesspoint; r-Router;
T-Telephone; D-DOCSIS cable device; S-Station only.

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 309

Figure 114 displays the output from the show lldp mgmt-sys-data
command.

Figure 114 show lldp mgmt-sys-data command output

425>show lldp mgmt-sys-data


-------------------------------------------------------------------------
lldp mgmt-sys-data
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
MgmtAddr MgmtIfId MgmtAddrOID
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
ipV4 10.128.100.100 0 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------

Figure 115 displays the output from the show lldp stats command.

Figure 115 show lldp stats command output

425>show lldp stats


-------------------------------------------------------------------------
lldp stats
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
LastChange RemTable RemTable RemTable RemTable
Time Inserts Deletes Drops Ageouts
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
00:01:18.00 1 0 0 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------

show lldp port command

The show lldp port command displays configuration data for LLDP ports.
The syntax for the show lldp port command is:

show lldp [port <portlist>] [neighbor] [neighbor-mgmt-addr]


[rx-stats] [tx-stats] [tx-tlv]

The show lldp port command is in the exec command mode.

System Configuration Guide


310 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

Table 102 describes the parameters and variables for the show lldp port
command.

Table 103 show lldp port command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the ports affected by the command.


neighbor Displays LLDP neighbors.
neighbor-mgmt-addr Displays LLDP management addresses for neighbors.
rx-stats Displays LLDP receive statistics.
tx-stats Displays LLDP transmit statistics.
tx-tlv Displays LLDP transmit TLVs.

Figure 116 displays the output from the show lldp port neighbor
command.

Figure 116 show lldp port neighbor command output

425>show lldp port 1/1 neighbor


------------------------------------------------------------------------
lldp neighbor
------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port Time Index ChassisIdSubtype ChassisId SysCap Supported Enabled

------------------------------------------------------------------------
SysName PortIdSubtype PortId PortDesc
------------------------------------------------------------------------
SysDesc
------------------------------------------------------------------------
3/1 78 1 MAC address 00:09:68:b2:9d:60 B B
425 stacks v360 MAC address 00:09:68:b2:9d:82 port24
Ethernet Switch 425-24T HW:0B FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sys capability: O-Other; R-Repeater; B-Bridge; W-WLAN accesspoint;
r-Router; T-Telephone; D-DOCSIS cable device; S-Station only.

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 311

Figure 117 displays the output from the show lldp port
neighbor-mgmt-addr command.

Figure 117 show lldp port neighbor-mgmt-addr command output

425>show lldp port 1/1 neighbor-mgmt-addr


------------------------------------------------------------------------
lldp neighbor-mgmt-addr
------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port Time Index ChassisIdSubtype ChassisId
PortIdSubtype PortId
MgmtAddr MgmtIfId MgmtAddrOID
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1/1 439194 5 MAC address 00:09:97:a2:9d:80
MAC address 00:09:97:a2:9d:98
ipV4 10.128.100.13 0 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.2
------------------------------------------------------------------------

Figure 118 displays the output from the show lldp rx-stats command.

Figure 118 show lldp port rx-stats command output

425>show lldp port 1/1 rx-stats


------------------------------------------------------------------------
lldp rx-stats
------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port Frames Frames Frames TLVs TLVs AgeOuts
Num Discarded Errors Total Discarded Unrecognized
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1/1 0 105 0 0 0
------------------------------------------------------------------------

Figure 119 displays the output from the show lldp tx-stats command.

System Configuration Guide


312 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

Figure 119 show lldp port tx-stats command output

425>show lldp port 1/1 tx-stats


-------------------------------------------------------------------------
lldp tx-stats
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port Frames
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
1/1 123
-------------------------------------------------------------------------

Figure 120 displays the output from the show lldp stats command.

Figure 120 show lldp port tx-tlv command output

425>show lldp port 1/1 tx-tlv


------------------------------------------------------------------------
lldp port tlvs
------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port PortDesc SysName SysDesc SysCap MgmtAddr
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1/1 true true true true false

Configuring LEDs on the display panel


The blink-leds command allows you to configure the LEDs on the display
panel to identify the unit. The syntax of the blink-leds command is:

blink-leds <off> <stop> <unit>

The blink-leds command is in the enable mode.

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 313

Table 104 describes the parameters for the blink-leds command.

Table 104 blink-leds command parameters and variables

Parameters and Variables Description

off Sets the LEDs to stop blinking.


time Indicates the duration for the LEDs to blink in
order to identify the unit.
unit Specifies the unit number to which the command
is applied.

Configuring UI button

ui-button enable command

The ui-button enable command enables the UI button.

The syntax for the ui-button enable command is:

ui-button enable

The ui-button enable command is in the privExec mode.

The ui-button enable command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 121 displays a sample output of the ui-button enable command.

Figure 121 ui-button enable command output

425-48T(config)#ui-button enable
425-48T(config)#

System Configuration Guide


314 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

ui-button unit command

The ui-button unit command enables UI button on selected unit in the range
of <1-8>.

Note: This command is specific to stacking mode only.

The syntax for the ui-button unit command is:

ui-button unit <unit #>

The ui-button unit command is in the config command mode.

The ui-button unit command has no parameters or variables.

show ui-button

You can check if the UI button is enabled or disabled using the show ui button
command. The syntax for the show ui-button command is:

show ui-button

The show ui-button command is in the privExec command mode.

The show ui-button command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 122 displays sample output from the show ui-button command.

Figure 122 show ui-button command output

425-48T#show ui-button
Unit # Button Mode
------ -------------
1 Enabled
425-48T#

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 315

default ui-button command

The default ui-button command restores UI button to its default


configuration. The syntax for the default ui-button command is:

default ui-button

The default ui-button command is in the config command mode.

The default ui-button command has no parameters or values.

no ui-button command

The no ui-button command disables the UI button.

The syntax for the no ui-button command is:

no ui-button

The no ui-button command is in the config command mode.

The no ui-button command has no parameters or values.

Upgrading software
You can download the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 software image that is
located in non-volatile flash memory. To download the Ethernet Switches 325 and
425 software image, a properly configured Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
server must be present in your network, and the policy switch must have an IP
address. To learn how to configure the switch or stack IP address, refer to
Assigning and clearing IP addresses on page 252.

Caution: Do not interrupt power to the device during the software


download process. A power interruption can corrupt the firmware image.

This section covers:

System Configuration Guide


316 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

download command

download command

The download command upgrades the software for the Ethernet Switches 325
and 425. You can upgrade both the software image and the diagnostics image. If
you upgrade to a stack configuration, the entire stack will be upgraded, and the
new image is loaded onto every unit of the stack.

Note: The system resets after downloading a new image.

The syntax for the download command is:

download [address <ip>] {image <image-name>|image-if-newer


<image-name>|diag <filename>} [no-reset]

The download command is in the privExec command mode.

Note: You can use the download command without parameters. The
system displays the most recently used TFTP serve IP address and file
name; if you still want to use these, press Enter You can also change
these.

Table 105 describes the parameters and variables for the download command.

Table 105 download command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

address <ip> Specifies the IP address of the TFTP server you want to use.
Note: If this parameter is omitted, the system goes to the server
specified by the tftp-server command.
image Enter the name of the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 software
<image-name> image you want to download.
image-if-newer Enter the name of the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 software
<image-name> image of the newer version you want to download.

320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 317

Table 105 download command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables
diag <filename> Enter the name of the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 diagnostics
image you want to download.
no-reset Download the specified software without resetting the unit.

The software download process automatically completes without user


intervention. The process erases the contents of flash memory and replaces it with
a new software image. Take care not to interrupt the download process until after
it runs to completion (the process can take up to 10 minutes, depending on
network conditions).

When the download process is complete, the switch automatically resets and the
new software image initiates a self-test. The system returns a message after
successfully downloading a new image.

Figure 123 shows a sample output of the download command.

Figure 123 download message for Ethernet Switch 425-48T

Download Image [/]


Saving Image [-]
Finishing Upgrading Image

During the download process, the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 is not
operational. You can monitor the progress of the download process by observing
the LED indications.

System Configuration Guide


318 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI

320985-A
319

Chapter 8
Ethernet port management using the CLI

This chapter describes how to enable a port, name a port and enable rate limiting.
This chapter covers the following topics:

Enabling or disabling a port


Naming ports on page 321
Setting port speed on page 323
Enabling flow control on page 326
Enabling rate-limiting on page 329
Enabling Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements (CANA) on page 331

Enabling or disabling a port


You can enable or disable a port using the CLI. This section covers the following
commands:

shutdown command for the port


no shutdown command on page 320

shutdown command for the port

The shutdown [port <portlist>] command disables the port.

The syntax for the shutdown [port <portlist>] command is:

shutdown [port <portlist>]

System Configuration Guide


320 Chapter 8 Ethernet port management using the CLI

Table 106 describes the parameters and variables for the shutdown [port
<portlist>] command.

Table 106 shutdown [port <portlist>] command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to shut down or disable. Enter the port
numbers you want to disable.

Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number
you specified in the interface command.

The shutdown [port <portlist>] command is in the config-if command


mode.

Figure 124 displays sample output from the shutdown [port <portlist>]
command.

Figure 124 shutdown [port <portlist>] command output

425-48T(config-if)#shutdown port 2
425-48T(config-if)#

no shutdown command

The no shutdown command enables the port. The syntax for the no shutdown
command is:

no shutdown [port <portlist>]

The no shutdown command is in the config-if command mode.

320985-A
Chapter 8 Ethernet port management using the CLI 321

Table 107 describes the parameters and variables for the no shutdown
command.

Table 107 no shutdown command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to enable. Enter the port numbers you
want to disable.

Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number
you specified in the interface command.

Naming ports
You can name a port using the CLI. This section covers the following commands:

name command
no name command on page 322
default name command on page 322

name command

The name command allows you to name ports or to change the name. The syntax
for the name command is:

name [port <portlist>] <LINE>

The name command is in the config-if command mode.

System Configuration Guide


322 Chapter 8 Ethernet port management using the CLI

Table 108 describes the parameters and variables for the name command.

Table 108 name command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to name.

Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number
you specified in the interface command.
<LINE> Enter up to 26 alphanumeric characters.

no name command

The no name command clears the port names; it resets the field to an empty
string. The syntax for the no name command is:

no name [port <portlist>]

The no name command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 109 describes the parameters and variables for the no name command.

Table 109 no name command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to clear of names.

Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number
you specified in the interface command.

default name command

The default name command clears the port names; it resets the field to an empty
string. The syntax for the default name command is:

default name [port <portlist>]

The default name command is in the config-if command mode.

320985-A
Chapter 8 Ethernet port management using the CLI 323

Table 110 describes the parameters and variables for the default name
command.

Table 110 default name command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to clear of names.

Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number
you specified in the interface command.

Setting port speed


You can set the speed and duplex mode for a port. This section covers:

speed command
default speed command on page 324
duplex command on page 325
default duplex command on page 326

speed command

The speed command sets the speed of the port. The syntax for the speed
command is:

speed [port <portlist>] {10|100|1000|auto}

The speed command is in the config-if command mode.

System Configuration Guide


324 Chapter 8 Ethernet port management using the CLI

Table 111 describes the parameters and variables for the speed command.

Table 111 speed command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to configure the speed. Enter the port
numbers you want to configure.

Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number
you specified in the interface command.
10|100|1000|auto Sets speed to:
1010 Mb/s
100100 Mb/s
10001000 Mb/s or 1 GB/s
autoautonegotiation

Note: When you set the port speed for autonegotiation, ensure that the
other side of the link is also set for autonegotiation.

default speed command

The default speed command sets the speed of the port to the factory default
speed. The syntax for the default speed command is:

default speed [port <portlist>]

The default speed command is in the config-if command mode.

320985-A
Chapter 8 Ethernet port management using the CLI 325

Table 112 describes the parameters and variables for the default speed
command.

Table 112 default speed command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to set the speed to factory default.
Enter the port numbers you want to set.

Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number
you specified in the interface command.

duplex command

The duplex command specifies the duplex operation for a port. The syntax for
the duplex command is:

duplex [port <portlist>] {full|half|auto}

The duplex command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 113 describes the parameters and variables for the duplex command.

Table 113 duplex command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the port number to configure the duplex mode. Enter the
port number you want to configure, or all to configure all ports
simultaneously.

Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number
you specified in the interface command.
full|half|auto Sets duplex to:
fullfull-duplex mode
halfhalf-duplex mode
autoautonegotiation

System Configuration Guide


326 Chapter 8 Ethernet port management using the CLI

Note: When you set the duplex mode for autonegotiation, ensure that
the other side of the link is also set for autonegotiation.

default duplex command


The default duplex command sets the duplex operation for a port to the
factory default duplex value. The syntax for the default duplex command is:

default duplex [port <portlist>]

The default duplex command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 114 describes the parameters and variables for the default duplex
command.

Table 114 default duplex command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to reset the duplex mode to factory
default values. Enter the port numbers you want to configure, or all
to configure all ports simultaneously. The default value is
autonegotiation.

Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number
you specified in the interface command.

Enabling flow control


If you use a Gigabit Ethernet with the Ethernet Switch 425, you control traffic on
this port using the flowcontrol command. This section covers the following
commands:

flowcontrol command on page 327


no flowcontrol command on page 327
default flowcontrol command on page 328

320985-A
Chapter 8 Ethernet port management using the CLI 327

flowcontrol command

The flowcontrol command is used only on Gigabit Ethernet ports and controls
the traffic rates during congestion. The syntax for the flowcontrol command is:

flowcontrol [port <portlist>]


{asymmetric|symmetric|auto|disable}

The flowcontrol command is in the config-if mode.

Table 115 describes the parameters and variables for the flowcontrol
command.

Table 115 flowcontrol command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to configure for flow control.

Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port
number you specified in the interface command.
asymmetric|symmetric| Sets the mode for flow control:
auto|disable asymmetricenables the local port to perform flow control
on the remote port
symmetricenables the local port to perform flow control
autosets the port to automatically determine the flow
control mode (default)
disabledisables flow control on the port

no flowcontrol command
The no flowcontrol command is used only on Gigabit Ethernet ports and
disables flow control. The syntax for the no flowcontrol command is:

no flowcontrol [port <portlist>]

The no flowcontrol command is in the config-if mode.

System Configuration Guide


328 Chapter 8 Ethernet port management using the CLI

Table 116 describes the parameters and variables for the no flowcontrol
command.

Table 116 no flowcontrol command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to disable flow control.

Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port
number you specified in the interface command.

default flowcontrol command

The default flowcontrol command is used only on Gigabit Ethernet ports


and sets the flow control to auto, which automatically detects the flow control.
The syntax for the default flowcontrol command is:

default flowcontrol [port <portlist>]

The default flowcontrol command is in the config-if mode.

Table 117 describes the parameters and variables for the default flowcontrol
command.

Table 117 default flowcontrol command parameters and variables

Parameters and
Description
variables

port <portlist> Specifies the port numbers to default to auto flow control.

Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port
number you specified in the interface command.

320985-A
Chapter 8 Ethernet port management using the CLI 329

Enabling rate-limiting
You can limit the percentage of multicast traffic, or broadcast traffic, or both
using the CLI. For more information about rate-limiting, refer to Rate Limiting
Configuration screen on page 115.

This section covers:

show rate-limit command


rate-limit command on page 330
no rate-limit command on page 330
default rate-limit command on page 331

show rate-limit command

The show rate-limit command displays the rate-limiting settings and


statistics. The syntax for the show rate-limit command is:

show rate-limit

The show rate-limit command is in the privExec command mode.

The show rate-limit command has no parameters or variables.

Figure 125 displays sample output from the show rate-limit command.

Figure 125 show rate-limit command output

425-48T#show rate-limit
Packet Type Limit
----------- -----
Both 0 pps
425-48T#

System Configuration Guide


330 Chapter 8 Ethernet port management using the CLI

rate-limit command

The rate-limit command configures rate-limiting on the switch.

The syntax for the rate-limit command is:

rate-limit [multicast <pct>] [broadcast <pct>] [both <pct>]

The rate-limit command is in the config-if command mode.

Table 118 describes the parameters and variables for the rate-limit
command.

Table 118 rate-limit command parameters and variables

Parameters and values Description

multicast <pct>| Applies rate-limiting to the type of traffic. Enter an


broadcast <pct>|both integer between 1 and 10 to set the rate-limiting
<pct> percentage:
multicastapplies rate-limiting to
multicast packets
broadcastapplies rate-limiting to
broadcast packets
bothapplies rate-limiting to both multicast
and broadcast packets

no rate-limit command

The no rate-limit command disables rate-limiting on the switch. The syntax


for the no rate-limit command is:

no rate-limit

The no rate-limit command is in the config-if command mode.

320985-A
Chapter 8 Ethernet port management using the CLI 331

default rate-limit command

The default rate-limit command restores the rate-limiting value for the
switch to the default setting. The syntax for the default rate-limit command
is:

default rate-limit

The default rate-limit command is in the config-if command mode.

Enabling Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements


(CANA)
You can control the capabilities that are advertised by the Ethernet switch as part
of the auto-negotiation process using the Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements
(CANA) feature. When auto-negotiation is disabled, the hardware is configured
for a single (fixed) speed and duplex value. When auto-negotiation is enabled, the
advertisement made by the switch is a constant value based upon all speed and
duplex modes supported by the hardware. When auto-negotiating, the switch
selects the highest common operating mode supported between it and its link
partner.

This section covers:

show auto-negotiation-advertisements command


show auto-negotiation-capabilities command on page 332
auto-negotiation-advertisements command on page 333
no auto-negotiation-advertisements command on page 334
default auto-negotiation-advertisements command on page 335

show auto-negotiation-advertisements command

The show auto-negotiation-advertisements command displays the


current autonegotiation advertisements. The syntax for the show
auto-negotiation-advertisements command is:

show auto-negotiation-advertisements [port <portlist>]

System Configuration Guide


332 Chapter 8 Ethernet port management using the CLI

The show auto-negotiation-advertisements command is in the


userExec command mode.

Table 119 describes the parameters and variables for the show
auto-negotiation-advertisements command.

Table 119 show auto-negotiation-advertisements command

Parameters and values Description

port <portlist> Enter ports for which you want the current
autonegotiation advertisements displayed.

Figure 126 displays sample output from the show


auto-negotiation-advertisements command.

Figure 126 show auto-negotiation-advertisements command output

425-48T(config-if)#show auto-negotiation-advertisements port 4,8,10


Port Autonegotiation Advertised Capabilities
---- ----------------------------------------------------------------
4 10Full
8 10Full
10 10Full
425-48T(config-if)#

show auto-negotiation-capabilities command


The show auto-negotiation-capabilities command displays the
hardware advertisement capabilities for the switch. The syntax for the show
auto-negotiation-capabilities command is:

show auto-negotiation-capabilities [port <portlist>]

The show auto-negotiation-capabilities command is in the userExec


command mode.

320985-A
Chapter 8 Ethernet port management using the CLI 333

Table 120 describes the parameters and variables for the show
auto-negotiation-capabilities command.

Table 120 show auto-negotiation-capabilities command

Parameters and values Description

port <portlist> Enter ports for which you want the autonegotiation
capabilities displayed.

Figure 127 displays sample output from the show


auto-negotiation-capabilities command.

Figure 127 show auto-negotiation-capabilities command output


425-48T(config-if)#show auto-negotiation-capabilities port 5,6,10
Port Autonegotiation Capabilities
---- ----------------------------------------------------------------
5 10Full 10Half 100Full 100Half
6 10Full 10Half 100Full 100Half
10 10Full 10Half 100Full 100Half
425-48T(config-if)#

auto-negotiation-advertisements command

The auto-negotiation-advertisements command configures


advertisements for the switch. The syntax for the
auto-negotiation-advertisements command is:

auto-negotiation-advertisements [port <portlist>] [10-full]


[10-half] [100-full] [100-half] [1000-full] [1000-half]
[asymm-pause-frame] [pause-frame] [none]

The auto-negotiation-advertisements command is in the interface


configuration command mode.

System Configuration Guide


334 Chapter 8 Ethernet port management using the CLI

Table 121 describes the parameters and variables for the


auto-negotiation-advertisements command.

Table 121 auto-negotiation-advertisements command

Parameters and values Description

port <portlist> Enter ports for which you want to configure


advertisements.
[10-full] [10-half] These are speed-duplex-pause settings. Any
[100-full] [100-half] combination of these settings is allowed, but
[1000-full] [1000-half] parameters must be given in the order shown.
[asymm-pause-frame]
[pause-frame]
none Do not advertise any settings during
auto-negotiation.

no auto-negotiation-advertisements command

The no auto-negotiation-advertisements command clears all


advertisements for the switch. This command is used for testing. The syntax for
the no auto-negotiation-advertisements command is:

no auto-negotiation-advertisements [port <portlist>]

Note: The use of this command affects traffic and brings down the link.

The no auto-negotiation-advertisements command is in the interface


configuration command mode.

Table 122 describes the parameters and variables for the no


auto-negotiation-advertisements command.

Table 122 no auto-negotiation-advertisements command

Parameters and values Description

port <portlist> Enter ports for which you want to clear all
advertisements.

320985-A
Chapter 8 Ethernet port management using the CLI 335

default auto-negotiation-advertisements command

The default auto-negotiation-advertisements command sets default


advertisements for the switch. The syntax for the default
auto-negotiation-advertisements command is:

default auto-negotiation-advertisements [port <portlist>]

The default auto-negotiation-advertisements command is in the


interface configuration command mode.

Table 123 describes the parameters and variables for the default
auto-negotiation-advertisements command.

Table 123 default auto-negotiation-advertisements command

Parameters and values Description

port <portlist> Enter ports for which you want to set default
advertisements.

This feature allows you to customize the capabilities that you advertise. It also
allows you to control the capabilities that are advertised by the Ethernet switch as
part of the auto-negotiation process.

System Configuration Guide


336 Chapter 8 Ethernet port management using the CLI

320985-A
337

Chapter 9
Configuring the switch using Device Manager

The first four sections of this chapter describe how you can use Device Manager
to configure your switch, manage SNTP, and display topology information.

The chapter includes the following information:

Viewing Unit information


Viewing switch IP information on page 339
Editing the chassis configuration on page 343
Working with configuration files on page 358
Working with SNTP on page 362
Displaying topology information using Device Manager on page 364

Viewing Unit information


You can view unit information by using the Unit dialog box.

To open the Unit dialog box:

1 Double-click on a single unit or select the units you want to edit.


2 Do one of the following:
From the shortcut menu, choose Edit.
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Unit.
On the toolbar, click Edit.

System Configuration Guide


338 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager

The following sections provide a description of the tabs in the Edit > Unit dialog
box and details about each item on the tab.

Unit tab

To open the Unit tab:

From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Unit.

The Unit dialog box (Figure 128) opens with the Unit tab displayed.

Figure 128 Unit dialog box

Table 124 describes the Unit tab fields.

Table 124 Unit tab fields

Field Description

Type Specifies the type number.


Descr Specifies the type of switch.
Ver Specifies the hardware version number of the switch.
Sernum Specifies the serial number of the switch.

Rate Limit tab

To open the Rate Limit tab:

320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 339

1 From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Unit.
The Unit dialog box opens with the Unit tab displayed (Figure 128 on
page 338).
2 Click the Rate Limit tab.
The Rate limit tab opens (Figure 129).

Figure 129 Rate Limit tab

Table 125 describes the Rate Limit tab fields.

Table 125 Rate Limit tab fields

Field Description

Traffic Type Specifies the traffic type.


AllowedRatePps Allowed traffic rate packets per second. It is in the range of 0-262143
(0-3FFFFh).
Note: Rate Limiting feature is disabled when AllowedRatePps equals
to 0.
Enable When Enable is set to True, the TrafficType can either be multicast,
broadcast, or both.
Note: You can not set the Enabled field for both multicast and
broadcast TrafficeType to False at the same time. This is illegal
configuration.

Viewing switch IP information


You can view the switch IP information using the IP dialog box.

System Configuration Guide


340 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager

To open the IP dialog box:

From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > IP.

The Edit IP dialog box opens with the Globals tab displayed.

The following sections provide a description of the tabs in the Edit > IP dialog
box and details about each item on the tab.

Globals tab

To open the Globals tab:

From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > IP.

The IP dialog box opens (Figure 130) with the Globals tab displayed.

Figure 130 Globals tab

Table 126 describes the Globals tab fields.

Table 126 Globals tab fields

Field and MIB


Description
association

DefaultTTL Default value inserted into the Time-To-Live field of the IP header of
datagrams originated by the switch, whenever a TTL value is not
supplied by the transport layer protocol. Default value is 64.
ReasmTimeout Maximum number of seconds that received fragments are held while
they are awaiting reassembly by the switch. Default value is 60.

320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 341

Addresses tab

The Addresses tab shows the IP address information for the device.

To open the Addresses tab:

1 From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > IP.
The IP dialog box opens with the Globals tab displayed (Figure 130 on
page 340).

2 Click the Addresses tab.


The Addresses tab opens (Figure 131).

Figure 131 Edit IP dialog box IP Address tab

Table 127 describes the Address tab fields.

Table 127 Addresses tab fields

Field Description

Addr The device IP address.


NetMask The subnet mask address.
BcastAddr The value of the least-significant bit in the IP broadcast address used
for sending datagrams on the (logical) interface associated with the
IP address of this entry. For example, when the Internet standard
all-ones broadcast address is used, the value will be 1. This value
applies to both the subnet and network broadcasts addresses used
by the entity on this (logical) interface.
ReasmMaxSize The size of the largest IP datagram that this entity can reassemble
from incoming IP fragmented datagrams received on this interface.

System Configuration Guide


342 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager

ARP tab

The ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) tab shows the MAC addresses and the
associated IP addresses for the switch.

To open the ARP tab:

1 From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > IP.
The IP dialog box opens with the Globals tab displayed (Figure 130 on
page 340).

2 Click the ARP tab.


The ARP tab opens (Figure 132).

Figure 132 Edit IP dialog box ARP tab

Table 128 describes the ARP tab fields.

Table 128 ARP tab fields

Field Description

Interface The unit and port number.


MacAddress The unique hardware address of the device.
IpAddress The Internet Protocol address of the device used to represent a point
of attachment in a TCP/IP internetwork.
Type The type of mapping.

320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 343

Editing the chassis configuration


You can edit a chassis configuration from the Edit Chassis dialog box.

To open the Chassis dialog box:

1 Select the chassis.


2 Do one of the following:
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Chassis.
On the toolbar, click Edit.

The following sections provide a description of the tabs in the Edit > Chassis
dialog box and details about each field on the tab.

System tab

You can use the System tab to specify tracking information for a device, device
descriptions, and so on.

To open the System tab:

1 Select the chassis.


2 From the shortcut menu, choose Edit > Chassis.
The Chassis dialog box opens with the System tab displayed (Figure 133).

System Configuration Guide


344 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager

Figure 133 Edit Chassis dialog box System tab

Table 129 describes the System tab fields.

Table 129 System tab fields

Field Description

sysDescr The assigned system name.


sysUpTime The time since the system was last booted.
sysContact Type the contact information (in this case, an e-mail
address) for the system administrator.
sysName Type the name of this device.
sysLocation Type the physical location of this device.

320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 345

Table 129 System tab fields (continued)

Field Description

AuthenticationTraps Click to enable or disable. When you enable, SNMP traps


are sent to trap receivers for all SNMP access
authentication. When you disable, no traps are received.

To view traps, click the Trap toolbar button.

ReBoot By default, the switch will be in the Running mode. The


reboot command initiates a hardware reset.
AutoPVID Click to enable or disable. When you enable, AutoPVID is
activated. When you disable, AutoPVID is inactivated.
NextBootMgmtProtocol The transport protocol(s) to use after the next boot of the
agent.
CurrentMgmtProtocol The current transport protocol(s) that the agent supports.
BootMode This setting determines how the management interface of
the switch will be assigned an IP address, the next time the
switch boots. The four BootMode options are:
local - use the IP address contained in the configuration
file.
net - always attempt to get an IP address from the
network.
netWhenNeeded - attempt to get an IP address from the
network only when one is not contained in the
configuration file.
netOrLastAddress - attempt to get an IP address from
the network and if that fails use the IP address that was
in use on this switch before the last reboot.
ImageLoadMode The source from which the agent image is loaded at the
next boot.
CurrentImageVersion The version number of the agent image that is currently
used on the switch.
LocalStorageImageVersion The version number of the agent image that is stored in
flash memory on the switch.
NextBootDefaultGateway The IP address of the default gateway for the agent to use
after the next time the switch is booted.
CurrentDefaultGateway The IP address of the default gateway that is currently in
use.

System Configuration Guide


346 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager

Table 129 System tab fields (continued)

Field Description

NextBootLoadProtocol The transport protocol to be used by the agent to load the


configuration information and the image at the next boot.
LastLoadProtocol The transport protocol last used to load the image and
configuration information on the switch.

Base Unit Info tab

The Base Unit Info tab provides read-only information about the operating status
of the hardware and whether or not the default factory settings are being used.

To open the Base Unit Info tab:

1 Select the chassis.


2 From the shortcut menu, choose Edit > Chassis.
The Chassis dialog box opens with the System tab displayed (Figure 133 on
page 344).

3 Click the Base Unit Info tab.


The Base Unit Info tab opens (Figure 134).

Figure 134 Edit Chassis dialog box Base Unit Info tab

320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 347

Table 130 describes the Base Unit Info tab fields.

Table 130 Base Unit Info tab fields

Field Description

Type The switch type.


Descr A description of the switch hardware, including number of ports and
transmission speed.
Ver The switch hardware version number.
SerNum The switch serial number.
LstChng The value of sysUpTime at the time the interface entered its current
operational state. If the current state was entered prior to the last
reinitialization of the local network management subsystem, the value
is zero.
OperState The operational state of the switch.
Location Type the physical location of the switch.

Stack Info tab

Similar to the Base Unit Info tab, the Stack Info tab provides information about
the operating status of the stacked switches and whether or not the default factory
settings are being used. This tab is enabled for the stacking configuration only.

To open the Stack Info tab:

1 Select the chassis.


2 From the shortcut menu, choose Edit > Chassis.
The Chassis dialog box opens with the System tab displayed (Figure 133 on
page 344).

3 Click the Stack Info tab.


The Stack Info tab opens (Figure 135).

System Configuration Guide


348 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager

Figure 135 Edit Chassis dialog box Stack Info tab

Table 131 describes the Stack Info tab fields.

Table 131 Stack Info tab fields

Field Description

Descr A description of the component or subcomponent. If not available, the


value is a zero length string.
Location The geographic location of a component in a system modeled as a
chassis, but possibly physically implemented with geographically
separate devices connected together to exchange managment
information. Chassis modeled in this manner are sometimes referred to
as virtual chassis. An example value is: '4th flr wiring closet in blg A'.
Note: 1. This object is applicable only to components that can be found
in either the Board or Unit groups. If the information is unavailable, for
example, the chassis is not modeling a virtual chassis or component is
not in Board or Unit group, the value is a zero length string.
2. If this object is applicable and is not assigned a value through a SNMP
SET PDU when the row is created, the value will default to the value of
the object s5ChasComSerNum.
LstChng The value of sysUpTime when it was detected that the component/
sub-component was added to the chassis. If this has not occurred since
the cold/warm start of the agent, then the value is zero.

320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 349

Table 131 Stack Info tab fields (continued)

Field Description

OperState The current operational state of the component. The possible values are:
othersome other state
notAvailstate not available
removedcomponent removed
disabledoperation disabled
normalnormal operation
resetInProgreset in progress
testingdoing a self test
warningoperating at warning level
nonFatalErroperating at error level
fatalErrerror stopped operation
The allowable (and meaningful) values are determined by the
component type.
Ver The version number of the component or subcomponent. If not available,
the value is a zero length string.
SerNum The serial number of the component or subcomponent. If not available,
the value is a zero length string.

Agent tab

The Agent tab provides read-only information about the addresses that the agent
software uses to identify the switch.

To open the Agent tab:

1 Select the chassis.


2 From the shortcut menu, choose Edit > Chassis.
The Chassis dialog box opens (Figure 133 on page 344) with the System tab
displayed.

3 Click the Agent tab.


The Agent tab opens (Figure 136).

System Configuration Guide


350 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager

Figure 136 Edit Chassis dialog box Agent tab

Table 132 describes the Agent tab fields.

Table 132 Agent tab fields

Field Description

NextBootIpAddr The IP address to be used the next time the switch is booted.
NextBootNetMask The subnet mask to be used the next time the switch is
booted.
LoadServerAddr The IP address of the load server for the configuration file
and/or the image file. If not used, then the value is 0.0.0.0.
ImageFileName Name of the image file(s) currently associated with the
interface. When the object is not used, the value is a zero
length string.
ValidFlag Indicates if the configuration and/or image file(s) were
downloaded from this interface and if the file names have not
been changed.
BootRouterAddr The IP address of the boot router for the configuration file and/
or the image file.
MacAddr The MAC address of the switch.

PowerSupply tab
The PowerSupply tab provides read-only information about the operating status
of the switch power supplies.

To open the PowerSupply tab:

1 Select the chassis.


2 From the shortcut menu, choose Edit > Chassis.

320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 351

The Chassis dialog box opens (Figure 133 on page 344) with the System tab
displayed.

3 Click the PowerSupply tab.


The PowerSupply tab opens (Figure 137).

Figure 137 Edit Chassis dialog box Power Supply tab

Table 133 describes the PowerSupply tab fields.

Table 133 Power Supply tab fields

Field Description

Desc The power supply type.


OperStat The operational state of the power supply. Possible values include:
other: Some other state.
notAvail: State not available.
removed: Component was removed.
disabled: Operation disabled.
normal: State is in normal operation.
resetInProg: There is a reset in progress.
testing: System is doing a self test.
warning: System is operating at a warning level.
nonFatalErr: System is operating at error level.
fatalErr: A fatal error stopped operation.
notConfig: A module needs to be configured. The allowable values
are determined by the component type.

System Configuration Guide


352 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager

Fan tab

The Fan tab provides read-only information about the operating status of the
switch fans.

To open the Fan tab:

1 Select the chassis.


2 From the shortcut menu, choose Edit > Chassis.
The Chassis dialog box opens (Figure 133 on page 344) with the System tab
displayed.

3 Click the Fan tab.


The Fan tab opens (Figure 138).

Figure 138 Edit Chassis dialog box Fan tab

320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 353

Table 134 describes the Fan tab fields.

Table 134 Fan tab fields

Field Description

Desc The fan type.


OperStat The operational state of the fan. Values include:
other: Some other state.
notAvail: This state is not available.
removed: Fan was removed.
disabled: Fan is disabled.
normal: Fan is operating in normal operation.
resetInProg: A reset of the fan is in progress.
testing: Fan is doing a self test.
warning: Fan is operating at a warning level.
nonFatalErr: Fan is operating at error level.
fatalErr: An error stopped the fan operation
notConfig: Fan needs to be configured. The allowable values are
determined by the component type.

Banner tab

The Banner tab allows you to specify banner display in TELNET. You can
specify either the default banner or a custom banner.

To open the Banner tab:

1 Select the chassis.


2 From the main menu, choose Edit > Chassis.
The Chassis dialog box opens (Figure 133 on page 344) with the System tab
displayed.

3 Click the Banner tab.


The Banner tab opens (Figure 139).

System Configuration Guide


354 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager

Figure 139 Edit Chassis dialog box Banner tab

To set the default banner:

1 In the Banner tab, click on the static radio button, and then click Apply. This
resets the banner in Telnet to the default banner.

To check that the default banner is set in Telnet:

2 In the Main Menu, click on Device > Telnet.


The Telnet window opens (Figure 139) with the default banner displayed.

320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 355

Figure 140 Telnet window with default banner

### ### ########### ########## ############# ########### ###


#### ### ############# ############ ############# ########### ###
##### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ###
###### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ###
### ### ### ### ### ############ ### ######### ###
### ### ### ### ### ########### ### ######### ###
### ###### ### ### ### ### ### ### ###
### ##### ### ### ### ### ### ### ###
### #### ############# ### ### ### ########### ###########
### ### ########### ### ### ### ########### ###########

Enter Ctrl-Y to begin.


***************************************************************
*** Ethernet Switch 425-24T ***
*** Nortel ***
*** Copyright (c) 1996-2005, All Rights Reserved ***
*** Release 3.6 ***
*** HW:0A FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0 ***
***************************************************************

To disable the banner:

In the Banner tab, click on the disabled radio button, and then click Apply.

To check that the banner is disabled:

In the Main Menu, click on Device > Telnet.

The Telnet window opens without the banner.

System Configuration Guide


356 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager

Figure 141 Telnet window without banner

Ethernet Switch 425-24T Main Menu

IP Configuration/Setup...
SNMP Configuration...
System Characteristics...
Switch Configuration...
Console/Comm Port Configuration...
Spanning Tree Configuration...
TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration...
Software Download...
Configuration File...
Display System Log...
Reset...
Reset to Default Settings...
Shutdown Command...
Command Line Interface...
Logout...

Use arrow keys to highlight option, press <Return> or <Enter> to select option

Custom Banner tab

The Custom Banner tab allows you to specify the display for a custom banner in
Telnet.

To open the Custom Banner tab:

1 Select the chassis.


2 From the main menu, choose Edit > Chassis.
The Chassis dialog box opens (Figure 133 on page 344) with the System tab
displayed.

3 Click the Custom Banner tab.


The Custom Banner tab opens (Figure 142).

320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 357

Figure 142 Edit Chassis dialog box Custom Banner tab

To create a Custom Banner:

1 In the Banner tab, click on the custom radio button, and then click Apply.
2 Click on the Custom Banner tab (Figure 142).
3 In the Custom Banner tab, make the changes to the lines of the banner that
you want to create, and click Apply. The custom banner is 15 lines high and
can be up to 80 characters long.

To check that the custom banner is set in Telnet:

1 In the Main menu, click on Device > Telnet.


The Telnet window opens (Figure 143) with the custom banner displayed.

System Configuration Guide


358 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager

Figure 143 Telnet window with custom banner

******************************************************************************
Ethernet Switches 325/425
******************************************************************************

Enter Ctrl-Y to begin.


***************************************************************
*** Ethernet Switch 425-24T ***
*** Nortel ***
*** Copyright (c) 1996-2005, All Rights Reserved ***
*** Release 3.6 ***
*** HW:0A FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0 ***
***************************************************************

To disable the banner:

In the Banner tab, click the disabled radio button, and then click Apply.

To check that the banner is disabled:

In the Main Menu, click on Device > Telnet.

The Telnet window opens without the banner.

Working with configuration files


This chapter describes how you can view information and upload or download the
configuration and image files.

FileSystem dialog box

To open the Edit FileSystem dialog box:

320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 359

From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > File System.

The FileSystem dialog box opens (Figure 144) and displays the Config/
Image/Diag tab.

Figure 144 FileSystem - Config/Image/Diag File tab dialog box

Table 135 describes the FileSystem Config/Image/Diag file dialog box fields.

Table 135 FileSystem Config/Image/Diag file dialog box fields

Field Description

LoadServerAddr The IP address of the load server for the configuration file and/or the
image file. If not used, then the value is 0.0.0.0.
BinaryConfigFile Name of the configuration file currently associated with the interface.
Name When not used, the value is a zero length string.
ImageFileName Name of the image file(s) currently associated with the interface.
When the object is not used, the value is a zero length string.
FwFileName Specifies the FWFileName.
(Diag)

System Configuration Guide


360 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager

Table 135 FileSystem Config/Image/Diag file dialog box fields (continued)

Field Description

Action This object is used to download or upload a config file, an image


file or diag firmware file. In read operation, if there is no action
taken since the boot up, it will return with a value of other.
Otherwise, it will return the latest action.
In a write operation, the values that can be written are:
dnldConfig
dnldImg
upIdConfig
dnldFw
dnldImgIfNewer
dnldImgNoReset
dnldFwNoReset
The newly downloaded config, image or diag file will not take effect
until the next boot cycle of the device.
Status This object is used to get the status of the latest action as shown by
s5AgInfoFileAction. The values that can be read are:
other if no action taken since the boot up
inProgress the operation is in progress
success the operation succeeds
fail the operation failed

ASCII config file

To display the ASCII Config file tab:

In the File System dialog box, click on the ASCII Config File tab.

The ASCII Config File tab (Figure 145) opens.

320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 361

Figure 145 File system - ASCII Config File dialog box

Table 136 describes the ASCII Config File tab fields.

Table 136 ASCII Config File tab fields

Field Description

LoadServerAddr The IP address of the load server for the ASCII configuration file. If not
used, then the value is 0.0.0.0.
ASCIIConfigFileName Name of the ASCII configuration file currently associated with the
interface. When not used, the value is a zero length string.
ASCIIConfigAutoDownload Specifies automatic ASCII configuration download.
ASCIIConfigAutodldStatus Specifies the current status of the ASCII configuration file download.
ASCIIConfigManualDownload Specifies manual download of an ASCII configuration file.
ASCIIConfigManualdldStatus Specifies the current status of the manual download of an ASCII
configuration file.
ASCIIConfigManualUpload Specifies manual upload of an ASCII configuration file.
ASCIIConfigManualUpldStatus Specifies the current status of the manual upload of an ASCII
configuration file.

System Configuration Guide


362 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager

Working with SNTP


The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) feature synchronizes the Universal
Coordinated Time (UTC) to an accuracy within 1 second. This feature adheres to
the IEEE RFC 2030 (MIB is the s5agent). With this feature, the system can obtain
the time from any RFC 2030-compliant NTP/SNTP server.

The system retries connecting with the NTP server a maximum of 3 times, with 5
minutes between each retry. If the connection fails after the 3 attempts, the system
waits for the next synchronization time (the default is 24 hours) and begins the
process again.

Configuring SNTP

The SNTP dialog box contains the parameters for configuring Simple Network
Time Protocol (SNTP).

To open the SNTP dialog box:

1 From the Main Menu, choose Edit > SNTP.


The SNTP dialog box opens (Figure 146).

320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 363

Figure 146 SNTP dialog box

Table 137 describes the SNTP dialog box fields.

Table 137 SNTP dialog box fields

Field Description

PrimaryServer The IP address of the primary SNTP server.


Address
SecondaryServer The IP address of the secondary SNTP server.
Address
State Controls whether the device uses the Simple Network Time Protocol
(SNTP), to synchronize the device's clock to the Coordinated
Universal Time (UTC). If the value is disabled, the device will not
synchronize it's clock using SNTP.
If the value is unicast, the device will synchronize shortly after boot
time when network access becomes available, and periodically
thereafter.
SyncInterval Controls the frequency, in hours, that the device will attempt to
synchronize with the NTP servers
ManualSync Specifies that the device to immediately attempt to synchronize with
Request the NTP servers.

System Configuration Guide


364 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager

Table 137 SNTP dialog box fields (continued)

Field Description

LastSyncTime Specifies the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) when the device
last synchronized with an NTP server.
LastSyncSource Specifies the IP source address of the NTP server with which this
device last synchronized
NextSyncTime Specifies the the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) at which the
next synchronization is scheduled.
PrimaryServer Specifies the number of times the switch failed to synchronize with
SynchFailures the primary server address. However, synchronization with the
secondary server address may still occur.
SecondaryServer Specifies the number of times the switch failed to synchronize with
SynchFailures the secondary server address,
CurrentTime Specifies the switch's current Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

Note: In order to clear out the PrimaryServerAddress and


SecondaryServerAddress, you must first set the State to disabled.

Displaying topology information using Device Manager


This chapter describes diagnostic information available in Device Manager on the
following tabs:

Topology tab
Topology Table tab on page 365

Topology tab

To view topology information:

From the Device Manager menu bar, select Edit > Diagnostics.

The Diagnostics dialog box opens with the Topology tab displayed
(Figure 147).

320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 365

Figure 147 Diagnostics dialog box Topology tab

Table 138 describes the Topology tab fields.

Table 138 Topology tab fields

Field Description

IpAddr The IP address of the device.


Status Whether Nortel topology is on (topOn) or off (topOff) for the
device. The default value is topOn.

NmmLstChg The value of sysUpTime the last time an entry in the network
management MIB (NMM) topology table was added, deleted, or
modified. If the table has not changed since the last cold or
warm start of the agent.
NmmMaxNum The maximum number of entries in the NMM topology table.
NmmCurNum The current number of entries in the NMM topology table.

Topology Table tab

To view more topology information:

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Diagnostics.
The Diagnostics dialog box opens with the Topology tab displayed
(Figure 147 on page 365).

2 Click the Topology Table tab.

System Configuration Guide


366 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager

The Topology Table tab opens (Figure 148).

Figure 148 Diagnostics dialog box Topology Table tab

Table 139 describes the Topology Table tab fields.

Table 139 Topology Table tab fields

Field Description

Slot The slot number in the chassis in which the topology message
was received.
Port The port on which the topology message was received.
IpAddr The IP address of the sender of the topology message.
SegId The segment identifier of the segment from which the remote
agent sent the topology message. This value is extracted from the
message.
MacAddr The MAC address of the sender of the topology message.
ChassisType The chassis type of the device that sent the topology message.
BkplType The backplane type of the device that sent the topology message.
LocalSeg Indicates if the sender of the topology message is on the same
Ethernet segment as the reporting agent.
CurState The current state of the sender of the topology message. The
choices are:
topChanged Topology information has recently changed.
heartbeat Topology information is unchanged.
new The sending agent is in a new state.

320985-A
367

Chapter 10
Configuring ports using Device Manager

This chapter describes how to use Device Manager to configure ports on an


Ethernet Switch 325/425.

The windows displayed when you configure a single port differ from the ones
displayed when you configure multiple ports. However, the options are similar.

This section covers:

Viewing and editing a single port configuration


Viewing and editing multiple port configurations on page 371

Viewing and editing a single port configuration


To view or edit the configuration of a single port:

Do one of the following:

Double-click on a single port.


From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Port.
From the shortcut menu, choose Edit.
From the toolbar, click Edit.

System Configuration Guide


368 Chapter 10 Configuring ports using Device Manager

Note: When you edit a single port, tabs that are not applicable are not
available for you to select.
When you edit multiple ports, some tabs are not available, and some tabs
are available even though the options are not applicable. When the option
does not apply for a given port, NoSuchObject is displayed.

The following sections provide a description of the Edit Port dialog box, and
details about the fields in the Interface tab:

Interface tab for a single port


Interface tab for multiple ports on page 372

Interface tab for a single port

The Interface tab shows the basic configuration and status of a single port.

To view the Interface tab:

1 Select the port you want to edit.


2 Do one of the following:
Double-click on the selected port.
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Port.
From the shortcut menu, choose Edit.
From the toolbar, click Edit.

The Port dialog box for a single port opens with the Interface tab displayed
(Figure 149).

320985-A
Chapter 10 Configuring ports using Device Manager 369

Figure 149 Port dialog box Interface tab

Note: 10/100BASE-TX ports may not autonegotiate correctly with


older 10/100BASE-TX equipment. In some cases, the older devices can
be upgraded with new firmware or driver revisions. If an upgrade does
not allow autonegotiation to correctly identify the link speed and duplex
settings, you can manually configure the settings for the link in question.

System Configuration Guide


370 Chapter 10 Configuring ports using Device Manager

Table 140 describes the Interface tab fields for a single port.

Table 140 Interface tab fields for a single port

Field Description

Index A unique value assigned to each interface. The value ranges between 1
and 512.
Name Specifies a name for the port.
Descr The type of switch and number of ports.
Type The media type of this interface.
Mtu The size of the largest packet, in octets, that can be sent or received on
the interface.
PhysAddress The MAC address assigned to a particular interface.
AdminStatus The current administrative state of the device, which can be one of the
following:
up
down
When a managed system is initialized, all interfaces start with
AdminStatus in the up state. AdminStatus changes to the down state (or
remains in the up state) as a result of either management action or the
configuration information available to the managed system.
OperStatus The current operational state of the interface, which can be one of the
following:
up
down
testing
If AdminStatus is up, then OperStatus should be up if the interface is
ready to transmit and receive network traffic. If AdminStatus is down, then
OperStatus should be down. It should remain in the down state if and only
if there is a fault that prevents it from going to the up state. The testing
state indicates that no operational packets can be passed.
LastChange The value of sysUpTime at the time the interface entered its current
operational state. If the current state was entered prior to the last
reinitialization of the local network management subsystem, the value is
zero.
LinkTrap Specifies whether linkUp/linkDown traps should be generated for this
interface
Speed Current speed.
AutoNegotiate Indicates whether this port is enabled for autonegotiation or not.
AdminDuplex The current administrative duplex mode of the port (half or full).
OperDuplex The current mode of the port (half duplex or full duplex).

320985-A
Chapter 10 Configuring ports using Device Manager 371

Table 140 Interface tab fields for a single port (continued)

Field Description

AdminSpeed Set the ports speed.


OperSpeed The current operating speed of the port.
AutoNegotiationCapability Specifies the port speed and duplex capabilities that a switch can support
on a port, and that may be advertised by the port using auto-negotiation
AutoNegotiationAdvertisments Specifies the port speed and duplex abilities to be advertised during link
negotiation.
MltId The MultiLink Trunk to which the port is assigned (if any).
IsPortShared Specifies whether a port is shared. Multiple ports that are logically
represented as a single port are shared. Only one shared port may be
active at a time.
PortActiveComponent Specifies the physical port components that are active for a shared port.

Viewing and editing multiple port configurations


To view or edit the configurations of multiple ports:

1 Select the ports you want to edit.


Press Ctrl+left click the ports you want to view or configure. A yellow
outline appears around the selected ports.

2 Do one of the following:


From the shortcut menu, choose Edit.
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Port.
From the shortcut menu, choose Edit.
From the toolbar, click Edit.

Note: When you edit multiple ports, some tabs are not available, and
some tabs are available even though the options are not applicable. When
the option does not apply for a given port, NoSuchObject is displayed.

System Configuration Guide


372 Chapter 10 Configuring ports using Device Manager

Interface tab for multiple ports

The Interface tab shows the basic configuration and status of the selected ports.

To view or edit the Interface tab for multiple ports:

1 Select the ports that you want to edit.


Press Ctrl+left-click the ports that you want to configure. A yellow outline
appears around the selected ports.

2 Do one of the following:


From the shortcut menu, choose Edit.
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Port.
The Interface tab shows port interface statistics.

Figure 150 Interface tab fields for multiple ports

Table 141 describes the Interface tab fields for multiple ports.

Table 141 Interface tab fields for multiple ports

Field Description

Index A unique value assigned to each interface. The value ranges between 1
and 512.
Port Number of Unit and Port Number.
Name Allows you to enter a character string to name the port
Descr Type of switch and number of ports.
Type Media type for this interface.

320985-A
Chapter 10 Configuring ports using Device Manager 373

Table 141 Interface tab fields for multiple ports (continued)

Field Description

Mtu Size of the largest packet, in octets, that can be sent or received on the
interface.
PhysAddress MAC address assigned to a particular interface.
AdminStatus Current administrative state of the device, which can be one of the
following:
up
down
When a managed system is initialized, all interfaces start with
AdminStatus in the up state. AdminStatus changes to the down state
(or remains in the up state) as a result of either management action or
the configuration information available to the managed system.
OperStatus Current operational state of the interface, which can be one of the
following:
up
down
testing
If AdminStatus is up, then OperStatus should be up if the interface is
ready to transmit and receive network traffic. If AdminStatus is down,
then OperStatus should be down. It should remain in the down state if
and only if there is a fault that prevents it from going to the up state. The
testing state indicates that no operational packets can be passed.
LastChange Value of the time the interface entered its current operational state. If
the current state was entered prior to the last reinitialization of the local
network management subsystem, the value is zero.
LinkTrap Specifies whether linkUp/linkDown traps should be generated for this
interface
Speed The estimate bandwidth of the interface in bits per second (bps). For
interfaces that do not vary in bandwidth or have no way to estimate the
bandwidth, this object should contain the nominal bandwidth. If the
bandwidth of the interface is greater than the maximum value reported
by the object, then the object displays its maximum value
(4,294,967,295). For a sub-layer that has no concept of bandwidth, the
object should be zero.
AutoNegotiate Indicates whether the port is enabled (checked) for autonegotiation or
not.
AdminDuplex The current administrative duplex mode of the port (half or full).
OperDuplex Indicate current duplex value of the port.
AdminSpeed Set the speed of a port: none, mbps10, and mbps100
OperSpeed The current operating speed of the port.

System Configuration Guide


374 Chapter 10 Configuring ports using Device Manager

Table 141 Interface tab fields for multiple ports (continued)

Field Description

AutoNegotiation Specifies the port speed and duplex capabilities that a switch can
Capability support on a port, and that may be advertised by the port using
auto-negotiation
AutoNegotiation Specifies the port speed and duplex abilities to be advertised during
Advertisments link negotiation.
MltId The MultiLink Trunk to which the port is assigned (if any).
IsPortShared Specifies whether a port is shared. Multiple ports that are logically
represented as a single port are shared. Only one shared port may be
active at a time.
PortActiveComp Specifies the physical port components that are active for a shared
onent port.

320985-A
375

Chapter 11
Administering the switch using Web-based
management

The administrative options available to you are:

Viewing system information


Quick Start on page 377
Configuring system security on page 379
Rebooting the Ethernet Switch 325/425 on page 379
Changing the Ethernet Switch 325/425 to system defaults on page 381
Logging out of the management interface on page 382

Viewing system information


You can view an image of the Ethernet Switch 325/425 or an image of your entire
stack configuration, information about the host device (or stack) and, if provided,
the contact person or manager for the switch. The System Information page is
also the Web-based management interface home page.

To view system information:

From the main menu, choose Administration > System Information.

The System Information page opens (Figure 151).

Note: You may create or modify existing system information


parameters using the System page. For more information on configuring
system information, see Modifying system settings on page 389.

System Configuration Guide


376 Chapter 11 Administering the switch using Web-based management

Figure 151 System Information page

Table 142 describes the items on the System Information page.

Table 142 System Information page items

Item Description

sysDescription The default description of the Ethernet Switch 325/425.


sysUpTime The elapsed time since the last network management portion of
the system was last re-initialized.
sysName The name created by the network administrator to identify the
switch, for example, Finance Group.
sysLocation The location name created by the network administrator to
identify the switch location, for example, first floor.
sysContact The name, email, address, and telephone number of the person
to contact about switch operation.

320985-A
Chapter 11 Administering the switch using Web-based management 377

Quick Start
The Quick Start feature allows the administrator of the Ethernet Switch 325/425
to make the initial setup by consolidating multiple setup pages into a single page.
The Quick Start screen will allow the administrator to configure the following
information:

Switch/Stack IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway
SNMP Read community
SNMP Write community
SNMP Trap IP addresses and communities (up to four)
New default VLAN

During the initial setup mode, all ports in the switch or stack are assigned to the
new default VLAN.

A port-based Quick Start VLAN is created if the new default VLAN does not
exist. All ports are removed from the current default VLAN and assigned to the
Quick Start VLAN. The PVIDs for all ports are changed to the Quick Start
VLAN. The Quick Start VLAN is also designated as the management VLAN.

To configure the initial settings using the Quick Start feature:

1 From the main menu, select Administration > Quick Start.


The Quick Start page is displayed (Figure 152).

System Configuration Guide


378 Chapter 11 Administering the switch using Web-based management

Figure 152 Quick Start page

2 Click on the Submit button after making the required settings.

Table 143 describes the items on the Quick Start page.

Table 143 Items on the Quick Start page

Section Item Description

IP In-Band Switch IP Specify a new IP address for the switch.


Address
In-Band Subnet Enter a new subnet mask.
Mask
Default Gateway Specify an IP address for the default
gateway.

320985-A
Chapter 11 Administering the switch using Web-based management 379

Table 143 Items on the Quick Start page

Section Item Description

Community Read-Only Specify a character string to identify the


String Community String community string for the SNMPv1
Read-Only community, for example, public or
private.
The default value is public.
Read-Write Specify a character string to identify the
Community String community string for the SNMPv1
Read-Write community, for example, public
or private.
The default value is private.
Trap Receiver Index Select the number of the Trap Receiver to
create or modify.
IP address Specify the network address for the SNMP
Manager that is to receive the specified Trap.
Community Type the Community String for the specified
Trap Receiver.
VLAN Quick Start VLAN Specify the IP of the port-based Quick Start
VLAN.

Configuring system security


For information on configuring system security, please refer to Configuring and
Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)

Rebooting the Ethernet Switch 325/425


You can reboot a standalone switch or an entire stack without erasing any
configured switch parameters. While rebooting, the switch initiates a self-test that
comprises various diagnostic routines and subtests. The LEDs display various
patterns to indicate that the subtests are in progress.

To reboot the Ethernet Switch 325/425 without making changes (since your last
Submit request):

System Configuration Guide


380 Chapter 11 Administering the switch using Web-based management

1 From the main menu, choose Administration > Reset.


The reset warning message displays (Figure 153).

Figure 153 Reset page message

2 Click OK.

To reboot the Ethernet Switch 425-24T in its stack mode without making changes
(since your last Submit request):

1 From the main menu, choose Administration > Reset.


The Reset page opens (Figure 154).

Figure 154 Reset page

320985-A
Chapter 11 Administering the switch using Web-based management 381

2 Click Submit. If you do not click Submit, any changes you make will be lost.

Note: If you have not configured system password security, a reset


returns you to the home page, as shown in Figure 72 on page 200. If you
have configured system password security, a reset returns you to a log on
page (for details on configuring management passwords, see
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)).

Changing the Ethernet Switch 325/425 to system defaults


You can change a standalone switch, a specific unit in a stack configuration, or an
entire stack, replacing all configured switch parameters with the factory default
values.

Caution: If you choose change to default settings, all configured


settings are replaced with factory default settings when you click
Submit. For more information about factory default settings, see
Appendix C, Default settings, on page 431.

During the process of changing to default settings, the switch initiates a self-test
that comprises various diagnostic routines and subtests. The LEDs display various
patterns to indicate that the subtests are in progress.

To change the Ethernet Switch 325/425 to system defaults:

1 From the main menu, choose Administration > Reset to Default.


The reset to default warning message displays (Figure 155).

Figure 155 Reset to Default page message

System Configuration Guide


382 Chapter 11 Administering the switch using Web-based management

2 Click OK.

To change the Ethernet Switch 425 in its stacking mode to system defaults:

1 From the main menu, choose Administration > Reset to Default.


The Reset to Default page opens (Figure 156).

Figure 156 Reset to Default page

2 Click Submit.

Logging out of the management interface


To log out of the Web-based management user interface:

1 From the main menu, choose Administration > Logout.


A logout message displays.

Figure 157 Logout message

2 Do one of the following:

320985-A
Chapter 11 Administering the switch using Web-based management 383

Click OK to log out.


Click Cancel to return to the Web-based management interface home
page.

Note: If you have not configured system password security, a reset


returns you to the home page, as shown in Figure 72 on page 200. If you
have configured system password security, a reset returns you to a log on
page (for details on configuring management passwords, see Configuring
and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)).

System Configuration Guide


384 Chapter 11 Administering the switch using Web-based management

320985-A
385

Chapter 12
Configuring the switch using Web-based
management

The switch configuration options available to you are:

Configuring BootP, IP, and gateway settings


Modifying system settings on page 389
Configuring switch port autonegotiation speed on page 390
Configuring high speed flow control on page 393
Downloading switch images on page 394
Downloading ASCII configuration files on page 396
Storing and retrieving a switch configuration file from a TFTP server on
page 397
Enabling and disabling autosave on page 400
Configuring port communication speed on page 400
Configuring Rate Limiting on page 402

Configuring BootP, IP, and gateway settings


You can configure the BootP mode settings, create and modify the In-band stack
and In-band switch IP addresses and In-band subnet mask parameters, and
configure the IP address of your default gateway.

Note: Settings take effect immediately when you click Submit.

To configure BootP, IP, and gateway settings:

System Configuration Guide


386 Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management

1 From the main menu, choose Configuration > IP.


The IP page opens (Figure 158).

Figure 158 IP page

320985-A
Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management 387

Table 144 describes the items on the IP page.

Table 144 IP page items

Section Item Range Description

Boot Mode BootP BootP When Needed (default) Choose this mode to inform the
Setting Request switch to send a BootP request when
Mode the switch IP address stored in
nonvolatile memory is the factory
default value. If the stored IP address
differs from the factory default value,
the switch uses the stored network
parameters. If the switch cannot find
a BootP server, it tries five more
times to find one and then defaults to
the factory settings
BootP Always Choose this mode to inform the
switch to ignore any stored network
parameters and send a BootP
request, each time it boots. If the
BootP request fails, the switch boots
with the factory default IP
configuration. This setting disables
remote management if no BootP
server is set up for the switch, but
allows the switch to boot normally.
BootP Disabled Choose this mode to inform the
switch to use the IP configuration
parameters stored in non-volatile
memory, each time the switch boots.
If a BootP configuration is in progress
when you issue this command, the
BootP configuration stops.

System Configuration Guide


388 Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management

Table 144 IP page items (continued)

Section Item Range Description

BootP or Last Address Choose this mode to inform the


switch at each startup, to obtain its IP
configuration using BootP. If the
BootP request fails, the switch uses
the network parameters stored in its
non-volatile memory.

Note: Valid parameters obtained in


using BootP always replace current
information stored in the non-volatile
memory.
Note: Whenever the switch is
broadcasting BootP requests, the
BootP process times out if a reply is
not received within 7 minutes
(approximately). When the process
times out, the BootP request mode
automatically changes to BootP
Disabled mode. To restart the BootP
process, change the BootP request
mode to any of the three following
modes: BootP When Needed, BootP
Always, or to BootP or Last Address.
IP Setting In-Band XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Type a new stack IP address in the
Stack IP appropriate format.
Address
In-Band XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Type a new switch IP address in the
Switch IP appropriate format.
Address
Note: When the IP address is
entered in the In-Band IP Address
field, and the In-Band Subnet Mask
field value is not present, the
software provides an in-use default
value for the In-Band Subnet Mask
field that is based on the class of the
IP address entered in the In-Band IP
Address field.
In-Band XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Type a new subnet mask in the
Subnet Mast appropriate format.
Gateway Default XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Type an IP address for the default
Setting Gateway gateway in the appropriate format.

2 Type information in the text boxes, or select from a list.

320985-A
Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management 389

3 Click Submit.

Modifying system settings


You can create or modify the system name, system location, and network manager
contact information.

Note: The configurable parameters on the System page are displayed in


a read only format on the System Information home page.

To configure system settings:

1 From the main menu, choose Configuration > System.


The System page opens (Figure 159).

Figure 159 System page

System Configuration Guide


390 Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management

Table 145 describes the items on the System page.

Table 145 System page items

Item Range Description

System The factory set description of the hardware and software versions.
Description
System Object ID The character string that the vendor created to uniquely identify this
device.
System Up Time The elapsed time since the last network management portion of the
system was last re-initialized.

Note: This field is updated only when the screen is redisplayed.


System Name 1..255 Type a character string to create a name to identify the switch, for
example Finance Group.
System Location 1..255 Type a character string to create a name for the switch location, for
example, First Floor.
System Contact 1..255 Type a character string to create the contact information for the network
manager or the selected person to contact regarding switch operation,
for example, mcarlson@company.com

Note: To operate correctly with the Web interface, the system contact
should be an e-mail address.

2 Type information in the text boxes.


3 Click Submit.

Configuring switch port autonegotiation speed


You can configure a specific switch port or all switch ports to autonegotiate for the
highest available speed of the connected station or you can set the speed for
selected switch ports (autonegotiation is not supported on 1000 Mb/s fiber optic
ports).

To configure a switch ports autonegotiation speed:

1 From the main menu, choose Configuration > Port Management.


The Port Management page opens (Figure 160).

320985-A
Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management 391

Figure 160 Port Management page

Table 146 describes the items on the Port Management page.

Table 146 Port Management page items

Item Range Description

Port The switch port number of the corresponding row. The


values that you set in each switch row affect all switch
ports and, when the switch is part of a stack, the values
that set in the stack row affect all ports in the entire stack
(except the GBIC port or fiber optic ports when
installed).
Trunk The trunk group that the switch port belongs to as
specified in the Trunk Member fields on the MultiLink
Trunk page.
Status (1) Enabled Choose to enable or disable the port. You can also use
(2) Disabled this field to control access to any switch port.

The default setting is Enabled.

System Configuration Guide


392 Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management

Table 146 Port Management page items

Item Range Description

Link The current link state of the corresponding port as


follows:
Up: The port is connected and operational
Down: The port is not connected or is not operational.
Link Trap (1) On Choose to control whether link up/down traps are sent to
(2) Off the configured trap receiver from the switch.

The default setting is On.


Autonegotiation (1) Enabled Choose to enable or disable the autonegotiation feature.
(2) Disabled
Choosing to enable autonegotiation sets the
corresponding port speed to match the best service
provided by the connected station, up to 100Mb/s in
full-duplex mode.

Note: Autonegotiation also enables auto sensing on 10/


100 ports.

The default setting is Enabled.


Speed / Duplex (1) 10Mbs / Half Choose the Ethernet speed you want the port to
(2) 10Mbs / Full support.
(3) 100Mbs / Half
(4) 100Mbs / Full The default setting is 10 Mbs/Half when autonegotiation
(5) 1000Mbs / Full is disabled and 1000 Mb/s full-duplex for gigabit ports
only.

2 In the upper-left corner, click on the unit number of the Ethernet Switch 425
stack to manage.
The page is updated with the information for the selected switch.

3 In the port row of your choice, select from the lists.


4 Click Submit.

320985-A
Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management 393

Configuring high speed flow control


You can view the High Speed Flow Control parameters for Ethernet Switch 325/
425 in this page.

To configure high speed flow control:

1 From the main menu, choose Configuration > High Speed Flow Control.
The High Speed Flow Control page opens (Figure 161).

Figure 161 High Speed Flow Control page

Table 147 describes the items on the High Speed Flow Control page.

Table 147 High Speed Flow Control page items

Item Range Description

Port The switch port number of the corresponding row.


Autonegotiation (1) Enabled Displays if the autonegotiation feature is enabled or disabled.
(2) Disabled
When enabled, the port advertises support only for 1000Mb/s
operation in full-duplex mode.
Flow Control (1) Enabled Displays current settings of flow control.
(2) Symmetric
(3) Asymmetric

System Configuration Guide


394 Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management

2 In the upper-left corner, click on the unit number for viewing the GBIC
configuration.

Downloading switch images


You can download the Ethernet Switch 325/425 software image to non-volatile
flash memory. To download the Ethernet Switch 325/425 software image, a
properly configured Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server must be present
in your network, and the policy switch must have an IP address. To learn how to
configure the switch or stack IP address, refer to Configuring BootP, IP, and
gateway settings on page 385.

Caution: Do not interrupt power to the device during the software


download process. A power interruption can corrupt the firmware image.

To download a switch image:

1 From the main menu, choose Configuration > Software Download.


The Software Download page opens (Figure 162).

Figure 162 Software Download page

320985-A
Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management 395

Table 148 describes the fields on the Software Download page.

Table 148 Software Download page fields

Fields Range Description

Current Running Version The version of the current running software.


Local Store Version The local version of the software in the flash
memory.
Diagnostics Filename 1..30 Type the diagnostics filename.
TFTP Server IP Address XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Type the IP address of your TFTP load host.
Download Option (1) No Choose the software image to load.
(2) Image
(3) Diagnostics

2 Type information in the text boxes, or select from a list.


3 Click Submit.
The software download process automatically completes without user
intervention. The process erases the contents of flash memory and replaces it
with a new software image. Take care not to interrupt the download process
until after it runs to completion (the process can take up to ten minutes,
depending on network conditions).
When the download process is complete, the switch automatically resets and
the new software image initiates a self-test.
During the download process, the Ethernet Switch 325/425 will not be
operational. You can monitor the progress of the download process by
observing the LED indications.

Table 149 describes the LED indications displayed during the software download
process.

Note: The LED indications described in Table 149 apply to a 24-port


switch model. Although a 48-port switch provides similar LED
indications, the LED indication sequence is associated within the 48-port
range.

System Configuration Guide


396 Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management

Table 149 LED Indications during the software download process

Phase Description LED Indications

1 The switch downloads the new 100 Mb/s port status LEDs (ports 18 to 24 only): The
software image and programs it. LEDs begin to turn on in succession on each ASIC as
follows: ASIC 1 from port 1 to port 12 and return, ASIC 2
from with port 24 to port 13 and return, ASIC 3 from port 25
to port 36 and return, ASIC 4 from port 48 to port 37 and
return.
2 The switch resets automatically. After the reset completes, the new software image initiates
the switch self-test, which comprises various diagnostic
routines and subtests.
Note: The LEDs display various patterns to indicate that the
subtests are in progress.

Downloading ASCII configuration files


The ASCII Config Download feature allows you to upload an ASCII
configuration file from a personal computer to the Ethernet Switch 325/425. In the
current implementation, you will require a TFTP server to upload an ASCII
configuration file to the Ethernet Switch 325/425. But with this feature the
requirement of a TFTP server is eliminated. This feature allows you to upload an
ASCII configuration file using the HTTP protocol.

To download the ASCII configuration file to the Ethernet Switch 325/425.

1 From the main menu, choose Configuration > Ascii Config Download.
2 The Ascii Configuration File Download page opens (Figure 163).

Figure 163 Ascii Configuration file download page

320985-A
Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management 397

Table 150 describes the items displayed on the ASCII Configuration File
Download page.

Table 150 Ascii Configuration file download page items

Item Description

Ascii Configuration File Allows you to select the ASCII config file located on
a personal computer.
Last Manual Configuration Displays the status of the download.
Status
Submit Click on this button to upload the ASCII
configuration file from the personal computer to the
Ethernet Switch 325/425.

Storing and retrieving a switch configuration file from a


TFTP server
You can store switch and stack configuration parameters on a Trivial File Transfer
Protocol (TFTP) server. You can retrieve the configuration parameters of a
standalone switch or an entire stack and use the retrieved parameters to
automatically configure a replacement switch or stack.

To store a switch or stack configuration, you must set up the file on your TFTP
server and set the filename read/write permission to enabled.

To download the Ethernet Switch 325/425 configuration file, a properly


configured TFTP server must be present in your network, and the Ethernet Switch
325/425 must have an IP address.

To learn how to configure the switch or stack IP address, refer to Configuring


BootP, IP, and gateway settings on page 385.

To store or retrieve a switch or stack configuration file:

1 From the main menu, choose Configuration > Configuration File.


The Configuration File Download/Upload page opens (Figure 164).

System Configuration Guide


398 Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management

Figure 164 Configuration File Download/Upload page

Table 151 describes the Configuration File Setting items on the Configuration
File Download/Upload page.

Table 151 Configuration File Setting items

Item Range Description

Configuration Image 1..32 Type the configuration file name.


Filename
TFTP Server IP Address XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Type the IP address of the TFTP load host.
Copy Configuration (1) Yes Choose whether or not to copy the configuration image to
Image to Server (2) No the server.

Retrieve Configuration (1) Yes Choose whether or not to retrieve the configuration image
Image from Server (2) No from a server. If you choose Yes, the download process
begins immediately and, when completed, causes the
switch or stack to reset with the new configuration
parameters.

2 Type information in the text boxes, or select from a list.


3 Click Submit.

320985-A
Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management 399

Requirements for storing and retrieving configuration


parameters on a TFTP server
The following requirements apply when storing and retrieving configuration
parameters on a TFTP server:

The Configuration File feature can only be used to copy standalone switch
configuration parameters to other standalone switches or to copy stack
configuration parameters to other stack configurations.
For example, you cannot duplicate the configuration parameters of a unit in a
stack configuration and use it to configure a standalone switch.
A configuration file obtained from a standalone switch can only be used to
configure other standalone switches that have the same firmware revision and
model type as the donor standalone switch.
A configuration file obtained from a stack unit can only be used to configure
other stacks that have the same number of switches, firmware version, model
types, and physical IDs as the stack the donor stack unit resides in.
Reconfigured stacks are configured according to the unit order number of the
donor unit. For example, the configuration file parameters from a donor unit
with physical ID x are used to reconfigure the unit with physical ID x.
The configuration file also duplicates any settings that exist for any GBIC that
is installed in the donor switch.
If you use the configuration file to configure another switch that has the same
GBIC model installed, the configuration file settings will also apply to and
override the existing GBIC settings.

Table 152 describes the parameters that are not saved to the configuration file.

Table 152 Parameters not saved to the configuration file

These parameters are not saved: Used in this screen: See page:

In-Band Stack IP Address IP Configuration/Setup 385


In-Band Switch IP Address
In-Band Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Configuration Image Filename Configuration File Download/Upload 397
TFTP Server IP Address

System Configuration Guide


400 Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management

Table 152 Parameters not saved to the configuration file

These parameters are not saved: Used in this screen: See page:

Console Read-Only Switch Password Console/Comm Port Configuration 400


Console Read-Write Switch Password
Console Read-Only Stack Password
Console Read-Write Stack Password

Enabling and disabling autosave


The Configuration File Download/Upload page (Figure 164) also allows you to
enable and disable the autosave feature on the switch or stack.

To enable or disable autosave:

1 From the main menu, choose Configuration > Configuration File.


The Configuration File Download/Upload page opens (Figure 164).

2 Under Autosave Configuration, choose Enabled or Disabled from the


drop-down list.
3 Click Submit.

Configuring port communication speed


You can view the current console/communication port settings and configure the
console port baud rate to match the baud rate of the console terminal.

To view current console/communication port settings and configure console port


speed:

1 From the main menu, choose Configuration > Console/Comm Port.


The Console/Communication Port page opens (Figure 165).

320985-A
Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management 401

Figure 165 Console/Communication Port page

Table 153 describes the items on the Console/Communication Port page.

Table 153 Console/Communication Port page items

Item Range Description

Comm Port Data Bits The current console communication port data bit
setting.
Comm Port Parity The current console communication port parity setting.
Comm Port Stop Bits The current console communication port stop bit
setting.
Console Port Speed 2400 Choose the console port speed baud rate.
4800
9600 Note: The default setting is 9600.
19200
38400
Caution: If you choose a baud rate that does not
match your console terminal baud rate, you will lose
communication with the configuration interface when
you click Submit.

2 Select from the list.


3 Click Submit.

System Configuration Guide


402 Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management

Configuring Rate Limiting


Broadcast Rate Limiting is a box-oriented feature which allows you to configure
threshold limits for either broadcast or multicast packets ingressing on a port for a
given time interval (in packets per second). If the configured threshold exceeds on
a port, the switch will drop extra packets received. No SNMP trap or syslog is
generated in case of congestion.

Configuring Rate Limiting

To configure Rate Limiting using the Web-based management system:

1 From the main menu, choose Application > Rate Limiting.


The Rate Limiting page opens (Figure 166).

Figure 166 Rate Limiting page

Table 154 describes the items on the Rate Limiting page.

Table 154 Rate Limiting page items

Section Description

Port The port number that corresponds to the selected


switch.
Unit The number of the unit in the stack.

320985-A
Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management 403

Table 154 Rate Limiting page items (continued)

Section Description

Packet Type Select the type of packet.


Limit Configure the threshold limit for the selected type
of packet.

2 On the Rate Limiting page, type information in the text boxes, or select from
a list.
3 Click Submit.

System Configuration Guide


404 Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management

320985-A
405

Chapter 13
Troubleshooting

This chapter describes how to isolate and diagnose problems with your Ethernet
Switch 325/425 and covers the following topics:

Interpreting the LEDs


Diagnosing and correcting problems on page 405
Normal power-up sequence
Port connection problems

Interpreting the LEDs


For information on interpreting the LEDs for the Ethernet Switch 325, refer to
Figure 4 on page 60. For information on interpreting the LEDs for the Ethernet
Switch 425, refer to Figure 8 on page 76.

Diagnosing and correcting problems


Before you execute the problem-solving steps described in this section, cycle the
power to the Ethernet Switch 325/425 (disconnect and then reconnect the AC
power cord); then verify that the switch follows the normal power-up sequence.

Warning: To avoid injury from hazardous electrical current, do not


remove the top cover of the device. There are no user-serviceable
components inside.

System Configuration Guide


406 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting

Vorsicht: Um Verletzungsgefahr durch einen elektrischen Stromschlag


auszuschlieen, nehmen Sie niemals die obere Abdeckung vom Gert ab.
Im Gerteinnern befinden sich keine Komponenten, die vom Benutzer
gewartet werden knnen.

Avertissement: Pour viter tout risque d'lectrocution, ne jamais


retirer le capot de l'appareil. Cet appareil ne contient aucune pice
accessible par l'utilisateur.

Advertencia: A fin de evitar daos personales por corrientes elctricas


peligrosas, no desmonte nunca la cubierta superior de este dispositivo.
Los componentes internos no son reparables por el usuario.

Avvertenza: Per evitare lesioni fisiche dovute a scariche pericolose di


corrente, non rimuovere mai il coperchio superiore del dispositivo. I
componenti interni non possono essere manipolati dall'utente.

Normal power-up sequence

In a normal power-up sequence, the LEDs appear as follows:

1 After power is applied to the switch, the Pwr (Power) LED turns on within 5
seconds.
2 The switch initiates a self-test, during which the port LEDs display various
patterns to indicate the progress of the self-test.
3 After the self-test, the remaining port LEDs indicate their operational status,
as described in Table 155.

320985-A
Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 407

Table 155 Corrective actions

Symptom Probable cause Corrective action

All LEDs are off. The switch is not receiving AC Verify that the AC power cord is fastened securely
power. at both ends and that power is available at the AC
power outlet.
The fans are not operating or Verify that there is sufficient space for adequate
the airflow is blocked, causing airflow on both sides of the switch.
the unit to overheat.
Note: Operating temperature for the
switch must not exceed 40C (104F). Do
not place the switch in areas where it can
be exposed to direct sunlight or near
warm air exhausts or heaters.

The Activity LED for a The switch is experiencing a See Port connection problems.
connected port is off or port connection problem.
does not blink (and you
have reason to believe The switchs link partner is not
that traffic is present). autonegotiating properly.

Port connection problems

You can usually trace port connection problems to either a poor cable connection
or an improper connection of the port cables at either end of the link. To remedy
these types of problems, make sure that the cable connections are secure and that
the cables connect to the correct ports at both ends of the link.

Port connection problems are also traceable to the autonegotiation mode or the
port interface.

Autonegotiation modes

Port connection problems can occur when a port (or station) is connected to
another port (or station) that is not operating in a compatible mode (for example,
connecting a full-duplex port on one station to a half-duplex port on another
station).

The Ethernet Switch 325/425 negotiates port speeds according to the IEEE 802.3u
autonegotiating standard. The switch adjusts (autonegotiates) its port speed and
duplex mode to match the best service provided by the connected station, up to
100 Mb/s in full-duplex mode as follows:

System Configuration Guide


408 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting

If the connected station uses a form of autonegotiation that is not compatible


with the IEEE 802.3u autonegotiating standard, the Ethernet Switch 325/425
cannot negotiate a compatible mode for correct operation.
If the autonegotiation feature is not present or not enabled at the connected
station, the Ethernet Switch 325/425 may not be able to determine the correct
duplex modes.

In both situations, the Ethernet Switch 325/425 autosenses the speed of the
connected station and, by default, reverts to half-duplex mode. If the connected
station is operating in full-duplex mode, it cannot communicate with the switch.

To correct this mode mismatch problem:

1 Use the Port Configuration screen to disable autonegotiation for the suspect
port (see Port Configuration screen on page 109).
2 Manually set the Speed/Duplex field to match the speed/duplex mode of the
connected station.
You may have to try several settings before you find the correct speed/duplex
mode of the connected station.

If the problem persists:

1 Disable the autonegotiation feature at the connected station.


2 Manually set the speed/duplex mode of the connected station to the same
speed/duplex mode you have manually set for the Ethernet Switch 325/425
port.

Port interface

Ensure that the devices are connected using the appropriate crossover or
straight-through cable (see Appendix B, Connectors and pin assignments, on
page 425), or that autonegotiation is active.

320985-A
409

Appendix A
Installing an SFP Transceiver

SFPs are hot-swappable input and output enhancement products that allow
Gigabit Ethernet ports to link to Short Wavelength (SX), Long Wave length (LX),
and Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexed (CWDM) fiber optic networks.

The Ethernet Switch 425 has two front-panel ports. They are port numbers 25 and
26 on the Ethernet Switch 425-24T and port numbers 49 and 50 on the Ethernet
Switch 425-48T.

If you insert an SFP GBIC into one on these ports, that port handles gigabit
Ethernet speed only. If there are no optional SFPs inserted in to these ports, they
function at 10/100/1000 Mbps ports.

This appendix describes technical specifications and installation instructions on


Small Form Factor Pluggable (SFP) transceivers, which includes the includes
Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexed (CWDM) SFPs, that are supported by
the Ethernet Switch 425.

Note: The term SFP is used in this chapter to describe features or


technical specifications of an SFP and a CWDM SFP.

This chapter includes the following topics:

Guidelines on page 410


Product Description on page 410
Installing SFPs on page 414
Technical Specifications on page 416
How to get help on page 423

System Configuration Guide


410 Installing an SFP Transceiver

Guidelines
Before installing an SFP, read the following guidelines:

SFP GBICs are static sensitive.


To prevent damage from ElectroStatic Discharge (ESD), follow your normal
board and component handling procedures.
SFP GBICs, are dust sensitive.
When you store an SFP GBIC, or when you disconnect it from a fiber optic
cable, always keep the dust cover over the SFP GBIC optical bore.
To clean contaminants from the optical bores of a SFP GBIC, use an alcohol
swab or equivalent to clean the ferrules of the optical connector.
Dispose this product (if necessary) according to all national laws and
regulations.

Warning: Fiber optic equipment can emit laser or infrared light that can
injure your eyes. Never look into an optical fiber or connector port.
Always assume that fiber optic cables are connected to a light source.

Product Description
This section describes the SFP and label, and provides a model list for
1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX SFPs.

This section also describes the Nortel Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexed
(CWDM) SFPs and provides a CWDM SFP model list.

This section includes the following topics:

Locking/extractor mechanisms on page 411


SFP labeling on page 411
SFP models on page 412
CWDM SFP models on page 413

320985-A
Installing an SFP Transceiver 411

Locking/extractor mechanisms

Depending on the transceiver manufacturer, an SFP transceiver can have various


types of locking/extractor mechanisms.

Figure 167 on page 411 shows two types of locking/extractor mechanisms used
on SFP and XFP transceivers.

Figure 167 Locking/extractor mechanism

SFP labeling

The Nortel label on a typical SFP contains a Nortel serial number, a bar code, a
manufacturers code, an interface type, and a part number. See Figure 168 on
page 412.

System Configuration Guide


412 Installing an SFP Transceiver

Figure 168 Nortel SFP label

SFP models

SFPs are hot-swappable input/output enhancement components designed for use


with Nortel products to allow Gigabit Ethernet ports to link with other Gigabit
Ethernet ports over various media types. Table 156 lists and describes the Nortel
SFP models that are supported by the Ethernet Switch 425.

Table 156 1000BASE-SFP models

Model number Product Number Description

1000Base-SX SFP GBIC AA1419013 Small Form Factor


(mini-GBIC, connector type: Pluggable, short wavelength
LC). 550 m
1-port 1000Base-SX SFP AA1419014 Small Form Factor
GBIC (mini-GBIC, connector Pluggable, short wavelength
type: MT-RJ). 550 m
1-port 1000Base-LX SFP AA1419015 Small Form Factor
GBIC (mini-GBIC, connector Pluggable, long wavelength
type: LC). 5 km

320985-A
Installing an SFP Transceiver 413

Note: The cable distance may vary depending on the quality of fiber
optic cable used.

CWDM SFP models


CWDM SFPs are transceivers that link Gigabit Ethernet ports with fiber optic
networks. WDM technology consolidates multiple optical channels, using specific
wavelengths to expand available bandwidth, on a common optical fiber.

CWDM SFPs are components in the optical routing system, designed to support
high speed data communications for Metropolitan Area Networks (MANs). The
system uses a grid of eight CWDM optical wavelengths in both ring and
point-to-point configurations. All components are color-coded by wavelength.
Table 157 lists the Nortel CWDM SFPs and describes their wavelengths, color
codes, part numbers, and cable lengths.

Table 157 Nortel CWDM SFP transceiver list

CWDM SFP Product number Cable length

1470nm/Gray AA1419025A 40 KM
A1419033 70 KM
1490nm/Violet AA1419026 40 KM
AA1419034 70 KM
1510nm/Blue AA1419027 40 KM
AA1419035 70 KM
1530nm/Green AA1419028 40 KM
AA1419036 70 KM
1550nm/Yellow AA1419029 40 KM
AA1419037 70 KM
1570nm/Orange AA1419030 40 KM
AA1419038 70 KM

System Configuration Guide


414 Installing an SFP Transceiver

Table 157 Nortel CWDM SFP transceiver list (continued)

CWDM SFP Product number Cable length

1590nm/Red AA1419031 40 KM
AA1419039 70 KM
1610nm/Brown AA1419032 40 KM
AA1419040 70 KM

Note: The cable distance may vary depending on the quality of fiber
optic cable used.

Installing SFPs
Caution: SFPs are keyed to prevent incorrect insertion. If an SFP resists
pressure, do not force it; turn it over, and reinsert it.

To install an SFP:

1 Remove the SFP from its protective packaging.


2 Verify that the SFP is the correct model for your network configuration. See
Table 156 on page 412 for information on the SFPs models supported.
3 Grasp the SFP between your thumb and forefinger.
4 Insert the SFP into the SFP slot on the module.
See Figure 169 on page 415. Apply light pressure to the SFP until the device
clicks and locks into position in the module.

320985-A
Installing an SFP Transceiver 415

Figure 169 Inserting an SFP

Removing an SFP

To remove an SFP

1 Disconnect the network fiber cable from the SFP connector.


2 Depending on your SFP model, press the locking/extractor mechanism on the
SFP to release the SFP.

Note: Your SFP locking/extractor mechanism may be different than the


models shown.

System Configuration Guide


416 Installing an SFP Transceiver

Figure 170 Removing an SFP

3 Slide the SFP out of the module SFP slot.


4 If the SFP does not slide easily from the module slot, use a gentle side-to-side
rocking motion while firmly pulling the SFP from the slot.
5 Attach a dust cover over the fiber optic bores and store the SFP in a safe place
until needed.

Note: If you are discarding the SFP, be sure to dispose the SFP
according to national laws and regulations.

Technical Specifications
This section includes the following topics:

SFP specifications on page 417


CWDM SFP specifications on page 421

320985-A
Installing an SFP Transceiver 417

SFP specifications

This section provides technical specifications for the SFP models and includes the
following topics:

SFP physical specifications


1000BASE-SX (LC Type) specifications on page 418
1000BASE-LX (LC Type) specifications on page 418
1000BASE-SX (MT-RJ Type) specifications on page 420

SFP physical specifications

This section provides technical specifications for the following SFP models:

Table 158 describes general specifications for 1000BASE-SX, and


1000BASE-LX SFPs.

Table 158 Technical specifications for 1000BASE-SX, and 1000BASE-LX SFPs

Specification Description

Dimensions (H x W x D) 0.53 x 0.33 x 2.22 inches(13.4 x 8.5 x 56.4 mm)


Connectors Multimode fiber optic: LC or MT-RJ
Single-mode fiber optic: LC or MT-RJ
Single-fiber LC fiber optic connector

System Configuration Guide


418 Installing an SFP Transceiver

1000BASE-SX (LC Type) specifications

The Model 1000BASE-SX SFP provides 1000BASE-SX (850 nm, short


wavelength, Gigabit Ethernet) connectivity using LC duplex multimode fiber
connectors. The Model 1000BASE-SX SFP supports full-duplex operation only.
Table 159 describes standards, connectors, cabling, and distance for the Model
1000BASE-SX SFP.

Table 159 1000BASE-SX SFP specifications

Type Specification

Standards Conforms to the following standards:


802.3z, 1000BASE-SX
Connectors Duplex LC fiber optic connector
Cabling 62.5 m MMF optic cable
50 m MMF optic cable
Distance 902 ft. (275 m) using 62.5 m MMF optic
cable
1804 ft. (550 m) using 50 m MMF optic
cable
Wavelength 850 nm
Optical budget 7 dB
Laser Transmitter characteristics
Minimum launch power -10 dBm
Maximum launch power -4 dBm
Receiver characteristics
Minimum receiver sensitivity -17 dBm
Maximum power input 0 dBm

1000BASE-LX (LC Type) specifications


The Model 1000BASE-LX SFP provides 1000BASE-LX (1310 nm, long
wavelength, Gigabit Ethernet) connectivity using LC duplex fiber connectors. The
long wavelength optical transceivers used in the LX model provide variable
distance ranges using both multimode and single-mode fiber optic cabling. The
Model 1000BASE-LX supports full-duplex operation only.

320985-A
Installing an SFP Transceiver 419

Table 160 describes standards, connectors, cabling, and distance for the Model
1000BASE-LX SFPs.

Table 160 1000BASE-LX SFP specifications

Type Specification

Standards Conforms to the following standards:


802.3z, 1000BASE-LX
Connectors Duplex LC fiber optic connector
Cabling 62.5 m MMF optic cable
50 m MMF optic cable
10 m SMF optic cable
Distance 1804 ft. (550 m) using 62.5 m MMF optic
cable
1804 ft. (550 m) using 50 m MMF optic
cable
16405 ft. (5 km) using 10 m SMF optic
cable
Wavelength 1310 nm
Optical budget 10.5 dB
Laser Transmitter characteristics
Minimum launch power -9.5 dB
Maximum launch power -3.0 dB
Receiver characteristics
Minimum receiver sensitivity -20.0 dBm
Maximum power input -3.0 dBm

System Configuration Guide


420 Installing an SFP Transceiver

1000BASE-SX (MT-RJ Type) specifications

The Model 1000BASE-SX (MT-RJ Type) SFP GBIC provides Gigabit Ethernet
connectivity using MT-RJ multi-mode fiber connectors. Table 161 describes
standards, connectors, cabling, and distance for the Model 1000BASE-SX
(MT-RJ Type) SFP GBIC.

Table 161 1000BASE-SX SFP specifications

Type Specification

Standards Conforms to the following standards:


802.3z, Ethernet full duplex
Connectors Duplex MT-RJ fiber optic connector
Cabling 62.5 m MMF optic cable
50 m MMF optic cable
Distance 902 ft. (275 m) using 62.5 m MMF optic
cable
1804 ft. (550 m) using 50 m MMF optic
cable
Laser Transmitter characteristics
Wavelength 850 nm
Maximum spectral width 0.85 nm
Minimum launch power -9.5 dB
Maximum launch power -4.0 dB
Receiver characteristics
Minimum receiver sensitivity -17.0 dBm
Maximum power input 0 dBm

320985-A
Installing an SFP Transceiver 421

CWDM SFP specifications


Table 162 describes CWDM SFP (70 km) specifications.

Table 162 CWDM SFP (70 km) specifications

Item Specification

Physical dimensions 0.457 X .604 X 2.18 inches


(11.6 X 15.3 X 55.43 mm)
Connectors Duplex LC fiber optic
Cabling SMF, 9 m
Data rate Nominal range: 1.0625 to 1250 Mbaud
Average launch power minimum: -3 dBm
maximum: +2 dBm
Optical budget 20 dBm
Operating temperature 0oC to 60oC
range
Regulatory Class 1 devices per FDA/CDRH and
1EC8251 Laser Safety Regulations
Receiver Characteristics
Minimum receiver sensitivity -23 dBm
Maximum input power -3 dBm

Note: A minimum attenuation of 5 dBm must be present between the


transmitter and receiver. To avoid receiver saturation, you must insert a
minimum attenuation of 5 dBm when:
testing the CWDM SFP in loopback mode.
using short runs of fiber with no intermediate CWDM OADM or
CWDM OMUX.
To determine the expected signal loss for a CWDM OADM, CWDM
OMUX, or fiber length, see Installation and Networking Guidelines for
Optical Routing.
Given a loss budget of 24 dBm and assuming fiber loss of .25 dB/km, up
to 96 km reach is supported with no intermediate CWDM OADM or
CWDM OMUX.

System Configuration Guide


422 Installing an SFP Transceiver

Table 163 describes CWDM SFP (40 km) specifications.

Table 163 CWDM SFP (40 km) specifications

Item Specification

Physical dimensions 0.457 X .604 X 2.18 inches


(11.6 X 15.3 X 55.43 mm)
Connectors Duplex LC fiber optic
Cabling SMF, 9 m
Average launch power minimum: -4 dBm
maximum: +1 dBm
Data rate Nominal range: 1.0625 to 1250 Mbaud
Optical budget 17 dBm
Operating temperature range 0oC to 60oC
Regulatory Class 1 devices per FDA/CDRH and IEC60825-1
Laser Safety Regulations
Receiver Characteristics
Minimum receiver sensitivity -21 dBm
Maximum input power -3 dBm

Note: A minimum attenuation of 5 dBm must be present between the


transmitter and receiver. To avoid receiver saturation, you must insert a
minimum attenuation of 5 dBm when:
testing the CWDM SFP in loopback mode.
using short runs of fiber with no intermediate CWDM OADM or
CWDM OMUX.
To determine the expected signal loss for a CWDM OADM, CWDM
OMUX, or fiber length, see Installation and Networking Guidelines for
Optical Routing.
Given a loss budget of 24 dBm and assuming fiber loss of .25 dB/km, up
to 96 km reach is supported with no intermediate CWDM OADM or
CWDM OMUX.

320985-A
Installing an SFP Transceiver 423

How to get help


If you have purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor
or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor or
reseller for assistance.

If you have purchased a Nortel service program, contact Nortel Technical


Support. To obtain contact information online, go to: www.nortel.com/support.
From there, click on Technical Support.From the Technical Support page, you can
open a Customer Service Request online or find the telephone number for the
nearest Technical Solutions Center.If you are not connected to the Internet, you
can call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835) to learn the telephone number for the
nearest Technical Solutions Center.

Hard-copy technical manuals


You can print selected technical manuals and release notes free, directly from the
Internet. Go to www.nortel.com/support.

Find the product for which you need documentation. Then locate the specific
category and model or version for your hardware or software product.

Use Adobe* Reader* to open the manuals and release notes, search for the
sections you need, and print them on most standard printers.

Go to Adobe Systems at the www.adobe.com URL to download a free copy of the


Adobe Reader.

System Configuration Guide


424 Installing an SFP Transceiver

320985-A
425

Appendix B
Connectors and pin assignments

This appendix describes the port connectors and pin assignments for the Ethernet
Switch 325/425.

RJ-45 (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) port connectors


The RJ-45 port connectors (Figure 171) are wired as MDI-X ports to connect
end stations without using crossover cables. (See MDI and MDI-X devices on
page 426 for information about MDI-X ports.) For 10BASE-T connections, use
Category 3 (or higher) UTP cable. For 100BASE-TX connections, use only
Category 5 UTP cable.

Figure 171 RJ-45 (8-pin modular) port connector

1 8

616EA

System Configuration Guide


426 Connectors and pin assignments

Table 164 lists the RJ-45 (8-pin modular) port connector pin assignments.

Table 164 RJ-45 port connector pin assignments

Pin Signal Description

1 RX+ Receive Data +


2 RX- Receive Data -
3 TX+ Transmit Data +
4 Not applicable Not applicable
5 Not applicable Not applicable
6 TX- Transmit Data -
7 Not applicable Not applicable
8 Not applicable Not applicable

MDI and MDI-X devices


Media dependent interface (MDI) is the IEEE standard for the interface to
unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable.

For two devices to communicate, the transmitter of one device must connect to the
receiver of the other device. The connection is established through a crossover
function, which can be a crossover cable or a port that implements the crossover
function internally.

Ports that implement the crossover function internally are known as MDI-X ports,
where X refers to the crossover function.

Note: For the transmitter of one device to connect to the receiver of


another device, the total number of crossovers must always be an odd
number.

The following sections describe the use of straight-through and crossover cables
for connecting MDI and MDI-X devices.

320985-A
Connectors and pin assignments 427

MDI-X to MDI cable connections

Ethernet Switch 325/425 switches use MDI-X ports that allow you to connect
directly to end stations without using crossover cables (Figure 172).

Figure 172 MDI-X to MDI cable connections

MDI-X to MDI-X cable connections

If you are connecting the Ethernet Switch 325/425 to a device that also
implements MDI-X ports, use a crossover cable (Figure 173).

System Configuration Guide


428 Connectors and pin assignments

Figure 173 MDI-X to MDI-X cable connections

DB-9 (RS-232-D) Console/Comm Port connector


BayStack 420 Switch Switch or hub
Ethernet 325/425
1 8 8 1 8 1 1 8

1 RX+ 1 1 RX+ 1
T T
2 RX- 2 2 RX- 2
3 TX+ 3 3 TX+ 3
4 4 4 4
R R
5 5 5 5
6 TX- 6 6 TX- 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
MDI-X port Crossover cable MDI-X port

BS45057B

The DB-9 Console/Comm Port connector (Figure 174) is configured as a data


communications equipment (DCE) connector. The DSR and CTS signal outputs
are always asserted; the CD, DTR, RTS, and RI signal inputs are not used. This
configuration enables a management station (a PC or console terminal) to connect
directly to the switch using a straight-through cable.

Figure 174 DB-9 Console port connector


1 5

6 9
619EA

Table 165 lists the DB-9 Console port connector pin assignments.

320985-A
Connectors and pin assignments 429

Table 165 DB-9 Console port connector pin assignments

Pin Signal Description

1 CD Carrier detect (not used)


2 TXD Transmit data (output)
3 RXD Receive data (input)
4 DTR Data terminal ready (not used)
5 GND Signal ground
6 DSR Not used
7 RTS Request to send (not used)
8 CTS Not used
9 RI Ring indicator (not used)
Shell Chassis ground

System Configuration Guide


430 Connectors and pin assignments

1000Base-T pinouts for the Ethernet Switch 425

Table 166 Pin descriptions for 1000Base-T pinouts

Pin MDI MDI-X


1 BI_DA+ BI_DB+
2 BI_DA BI_DB
3 BI_DB+ BI_DA+
4 BI_DC+ BI_DD+
5 BI_DC BI_DD
6 BI_DB BI_DA
7 BI_DD+ BI_DC+
8 BI_DD BI_DC

320985-A
431

Appendix C
Default settings

Table 167 lists the factory default settings for the Ethernet Switch 325/425
according to the console interface (CI) screens and fields for the settings.

Table 167 Factory default settings

Field Default setting Appears in this CI screen

BootP Request Mode BootP when needed IP Configuration/Setup screen on


page 214
In-Band Stack IP Address 0.0.0.0
(no IP address assigned)
In-Band Switch IP Address 0.0.0.0
(no IP address assigned)
In-Band Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0
(no subnet mask assigned)
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
(no IP address assigned)
Read-Only Community String public SNMP Configuration screen on
page 219
Read-Write Community String private
Trap IP Address 0.0.0.0
(no IP address assigned)
Community String Zero-length string
Autotoplology Enabled
Authentication Trap Enabled
Link Up/Down Trap Enabled

System Configuration Guide


432 Default settings

Table 167 Factory default settings (continued)

Field Default setting Appears in this CI screen

Operation Mode Stack System Characteristics screen on


page 221
Reset Count 1
Last Reset Type Power Cycle
Power Status Primary Power
sysContact Zero-length string
sysName Zero-length string
sysLocation Zero-length string

320985-A
Default settings 433

Table 167 Factory default settings (continued)

Field Default setting Appears in this CI screen

Aging Time 300 seconds MAC Address Table screen (see


Configuring and Managing
Find an Address 00-00-00-00-00-00 Security for Nortel
(no MAC address assigned) Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Software Release 3.6 (320988-A))
MAC Address Security Disabled MAC Address Security Configuration
Menu screen (see Configuring and
MAC Address Security Disabled Managing Security for Nortel
SNMP-Locked Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Partition Port on Intrusion Disabled Software Release 3.6 (320988-A))
Detected
Partition Time 0 seconds (the value 0
indicates forever)
DA Filtering on Intrusion Detected Disabled
Generate SNMP Trap on Intrusion Disabled
Clear by Ports NONE
Learn by Ports NONE
Current Learning Mode Not Learning
Trunk blank field MAC Address Security Port
Configuration screen (see
Security Disabled Configuring and Managing
Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Software Release 3.6 (320988-A))
Port List Blank field MAC Address Security Port Lists
screens (see Configuring and
Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Software Release 3.6 (320988-A))
Find an Address Blank field MAC Address Security Table screens
(see Configuring and Managing
MAC Address Blank field (no address Security for Nortel
assigned) Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Allowed Source Blank field Software Release 3.6 (320988-A))
Display/Create MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-00

System Configuration Guide


434 Default settings

Table 167 Factory default settings (continued)

Field Default setting Appears in this CI screen

EAPOL Administrative Stat Disabled EAPoL Security Configuration Screen


(see Configuring and Managing
Initialize No Security for Nortel
Authorized Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Operational Status Software Release 3.6 (320988-A))
Administrative Traffic Control Incoming and Outgoing
Operational Traffic Control Incoming and Outgoing
Re-authenticate Now No
Re-authentication Enabled
Re-authentication period 3600 seconds
Quiet Period 60 seconds
Transmit Period 30 Seconds
Supplicant Timeout 30 Seconds
Server Timeout 30 Seconds
Maximum Requests 2 attempts
Create VLAN 1 VLAN Configuration screen (see
Configuring VLANs,
Delete VLAN blank field Spanning Tree, and
VLAN Name VLAN # (VLAN number) MultiLink Trunking for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Management VLAN Yes, VLAN #1 Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
VLAN State Inactive
Port Membership Default (all ports assigned as
untagged members of
VLAN 1)
Unit 1 VLAN Port Configuration screen (see
Configuring VLANs,
Port 1 Spanning Tree, and
Filter Untagged Frames No MultiLink Trunking for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Port Name Unit 1, Port 1 Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
PVID 1
Tagging Untagged Access
Unit 1 VLAN Display by Port screen (see
Configuring VLANs,
Port 1 Spanning Tree, and
PVID 1 (read only) MultiLink Trunking for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Port Name Unit 1, Port 1 (read only) Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))

320985-A
Default settings 435

Table 167 Factory default settings (continued)

Field Default setting Appears in this CI screen

Unit 1 Port Configuration screen on


page 109.
Status Enabled (for all ports)
LnkTrap On
Autonegotiation Enabled (for all ports)
Speed/Duplex 100Mbs/Half (when
Autonegotiation is Disabled)
Autonegotiation Enabled High Speed Flow Control
Configuration screen on page 112
Speed/Duplex 100Mbs/Half (when
Autonegotiation is Disabled)
Flow Control Disabled
Trunk 1 to 6 (depending on MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu
configuration status) screen (see Configuring VLANs,
Spanning Tree, and
Trunk Members (Unit/Port) Blank field MultiLink Trunking for Nortel
STP Learning Normal Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
Trunk Mode Basic
Trunk Status Disabled
Trunk Name Trunk #1 to Trunk #6
Traffic Type Rx and Tx MultiLink Trunk Utilization screen (see
Configuring VLANs,
Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))

System Configuration Guide


436 Default settings

Table 167 Factory default settings (continued)

Field Default setting Appears in this CI screen

Monitoring Mode Disabled Port Mirroring Configuration screen


(see System Monitoring Guide for
Monitor/Unit Port Zero-length string Nortel Ethernet Switches
Unit/Port X Zero-length string 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A))
Limit 0 pps Rate Limiting Configuration screen on
page 115
Packet Type Both
Snooping Disabled IGMP Configuration Menu screen (see
Configuring IP Multicast for
VLAN 1 Nortel Ethernet Switches
Proxy Disabled 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320990-A))
Robust Value 2
Query Time 125 seconds
Set Router Ports Version 1
Static Router Ports Blank
Unit 1 Port Statistics screen (see System
Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Port 1 Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Software Release 3.6 (320989-A))
Display Messages From Volatile System Log screen (see System
Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Display configuration complete? No Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Clear Messages From None Software Release 3.6 (320989-A))

320985-A
Default settings 437

Table 167 Factory default settings (continued)

Field Default setting Appears in this CI screen

Console Port Speed 9600 Baud Console/Comm Port Configuration


screen on page 223
Console Switch Password Not Required
Console Stack Password Not Required
TELNET/WEB Switch Password None
Type
TELNET/WEB Stack Password None
Type
Console Read-Only Switch user
Password
Console Read-Write Switch secure
Password
Console Read-Only Stack user
Password
Console Read-Write Stack secure
Password
Primary RADIUS Server 0.0.0.0
Secondary RADIUS Server 0.0.0.0
RADIUS UPD Port 1645
RADIUS Shared Secret Null String
Note: The following two fields appear only when the switch is part of a stack configuration.
New Unit Number Current stack order Renumber Stack Units screen on
page 232
Renumber Units with new setting No
STP Mode IEEE 802.1s Spanning Tree Group Configuration
screen in STPG mode (see
Bridge Priority 8000 in Hex. Configuring VLANs,
Bridge Hello Time 2 seconds Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel
Bridge Max. Age Time 20 seconds Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Bridge Forward Delay Time 15 seconds Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
Bridge Max. Age Time 20 seconds
Bridge Forward Delay Time 15 seconds

System Configuration Guide


438 Default settings

Table 167 Factory default settings (continued)

Field Default setting Appears in this CI screen

Participation Normal Learning Spanning Tree Port Configuration


screen in STPG mode (see
Priority 128 Configuring VLANs,
Path Cost 10 or 100 Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel
State Topology dependent Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
Bridge Priority 0x0000 - 0xF000 Spanning Tree Switch Settings screen
in STPG mode (see
Root Path Cost 0 Configuring VLANs,
Maximum Age Time 20 seconds Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel
Forward Delay 15 seconds Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Bridge Maximum Age Time 15 seconds Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
Bridge Priority 0x8000 Spanning Tree Group Configuration
screen in RSTP mode (see
Bridge Hello Time 20 seconds Configuring VLANs,
Bridge Max. Age Time 20 seconds Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel
Bridge Forward Delay Time 15 seconds Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Default Path Cost Type 32 bits in MSTP/RSTP Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
mode
16 bits in legacy STP
mode
Not supported in STPG
mode
Priority 128 Spanning Tree Port Configuration
screen in RSTP mode (see
Path Cost 10 or 100 (1 for Gigabit port) Configuring VLANs,
Path Cost = 1000/LAN speed Spanning Tree, and
(in Mb/s) MultiLink Trunking for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))

320985-A
Default settings 439

Table 167 Factory default settings (continued)

Field Default setting Appears in this CI screen

Bridge Priority 0x8000 Spanning Tree Switch Settings screen


in RSTP mode (see
Root Port 0 Configuring VLANs,
Root Path Cost 0 Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel
Maximum Age Time 20 seconds Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Forward Delay 15 seconds Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
Bridge Hello Time 20 seconds
Bridge Max. Age Time 20 seconds
Bridge Forward Delay Time 15 seconds
Create STP Group 1 Spanning Tree Group Configuration
screen in MSTP mode (see
Delete STP Group Blank Configuring VLANs,
Bridge Priority 0x8000 Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel
Bridge Hello Time 2 seconds Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Bridge Maximum Age Time 20 seconds Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
Bridge Forward Delay Time 15 seconds
Add VLAN membership 1
Delete VLAN Membership Blank
STP Group State Active for CIST; InActive for
MSTIs 2 to 7.
Participation Normal Learning Spanning Tree Port Configuration
screen in MSTP mode (see
Priority 128 Configuring VLANs,
Path Cost 200000 (20 000 for Gigabit Spanning Tree, and
port) MultiLink Trunking for Nortel
Path Cost = 2*1010/(Number Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
of Kilobits/link) Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
State Topology dependent

System Configuration Guide


440 Default settings

Table 167 Factory default settings (continued)

Field Default setting Appears in this CI screen

Bridge Priority HEX: 0x0000 - 0xF000 Spanning Tree Switch Settings screen
in MSTP mode (see
Bridge Priority HEX: 0x0000 - 0xF000 Configuring VLANs,
Root Port 0 Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel
Root Path Cost 0 Ethernet Switches 325 and 425,
Maximum Age Time 20 seconds Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
Forward Delay 15 seconds
Bridge Forward Delay 15 seconds
Tx Hold Count 3
Hop Count (Max) 2000
Default Path Cost Type 32 bits in MSTP/RSTP
mode
16 bits in legacy
STP802.1d mode
Not supported in
STP802.1d mode
Region Name MAC address of the device
TELNET Access Enabled TELNET/SNMP/Web Access
Configuration screen on page 234
SNMP Access Enabled
Web Access Enabled, Yes
Login Timeout 1 minute
Login Retries 3
Inactivity Timeout 15 minutes
Event Logging All
Allowed Source IP Address First field: 0.0.0.0
(10 user-configurable fields) (no IP address assigned)
Remaining nine fields:
255.255.255.255
(any address is allowed)
Allowed Source Mask First field: 0.0.0.0
(10 user-configurable fields) (no IP address assigned)
Remaining nine fields:
255.255.255.255
(any address is allowed)

320985-A
Default settings 441

Table 167 Factory default settings (continued)

Field Default setting Appears in this CI screen

Image Filename Zero-length string Software Download screen on


page 237
Diagnostics Filename Zero-length string
TFTP Server IP Address 0.0.0.0
(no IP address assigned)
Start TFTP Load of New Image No
Configuration Image Filename Zero-length string Configuration File Download/Upload
screen on page 240
TFTP Server IP Address 0.0.0.0
(no IP address assigned)
Copy Configuration Image to No
Server
Retrieve Configuration Image from No
Server
ASCII Configuration Filename Zero-length string ASCII Configuration file Download on
page 244
TFTP Server IP Address 0.0.0.0
Retrieve Configuration File from No
Server
Last Manual Configuration Status Passed
Last Auto Configuration Status Passed
Auto Configuration on Reset Disabled

System Configuration Guide


442 Default settings

320985-A
443

Appendix D
Sample BootP configuration file

This appendix provides a sample BootP configuration file. The BootP server
searches for this file, called bootptab (or BOOTPTAB.TXT, depending on your
operating system), which contains the site-specific information (including IP
addresses) needed to perform the software download and configuration. You can
modify this sample BootP configuration file or create one of your own.

A sample BootP configuration file follows:

System Configuration Guide


444 Sample BootP configuration file

# The following is a sample of a BootP configuration file that was extracted


# from a Nortel EZ LAN network management application. Note that other BootP
daemons can use a configuration file with a different format.
#
# Before using your switch BootP facility, you must customize your BootP
# configuration file with the appropriate data.
#
# Blank lines and lines beginning with '#' are ignored.
#
# Legend:
#
# first field -- hostname
# ht -- hardware type
# ha -- host hardware address
# tc -- template host (points to similar host entry)
# ip -- host IP address
# hd -- bootfile home directory
# bf -- bootfile
# EZ dt -- device type
# EZ fv -- firmware version
# EZ av -- agent version
#
# Fields are separated with a pipe (|) symbol. Forward slashes (/) are
# required to indicate that an entry is continued to the next line.
#

320985-A
Sample BootP configuration file 445

# Caution
#
# Omitting a Forward slash (/) when the entry is continued to the next
# line, can cause the interruption of the booting process or the
# incorrect image file to download. Always include forward slashes
# where needed.
#
# Important Note:
#
# If a leading zero (0) is used in the IP address it is calculated as an
# octal number. If the leading character is "x" (upper or lower case),
# it is calculated as a hexadecimal number. For example, if an IP address
# with a base 10 number of 45 is written as .045 in the BOOTPTAB.TXT file,
# the Bootp protocol assigns .037 to the client.
#
# Global entries are defined that specify the parameters used by every device.
# Note that hardware type (ht) is specified first in the global entry.
#
# The following global entry is defined for an Ethernet device. Note that this
# is where a client's subnet mask (sm) and default gateway (gw) are defined.
#
global1|/
|ht=ethernet|/
|hd=c:\opt\images|/
|sm=255.255.255.0|/
|gw=192.0.1.0|
#
# The following sample entry describes a BootP client:

bay1|ht=ethernet|ha=0060fd000000|ip=192.0.0.1|hd=c:\ezlan\images|bf=bps2000_100.img
BS425-24T_100.img

# Where:
# host name: bay1
# hardware type: Ethernet
# MAC address: 00-60-FD-00-00-00
# IP address: 192.0.0.0
# home directory of boot file: c:\ezlan\images
# boot file: bps2000_100.img

System Configuration Guide


446 Sample BootP configuration file

global1|/ |ht=ethernet|/
|hd=c:\opt\images|/
|sm=255.255.255.0|/
|gw=192.0.1.0|
#
# The following sample entry describes a BootP client:
bay1|ht=ethernet|ha=0060fd000000|ip=192.0.0.1
|hd=c:\ezlan\images|bf=Hummingbird_3.5_100.img
# Where:
# host name: bay1
# hardware type: Ethernet
# MAC address: 00-60-FD-00-00-00
# IP address: 192.0.0.0
# home directory of boot file: c:\ezlan\images
# boot file: hummingbird_3.5_100.img

320985-A
447

Appendix E
Command List

This appendix provides the complete CLI command list in alphabetical order,
with approximate page references for the beginning pages of further explanations.

Note: This information is presented for reference only and should not be
considered to be an exact representation.

Table 168 CLI command list

Command Page No.

auto-negotiation-advertisements [port <portlist>] page 333


[10-full] [10-half] [100-full] [100-half] [1000-full]
[1000-half] [asymm-pause-frame] [pause-frame]
[none]
auto-negotiation-capabilities page 332
auto-pvid Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
autotopology page 297
autosave enable page 288
banner [ custom | static | disabled | <1-15> LINE | page 280
clear ]
blink-leds <off> <stop> page 312
boot [default] page 274
clear logging [nv] System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
clear-stats [port<portlist>] System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)

System Configuration Guide


448 Command List

Table 168 CLI command list (continued)

Command Page No.

cli-password {switch|stack} {ro|rw} <WORD> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
<WORD> Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
cli-password {switch|stack} {serial|telnet} Release 3.6 (320988-A)
{none|local|radius}
clock summer-time <zone> [date {<day> <month> page 295
<year> <hh:mm>} {<day> <month> <year>
<hh:mm>}] [<offset>]
clock time-zone <zone> <hours> <minutes> page 294
cmd-interface {cli|menu} page 279
configure {terminal|network} page 132
configure network [load-on-boot page 266
{disable|use-bootp|use-config}]
configure network [filename <FILENAME>]
configure network [address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>]
configure command page 132
Configuring CANA using the CLI page 331
copy config nvram page 285
copy config tftp [address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>] page 278
filename <WORD>
copy tftp config [address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>] page 278
filename <WORD>
copy running-config tftp {<IP Address> <filename>} page 270
default auto-negotiation-advertisements [port page 335
<portlist>]
default autotopology page 298
default autosave enable page 288
default command page 131
default duplex [port <portlist>] page 326
default eapol guest-vlan Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
default flowcontrol [port <portlist>] page 328
default http-port Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)

320985-A
Command List 449

Table 168 CLI command list (continued)

Command Page No.

default ip address unit <1-8> page 258


default ip bootp server page 276
default ip domain-name page 265
default lacp aggregation [port <portlist>] enable Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
default lacp mode [port <portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
default lacp priority [port <portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
default lacp system-priority Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
default lacp timeout-time [port <portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
default lldp port <portlist> config notification page 303
default lldp port <portlist> status page 306
default lldp [tx-interval] [tx-hold-multiplier] page 301
[reinit-delay] [tx-delay] [notification-interval]
default lldp tx-tlv [port <portlist>] [port-desc] page 305
[sys-name] [sys-desc] [sys-cap]
default logging System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
default mac-address-table aging-time page 146
default name [port <port.ist>] page 322
default radius-server Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
default rate-limit [port <portlist>] page 331
default logging remote level System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)

System Configuration Guide


450 Command List

Table 168 CLI command list (continued)

Command Page No.

default snmp-server authentication-trap Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel


Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
default snmp-server community [ro|rw] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
default snmp-server contact Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
default snmp-server host Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
default snmp-server location Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
default snmp-server name Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
default snmp trap link-status [port <portlist>] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
default spanning-tree [port <portlist>] [stp] [learning] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
[cost] [priority] MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
default speed [port <portlist>] page 324
default ssh [dsa-auth|pass-auth|port|timeout] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
default telnet-access Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
default ui-button page 315
default vlan igmp <1-4094> | Configuring IP Multicast for Nortel
unknown-mcast-no-flood Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320990-A)
default vlan mgmt Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

320985-A
Command List 451

Table 168 CLI command list (continued)

Command Page No.

disable page 133


download [address <ip>] {image <image-name>| page 316
image-if-newer <image-name> | diag <filename>}
[no-reset]
duplex [port <portlist>] {full|half|auto} page 323
eapol {disable|enable} Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
eapol guest-vlan [vid <1-4094> | enable] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
eapol [port <portlist>] [init] [status Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
authorized|unauthorized|auto] [traffic-control Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
in-out|in] [re-authentication enable|disable] Release 3.6 (320988-A)
[re-authentication-period <1-604800>]
[re-authenticate] [quiet-interval <num>]
[transmit-interval <num>] [supplicant-timeout
<num>] [server-timeout <num>][max-request
<num>]
enable command page 132
Enabling CANA page 331
end command page 134
exit page 134
flowcontrol [port <portlist>] page 326
{asymmetric|symmetrid|auto|disable}
help page 130
http-port <1024-65535> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
interface FastEthernet {<portlist>} page 133
ip address unit <1-8> A.B.C.D page 257
ip address[stack|switch] <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> page 252
[netmask <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>]
ip bootp server {last|needed|disable|always} page 275
ip domain-name [<LINE>] page 265
ip default-gateway <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> page 254

System Configuration Guide


452 Command List

Table 168 CLI command list (continued)

Command Page No.

ip name-server <A.B.C.D> page 263


ipmgr {source-ip <1-10> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
<XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>[mask Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
<XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>]} Release 3.6 (320988-A)
ipmgr {telnet|snmp|http} [source-ip <1-10> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
<XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> [mask Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
<XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>]] Release 3.6 (320988-A)
lacp aggregation [port <portlist>] enable Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
lacp key [port <portlist>] <1-4095> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
lacp mode [port <portlist>] {off | passive | active} Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
lacp priority [port <portlist>] <0-255> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
lacp system-priority [0-65535] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
lacp timeout-time [port <portlist>] {short | long} Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
lldp port <portlist> config notification page 302
lldp port <portlist> status [rxOnly | txAndRx | txOnly] page 305
lldp [tx-interval <5-327698>] [tx-hold-multiplier page 300
<2-10>] [reinit-delay <1-10>] [tx-delay <1-8192>]
[notification-interval <5-3600>]
lldp tx-tlv [port <portlist>] [port-desc] [sys-name] page 303
[sys-desc] [sys-cap]
logging [enable|disable] [level System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
critical|serious|informational] Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
[nv-level critical|serious|informational|none] Release 3.6 (320989-A)

320985-A
Command List 453

Table 168 CLI command list (continued)

Command Page No.

logging remote address <A.B.C.D> System Monitoring Guide for Nortel


Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
logging remote enable System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
logging remote level System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
{critical|informational|serious|none} Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
logout page 132
mac-address-table aging-time <time> page 145
mac-security [disable|enable] [filtering Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
{enable|disable}] [intrusion-detect Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
{enable|disable|forever}] [intrusion-timer <1-65535>] Release 3.6 (320988-A)
[learning-ports <portlist>] [learning
{enable|disable}]|mac-address-table|mac-da-filter|s
ecurity list [snmp-lock {enable|disable}] [snmp-trap
{enable|disable}]
mac-security [port <portlist>] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
{disable|enable|learning} Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
mac-security mac-address-table address <H.H.H.> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
{port <portlist>|security-list <1-32>} Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
mac-security mac-da-filter Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
mac-security security-list <1-32> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
mac-security security-list <portlist> Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
mlt <id> [name <trunkname>] [enable|disable] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
[member <portlist>][learning {disable|fast|normal}] MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
[bpdu{all-ports|single-port}] 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
name [port <portlist>] <LINE> page 321
no auto-pvid Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
no auto-negotiation-advertisements [port <portlist>] page 334

System Configuration Guide


454 Command List

Table 168 CLI command list (continued)

Command Page No.

no autosave enable page 288


no autotopology page 298
no-banner page 281
no clock summer-time page 296
no clock time-zone page 295
no command page 131
no eapol guest-vlan [enable] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no flowcontrol [port <portlist>] page 298
no ip address {stack|switch} page 253
no ip address unit <1-8> page 258
no ip bootp server page 276
no ip default-gateway page 254
no ip domain-name page 265
no ip name-server <A.B.C.D> page 264
no ipmgr {source-ip [<1-10>]} Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no ipmgr {telnet|snmp|http} Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no lacp aggregation [port <portlist>] enable Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
no lacp system-priority Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
no lldp port <portlist> config notification page 302
no lldp port <portlist> status page 306
no lldp tx-tlv [port <portlist>] [port-desc] [sys-name] page 304
[sys-desc] [sys-cap]
no logging System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)

320985-A
Command List 455

Table 168 CLI command list (continued)

Command Page No.

no logging remote address System Monitoring Guide for Nortel


Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
no logging remote enable System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
no logging remote level System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
no mac-security Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no mac-security mac-address-table {address Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
<H.H.H>|port <portlist>|security-list <1-32>] Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no mac-security mac-da-filter {add|delete}<H.H.H.> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no mac-security security-list <1-32> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no mlt [<id>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
no name [port <portlist>] page 322
no port-mirroring System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
no radius-server Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no rate-limit [port <portlist>] page 330
no rmon alarm [<1-65535>] System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
no rmon event System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)

System Configuration Guide


456 Command List

Table 168 CLI command list (continued)

Command Page No.

no rmon history [<1-65535>] System Monitoring Guide for Nortel


Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
no rmon stats [<1-65535>] System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
no shutdown [port <portlist>] page 320
no snmp server [authentication-trap|community Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
[ro|rw] contact|host [<host-ip> <community-string>] Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
[location|name] Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no snmp-server Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no snmp-server authentication-trap Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no snmp-server community [ro|rw] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
<community-string> Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no snmp-server contact Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no snmp-server host [<host-ip>] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
[<community-string>] Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no snmp-server host <host-ip> {v1|v2c|v3} Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no snmp-server location <text> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no snmp-server name <text> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no snmp-server user <username> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)

320985-A
Command List 457

Table 168 CLI command list (continued)

Command Page No.

no snmp-server view <viewname> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel


Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no snmp trap link-status [port <portlist>] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no ssh Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no ssh dsa-auth Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no ssh dsa-host-key Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no ssh pass-auth Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no sntp enable page 290
no sntp server <primary|secondary> page 292
no spanning-tree mstp msti <1 - 7> [port <portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
no spanning-tree [port <portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
no telnet-access [source-ip [<1-10>]] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
no tftp-server page 278
no ui-button page 315
no vlan <1-4094> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
no web-server Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)

System Configuration Guide


458 Command List

Table 168 CLI command list (continued)

Command Page No.

ping <A.B.C.D or Hostname> page 262


ping <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> [datasize <64-4096>] page 259
[{count <1-9999>} | continuous] [{timeout | -t}
<1-120>]
[interval <1-60>] [debug]
port-mirroring mode {disable | Xrx monitor-port System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
<portlist> mirror-port-X <portlist> Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
qos egressmap ds <0-63> 1p <0-7> Configuring QoS for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320987-A)
qos egressmap enable Configuring QoS for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320987-A)
radius-server host <address> [secondary-host Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
<address>] port <num> key <string> Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
radius-server password fallback Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
rate-limit [port <portlist>] {multicast <pct>| broadcast page 330
<pct>| both <pct>}
reload [force] [minutes-to-wait <1-60>] [cancel] page 136
renumber unit page 143
restore factory-default [ -y ] page 261
rmon alarm <1-65535> <WORD> <1-2147483647> System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
{absolute|delta} rising threshold Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
<-2147483648-2147483647> [<1-65535>] Release 3.6 (320989-A)
falling-threshold <-2147483648-2147483647>
[<1-65535>] [owner <LINE>]
rmon event <1-65535> [log] [trap] [description System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
<LINE>] [owner <LINE>] Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
rmon history <1-65535> <LINE> <1-65535> System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
<1-3600> [owner <LINE>] Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
rmon stats <1-65535> <port> [owner <LINE>] System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)

320985-A
Command List 459

Table 168 CLI command list (continued)

Command Page No.

save config page 286


show arp-table page 282
show auto-negotiation-advertisements [port page 331
<portlist>]
show auto-negotiation-capabilities [port <portlist>] page 332
show autosave page 287
show autotopology nmm-table page 299
show autotopology settings page 298
show banner [ custom | static ] page 281
show config-network page 267
show cli [info|mode|password] page 272
show clock summer-time page 296
show clock time-zone page 296
show eapol Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
show eapol guest-vlan Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
show http-port Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
show interfaces [names] [<portlist>] page 283
show interfaces [<portlist>] config page 284
show ip address [address [stack|switch]] page 256
show ip [bootp] [default-gateway] [address page 255
[stack|switch]]
show ip dns page 262
show ipmgr Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
show lacp debug member [portlist] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

System Configuration Guide


460 Command List

Table 168 CLI command list (continued)

Command Page No.

show lacp port [<portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and


MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show lacp stats [port <portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show lacp system Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show lldp [local-sys-data] [mgmt-sys-data] [stats] page 307
show lldp [port <portlist>] [neighbor] page 309
[neighbor-mgmt-addr] [rx-stats] [tx-stats] [tx-tlv]
show logging [config] [critical] [informational] System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
[serious] [sort-reverse] Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
show mac-address-table [vid <1-4094>] [aging-time] page 144
[address <H.H.H>] [port <LINE>] [include/exclude
<pattern>]
show mac-security {config|mac-address-table Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
[address Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
<macaddr>]|port|security-lists|mac-da-filter} Release 3.6 (320988-A)
show mlt [utilization <1-6>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show port-mirroring System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
show port-statistics [port <portlist>] System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
show qos egressmap ds <1-63> Configuring QoS for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320987-A)
show qos egressmap status Configuring QoS for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320987-A)
show radius-server Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
show rate-limit page 329

320985-A
Command List 461

Table 168 CLI command list (continued)

Command Page No.

show rmon alarm System Monitoring Guide for Nortel


Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
show rmon event System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
show rmon history System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
show rmon stats System Monitoring Guide for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320989-A)
show running-config page 269
show snmp-server community Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
show sntp page 289
show spanning-tree {config|port} Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show spanning-tree mstp config Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show spanning-tree mstp msti config <1 - 7> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show spanning-tree mstp msti port config <1 - 7> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
[<portlist>] MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show spanning-tree mstp msti port statistics <1 - 7> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
[<portlist>] MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show spanning-tree mstp msti statistics <1 - 7> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show spanning-tree mstp port config [<portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)

System Configuration Guide


462 Command List

Table 168 CLI command list (continued)

Command Page No.

show spanning-tree mstp port statistics [<portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show spanning-tree mstp statistics Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show spanning-tree mstp status Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show spanning-tree rstp config Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show spanning-tree rstp port config [<portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show spanning-tree rstp port statistics [<portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show spanning-tree rstp port status [<portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show spanning-tree rstp statistics Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show spanning-tree rstp status Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show ssh download-auth-key Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
show ssh global Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
show ssh session Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
show stack-info page 141
show sys-info page 138

320985-A
Command List 463

Table 168 CLI command list (continued)

Command Page No.

show tech page 139


show telnet-access Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
show terminal page 271
show tftp-server page 277
show ui-button page 314
show vlan configcontrol Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show vlan igmp <1-4094> Configuring IP Multicast for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320990-A)
show vlan interface info [<portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show vlan interface vids [<portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
show vlan multicast membership <1-4094> Configuring IP Multicast for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320990-A)
show vlan vid <1-4094> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
shutdown [force] [minutes-to-wait <1-60>] [cancel] page 134
shutdown [port <portlist>] page 319
snmp-server {enable|disable} Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
snmp-server authentication-trap {enable|disable} Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
snmp-server bootstrap <minimum-secure> | Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
<semi-secure> |<very-secure> Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)

System Configuration Guide


464 Command List

Table 168 CLI command list (continued)

Command Page No.

snmp-server community <community-string> [ro|rw] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
snmp-server community <community-string> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
{read-view <view-name>|write-view <view-name>| Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
notify-view <view-name>} Release 3.6 (320988-A)
snmp-server contact <text> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
snmp-server host <host-ip> [port <1-65535>] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
<community-string> Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
snmp-server host <host-ip> [port <1-65535>] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
{<community-string>|v2c <community-string>| Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
v3 {auth|no-auth|auth-priv} <username>} Release 3.6 (320988-A)
snmp-server location <text> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
snmp-server name <text> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
snmp-server user <username> [read-view Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
<view-name>] [write-view <view-name>] Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
[notify-view <view-name>] Release 3.6 (320988-A)
[{md5|sha} <password>[read-view <view-name>]
[write-view <view-name>][notify-view <view-name>]
[{3des|aes|des} <password> [read-view
<view-name>]
[write-view <view-name>][notify-view <view-name>]
snmp-server view <view-name> <OID> [<OID> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
[<OID> [<OID> [<OID> [<OID> [<OID> [<OID> Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
[<OID> [<OID>]]]]]]]]] Release 3.6 (320988-A)
snmp trap link-status [port <portlist>] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software
Release 3.6 (320988-A)
sntp enable page 290
sntp server primary address <A.B.C.D> page 291

320985-A
Command List 465

Table 168 CLI command list (continued)

Command Page No.

sntp server secondary address <A.B.C.D> page 291


sntp sync-interval <0-168> page 293
sntp sync-now page 293
spanning-tree mstp [max-hop <600 - 4000>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
[forward-time <4 - 30>] [max-age <6 - 40>] MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
[pathcost-type {bits16 | bits32}][priority {0000 | 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
10000 | 20000 | | F0000}] [tx-hold count <1 - 10>]
[version {stp-compatible | rstp| mstp}] [add-vlan
<1-4094>] [remove-vlan <1-4094>] [msti <1-7>]
[region {config-id-sel|region-name|region-version}]
spanning-tree mstp msti <1 - 7> [port Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
<portlist>]enable MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
spanning-tree mstp msti <1 - 7> [port Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
<portlist>]disable MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
spanning-tree mstp msti <1 - 7> [port <portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
[cost <1 - 200000000>][learning {disable | MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
enable}][priority {00 | 10 | | F0}] 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
spanning-tree mstp msti<1 - Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
7>[priority{0000|1000||F000}] [add-vlan MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
<vid>][remove-vlan <vid>][enable] 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
spanning-tree mstp [port <portlist>] [cost <1 - Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
200000000>][edge-port {false | true}][hello-time <1 - MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
10>] [learning {disable | enable}][p2p {auto | 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
force-false | force-true}][priority {00 | 10 | | F0}]
[protocol-migration {false | true}]
spanning-tree mstp region [config-id-sell <0 - 255>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
[region-name <1 - 32 chars>][region-version <0 - MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
65535>] 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
spanning-tree [port <portlist>] [learning Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
{disable|normal|fast}] [cost <1-65535>] [priority MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
<0-255>] 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
spanning-tree rstp[forward-time<4 - 30>] [hello-time Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
<1 - 10>][max-age <6 - 40>] MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
[pathcost-type{ bits16 | bits32}] 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
[priority{0000|10000|20000| | F0000}]
[tx-holdcount<1 - 10>]
[version stp-compatible|rstp}]

System Configuration Guide


466 Command List

Table 168 CLI command list (continued)

Command Page No.

spanning-tree rstp [port <portlist>] [cost <1 - Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and
200000000>] [edge-port {false | true}] [learning MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches
{disable | enable}] [p2p {auto | force-false | 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
force-true}][priority {00 | 10 | | F0}]
[protocol-migration {false | true}]
speed [port <portlist>] {10|100|1000|auto} page 323
ssh